Report ✓ °f
® O '` ",
L I T J
i '
JpEco),(rg 0
Tenant Improvement for a New PETCO Store
"South Tigard, OR"
Tigard Promenade 1 ,( F(C
15660 S.W. Pacific Highway (99W) City of Tigard
Tigard, OR 97224 Ap • rove • Plans
B 4 �'� 6 Date 2— IA l�
Project Manual y
Basis of Design: PETCO Maximus Prototype t� —
PETCO Job No. 11457 ��'
OFFICE COPY
Owner PETCO ANIMAL SUPPLIES STORES, INC.
(Tenant in Fee): 9125 Rehco Road
San Diego, California 92121
(Refer to Section 01200 for contact information)
Architect SBLM Architects
(Tenant Improvement): 151 West 26 Street, Second Floor
New York, NY 10001
212 - 995 -5600
Mechanical/ Electrical Engineer Acertus Consulting Group
(Tenant Improvement): 14817 West 95 Street
Lenexa, KS 66215
913- 322 -5150
•
Architect's Project Number 11106
100% Permit Submission
December 16, 2011
1
Tenant Improvement for a
New PETCO Store "South Tigard, OR" Philip Magnuson
Tigard Promenade Tenant Improvement Architect of Record
15660 S.W. Pacific Highway (99W) Oregon License No. 3555
Tigard, OR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 Summary of Work (Exhibit B) 1 — 3
List of Drawings (Exhibit B)
01100 Bid Alternates, Voluntary Bid Alternates & Allowances 1 — 2
01200 Construction Administration 1 — 4
Contractor's "Construction Phase Request for Information" Form
01340 Submittals 1 — 4
Contractor's "Construction Phase Request for Product Substitution" Form
01410 Construction Quality Control Services 1 — 5
01420 Site Investigation Data NOT USED 0 — 0
Geotechnical Investigation Report
01700 Contract Closeout 1 — 5
Contractor's "Notice of Completion" Form
01710 Construction & Final Cleaning 1 — 3
01730 Reference Standards 1 — 2
•
DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK
02060 Demolition Work NOT USED 0 — 0
02200 Earthwork NOT USED 0 — 0
02220 Trenching 1 — 3
02510 Asphalt Paving NOT USED 0 — 0
02520 Concrete Paving NOT USED 0 — 0
02530 Asphalt Patching & Crack Sealing NOT USED 0 — 0
02710 Foundation Damp - proofing NOT USED 0 — 0
02720 Foundation Waterproofing & Drainage System NOT USED 0 — 0
02810 Irrigation System NOT USED 0 — 0
02950 Landscaping NOT USED 0 — 0
All
•
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete NOT USED 0 — 0
03310 Concrete Floor Preparation 1 — 2
DIVISION 4 — MASONRY
04220 Concrete Unit Masonry NOT USED 0 — 0
PETCO South Tigard, OR TABLE OF CONTENTS
00002- 121611 PAGE 1 OF 3
• Tenant Improvement for a
New PETCO Store "South Tigard, OR" Philip Magnuson
Tigard Promenade Tenant Improvement Architect of Record
15660 S.W. Pacific Highway (99W) Oregon License No. 3555
Tigard, OR
DIVISION 5 — METALS
05120 Structural Steel NOT USED 0 — 0
05200 Metal Joists NOT USED 0 — 0
05300 Metal Decking NOT USED 0 — 0
05400 Cold- Formed Metal Framing 1 — 2
05500 Metal Fabrications 1 — 4
•
DIVISION 6 — WOOD & PLASTICS
06200 Rough & Finish Carpentry 1 — 4
DIVISION 7 — THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07190 Moisture Mitigation Systems 1 — 3
07210 Building Insulation 1 — 2
07240 Water Managed EIFS NOT USED 0 — 0
07250 Exterior Insulation Finish System Repairs 1 — 3
07500 Roofing System NOT USED 0 — 0
07540 Roofing System Repairs 1 — 3
07600 Sheet Metal 1 — 2
07720 Roof Accessories 1 — 3
07920 Sealants & Caulking 1 — 3
DIVISION 8 — DOORS & WINDOWS
08100 Metal Doors & Frames 1 — 2
08300 Special Doors 1 — 3
08410 Aluminum Entrance Doors & Storefront 1 — 6
08710 Finish Hardware 1 — 12
08800 Glazing 1 — 2
PETCO South Tigard, OR TABLE OF CONTENTS
00002 - 121611 PAGE 2 OF 3
Tenant Improvement for a
New PETCO Store "South Tigard, OR" Philip Magnuson
Tigard Promenade Tenant Improvement Architect of Record
15660 S.W. Pacific Highway (99W) Oregon License No. 3555
Tigard, OR
DIVISION 9 — FINISHES
•
09260 Gypsum Wallboard & Partition System 1 — 5
09310 Ceramic Tile 1 — 3
09510 Acoustical Ceiling 1 — 2
09650 Resilient Flooring 1 — 8
09660 Resilient Sheet Flooring 1 — 6
09670 Epoxy Finish on Concrete 1 — 4
09720 Special Wall Surfaces 1 — 2
09900 Painting 1 — 6
09910 Concrete Sealer 1 — 2
DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES
10150 Toilet Partitions NOT USED 0 — 0
10300 PETCO- Furnished & Contractor - Provided Items 1 — 19
10400 Exterior Building & Pylon Signage 1 — 2
DIVISION 11, 12, 13, 14 — Not Used '
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL
15255 Seismic Restraints (only if req'd by code) 1 — 4
15300 Fire Suppression System 1 — 4
15400 Plumbing Systems 1 — 8
15500 HVAC Systems 1 — 6
DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL
16000 Electrical Systems 1 — 10
16600 Energy Management System 1 — 2
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR TABLE OF CONTENTS
00002- 121611 PAGE 3 OF 3
•
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY:
A. "Landlord Contractor ": Where referenced in some Sections, "Landlord Contractor" refers to
the person or entity responsible for providing all tenant improvement construction work in a
Landlord/ PETCO Lease Agreement, with the exception of work provided otherwise by a
PETCO Vendor (if any) in a contract agreement directly with PETCO.
B. "Contractor ": Where referenced in some Sections, "Contractor" refers to the SAME person or
entity as "Landlord Contractor ", responsible for providing all tenant improvement construction
work in a Landlord/ PETCO Lease Agreement, with the exception of work provided otherwise
by a PETCO Vendor (if any) in a contract agreement directly with PETCO.
C. "PETCO Contractor ": Where referenced in some Sections, the term "PETCO Contractor"
refers to a DIFFERENT person or entity than "Landlord Contractor ", "Contractor" or "PETCO
Vendor ". " PETCO Contractor" is responsible for providing tenant - specific work in a
Landlord /PETCO Lease Agreement, independent from the work of the "Landlord Contractor ",
"Contractor" or "PETCO Vendor ", and in direct contract agreement with PETCO.
D. "PETCO Vendor ": Where referenced in some Sections, the term "PETCO Vendor" refers to a
DIFFERENT person or entity than "Landlord Contractor ", "Contractor" or "PETCO
Contractor ". " PETCO Vendor" is responsible for providing tenant - specific work in a Landlord/
PETCO Lease Agreement, independent from the work of the "Landlord Contractor ",
"Contractor" or "PETCO Contractor ", and in direct contract with agreement with PETCO.
1.02 PETCO TENANT IMPROVEMENT DOCUMENTS' COORDINATION WITH BUILDING SHELL
DRAWINGS BY OTHERS:
A. Some Building Shell elements MAY be shown and specified on both the PETCO Tenant
Improvement Construction Drawings and the Landlord's Building Shell Construction
Drawings, including but not limited to:
1. Exterior Aluminum Storefront.
2. Exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors.
3. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors.
4. 3' -0" x 8' -0" Doors at Pre -Sales Receiving/ Loading Area.
5. Door Finish Hardware for Exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors, Exterior Hollow
Metal Doors, and Rolling Door.
6. Roof Hatch and Roof Hatch Safety Railing System.
7. Loading Area Provisions.
8. Trash Enclosure.
PETCO's Tenant Improvement construction documents specify a "Basis of Design"
consistent with PETCO's Prototype. Thus, the PETCO product specification for this project
shall take precedence, if it represents the greater value of work as compared to similar
products or assemblies specified in the Landlord's Building Shell Construction Drawings. The
Landlord Contractor MUST seek approval from the PETCO Project Manager for all product
substitutions to products as specified in the PETCO Tenant Improvement construction
documents.
B. The construction drawings are intended to define the scope of work, but are not intended as
• the Contractor's fabrication drawings. Each element of the work is subject to layout and
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUMMARY OF WORK
01010EB- 121611 01010 -1
fabrication criteria, all of which is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and subcontractors
working under the Contractor's direction, and is as defined by product data and shop
drawings submittals.
C. Construction Drawings shall NOT be scaled in order to determine locations of items of
construction. Larger scale details take precedence over smaller scale details. Dimensioned
details take precedence over non - dimensioned details. In the event of discrepancy between
drawings or between drawings and project manual technical specifications, the greater value
of work shall be held to be the value represented by PETCO's Construction Documents.
However, clarification should be sought from the Architect per Section 01200 - Construction
Administration prior to providing the work in question.
1.03 BUILDING SHELL STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING NOT BY PETCO / PETCO'S TENANT
IMPROVEMENT ARCHITECT:
A. The following areas of the existing building shell are affected by the new PETCO Tenant
'Improvement construction, and the Landlord/ Landlord's Contractor must provide structural
engineering services accordingly.
1. The new rooftop bearing locations for HVAC rooftop units HAVE NOT been verified for
structural adequacy by PETCO's Tenant Improvement Architect.
2. The Exterior rear elevation building shell, Rolling Door masonry opening at PETCO's
receiving area HAS NOT been designed by PETCO's Tenant Improvement Architect.
3. The Exterior rear elevation building shell, man door masonry opening at the Corridor or
Hallway from the Retail Area HAS NOT been designed by PETCO's Tenant
Improvement Architect.
4. The Interior concrete slab on grade HAS NOT been designed by PETCO's Tenant
Improvement Architect.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT: Removal of hazardous materials shall be completed by way of
a hazardous materials removal contract executed by the Landlord.
1.04 PERMIT SUBMISSION, REVIEWS, APPROVALS & FEES:
A. Permit Submission, Reviews, Approvals & Fees are the Landlord's responsibility. The cost of
printing drawings, project manuals and other documents provided by the Architect to the
. Landlord Contractor as required for Building Permit application, will be PETCO's
responsibility.
B. Final Certificate of Occupancy: The Landlord Contractor shall provide the local jurisdiction
Final Certificate of Occupancy, or its equivalent permit, so as to allow PETCO to commence
full retail and service operations, on or before the Date established in the Lease Agreement.
1.05 SITE UTILITIES: Site Utility Services to the PETCO Tenant Space shall be provided by the
Landlord Contactor in coordination with the PETCO Project Manager. Local Site Utility Providers'
points of contact may be included in the drawings for reference purposes. The Landlord Contractor
shall coordinate the issuance of all Letters of Request for Site Utility Services with the PETCO
Project Manager without delay following the Date of Commencement, so as to seek confirmation of
site utility services and schedule for site utility connections at the earliest possible calendar date.
1.06 BUILDING SHELL VERIFICATION PLAN BY LANDLORD'S CONTRACTOR:
A. The Landlord Contractor shall verify constructed "as- built" building shell conditions, and shall
provide existing conditions information to PETCO and to the Architect. The intent is to
provide PETCO with timely information regarding "as- built" shell construction conditions that
may vary from the building shell's "as designed" information —on which PETCO's Store
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUMMARY OF WORK
01010EB- 121611 01010 -2
Fixture Plan is based - -so that PETCO can take timely, corrective action with changes that
may be necessary as a result of "as- built" deviations.
1. Within the first week that PETCO Tenant Space construction work commences, the
Landlord Contractor shall accurately survey existing conditions that are identified on
the Building Shell Verification Plan as being critical tenant information for PETCO.
The following building shell areas should be specifically noted in relation to interior
face of building shell and/ columns, even if they are not specifically identified on the
Building Shell Verification Plan:
a. Verification of Interior front -to -back, and side -to -side shell dimensions, as built.
b. Verification of Column -to- Column grid dimensions, as built.
c. Verification of man door locations, as built.
d. Verification of exterior receiving door location, as built.
e. Location of Fire Suppression System's Fire Riser.
f. Location of Fire Suppression System's Fire Inspector Test.
g. Location of gas meter, if within the PETCO Tenant Space.
h. Location of water meter, if within the PETCO Tenant Space.
i. Location of Main Distribution Panel and sub - panels (if any), in the PETCO
Tenant Space.
B. Building Shell survey information and descriptive notations shall be legibly written by the
Landlord Contractor on a full -size copy of the Building Shell Verification Plan drawing, shall
be certified as "accurate and complete" by the Contractor's authorized representative, and
copies shall be sent to the following recipients:
1. PETCO Animal Supplies Stores Inc.
Attention: Jeff Johnson, PETCO Project Manager
9125 Rehco Road
San Diego CA 92121
Telephone 858 - 909 -4612
2. SBLM Architects
Attention: Sergio Henriquez, Project Architect
151 West 26 Street, Second Floor
New York, NY 10001
Telephone 212 - 995 -5600
1.07 CONCRETE FLOOR TESTING: The Landlord Contractor shall provide Concrete Moisture Testing
at interior concrete slabs scheduled to receive adhered finish flooring systems (VCT, epoxy flooring,
etc.) and is responsible for any remedies required to bring the moisture content of concrete slabs to
within allowable limits established by the product manufacturers for proper installation of flooring
materials.
1.08 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM WORK: The Fire Suppression System Subcontractor shall furnish
and install all piping and fixtures as shown on the drawings or called for in the project manual, and
as otherwise required to provide a complete and operational fire suppression system to the extent
required for acceptance and approval by the local jurisdiction.
1.09 PETCO NATIONAL ACCOUNT AND INVENTORY AGREEMENTS:
A. The Landlord Contractor must coordinate with the PETCO Project Manager regarding
provisions and scheduling for delivery of products, labor and materials provided by PETCO
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUMMARY OF WORK
01010EB- 121611 01010 -3
under National Account agreements with specified construction product and building
operations systems suppliers, for those items that the Landlord Contractor must either
provide or install.
B. PETCO/ Contractor Furnished Items as further specified in Section 10300 - PETCO- Furnished
& Contractor - Provided Items may be divided into the following general divisions:
1. National Account (Purchased by PETCO): As further defined in Section 10300-
PETCO- Furnished & Contractor- Provided Items and specific project manual sections,
PETCO has entered into National Accounts with various construction product and
building operations Vendors. PETCO direct purchases these national account products
with the following division of responsibilities between PETCO and the Landlord
Contractor:
a. Furnished and installed by PETCO/ PETCO Vendor.
b. Furnished by PETCO/ PETCO Vendor and installed by the Landlord Contractor.
c. Partially furnished and /or installed by PETCO/ PETCO Vendor, and partially
furnished and /or installed by the Landlord Contractor.
2. Inventory Agreement (Purchased by the Landlord's Contractor): As further
defined in specific Sections, PETCO has entered into Inventory Agreements with
construction product and building operations Vendors.
a. The Landlord Contractor shall provide these Inventory Agreement construction
products and building operations systems, with no substitutions permitted.
b. The cost for construction products and building operations systems to be
purchased by the Landlord Contractor under the PETCO Inventory Agreement
with the product manufacturer has generally been pre - established with the
manufacturer.
1.10 CONSTRUCTION PUNCHLIST INSPECTION: The. PETCO Construction Project Manager will
conduct a Construction Punchlist Inspection as defined in the Landlord/ Tenant Lease Agreement.
The Landlord Contractor will receive a written copy of the PETCO Project Manager's Construction
Punchlist. The Landlord Contractor shall provide all follow -up work to complete all Construction
Punchlist items on or prior to the Date of Final Completion OR date of tenant space turnover to
PETCO, as defined in the Landlord/Tenant Lease Agreement.
END OF SECTION
(PETCO "List of Drawings" to Follow)
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUMMARY OF WORK
01010EB- 121611 01010 -4
ATTACHMENT A
List of Drawings
Drawings prepared for PETCO Animal Supplies Stores Inc., by SBLM Architects and Acertus Consulting
Group, entitled "Tenant Improvement for a New PETCO Store 'South Tigard, OR, Tiger Promenade, 15660
S.W. Pacific Highway, Tigard, OR ", Architect's Project Number 11106, PETCO Job Number 11457:
Sheet Drawing Title Revision Date
A0.1 Code Data, Project Data 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A0.2 PETCO Vendor / Contractor Furnished Items 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A1.1 Building Shell Criteria "Region" 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A1.2 Building Shell Verification Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A2.1 Floor Plan and Partition Types 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A2.2 Floor Finish Layout Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A2.3 Store Fixture Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A2.4 Reflected Ceiling Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A2.5 Roof Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A3.1 Door & Finish Schedule, Door & Storefront Types 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A4.1 Exterior Elevations 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A5.1 Building Sections, Interior Wall Sections 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A5.2 Exterior Wall Sections 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A5.3 Exterior Wall Sections 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A6.1 Exterior Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A7.1 Large Scale Plans 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A8.1 Interior Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A8.2 Interior Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A8.3 Interior Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A9.1 Interior Elevations 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
A9.2 Interior Elevations 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
PME1.1 Plumbing/ Mechanical/ Electrical General Information 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
P1.1 Plumbing General Information & Schedules 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
P2.1 Plumbing Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
P3.1 Sanitary Large Scale Plans and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
P3.2 Water Large Scale Plans and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
P4.1 Plumbing Riser Diagrams and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
M1.1 Mechanical General Information and Schedules 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
M2.1 Mechanical Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
M3.1 Mechanical Large Scale Plans and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
M3.2 Mechanical Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
F1.1 Fire Suppression General Information and Schedules 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E1.1 Electrical General Information and Schedules 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E1.2 Panel Schedules 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E1.3 Electrical Single Line Diagram and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E2.1 Electrical Lighting Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E2.1A Electrical Lighting Dimensional Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E2.2 Electrical Power Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E2.3 Sound and Communication System 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E2.4 Security System Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E2.5 Energy Management System Plan 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E3.1 Electrical Large Scale Plans and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
E3.2 Electrical Large Scale Plans and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
EMS1.1 Energy Management System Information and Details 100% Permit Submission 12/16/11
PETCO South Tigard, OR
01011EB- 121611
•
SECTION 01100
BID ALTERNATES, VOLUNTARY BID ALTERNATES
& ALLOWANCES
1.01 BID ALTERNATES:
A. The Contractor shall include provisions for the following Bid Alternates as listed in the Form
•
of Proposal, and shall state the amount, in dollars, to ADD TO or DEDUCT FROM the Base
Bid Contract Sum. If there is no change in the amount of the Base Bid Contract Sum, then
write "NO CHANGE" in the Form of Proposal. The Contractor shall be bound by all
requirements and conditions of the construction drawings and the project manual as they
relate to the Bid Alternates.
1. Bid Alternates quoted on the Contractor's Form of Proposal will be reviewed and
accepted or rejected at PETCO's option. Accepted Bid Alternates will be identified in
the Owner /Contractor Construction Agreement and included in the Total Contract Sum.
•
2. The Contractor shall coordinate all related work and modify all surrounding conditions
as necessary to integrate the work of each accepted Bid Alternate.
•
B. Bid Alternate No. 1: Exterior Sun Control Window Film: NOT USED
C. There are no Bid Alternates established for this project.
1.02 VOLUNTARY BID ALTERNATES:
A. PETCO encourages and will consider Voluntary Bid Alternates, if prepared and submitted by
the Contractor, for the express purpose of reducing the total project cost. The Contractor
may, at the Contractor's option, prepare and submit proposed voluntary bid alternates as
attachments to the Form of Proposal at the time of bid submission.
B. If included as part of the Voluntary Bid Alternate, product substitutions other than those
specifically approved in this project manual can only be considered by PETCO and the
Architect/ Engineer if comprehensive product data is submitted to the Architect/ Engineer
during the bid review process - -and if so requested by PETCO. The Architect/ Engineer will
NOT review proposed product substitutions during the project's bidding phase.
1. Voluntary Bid Alternates attached to the Contractor's Form of Proposal will be reviewed
and accepted or rejected at PETCO's option. Accepted Voluntary Bid Alternates will be
identified in the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor and included in the Total
Contract Sum.
2. The Contractor shall coordinate all related work and modify all surrounding conditions
as necessary to integrate the work of each accepted Voluntary Bid Alternate.
1.03 ALLOWANCES:
A. The Contractor shall include in the Base Bid Contract Sum the Allowances described in this
Section, in the amounts noted on the Form of Proposal (if any).
B. The Allowance amount has been pre - established by PETCO, and will be adjusted as an
additive or deductive Change Order during the course of construction when actual costs are
verified and submitted to the PETCO Construction Project Manager.
C. Allowance for Replacement of VCT Flooring: NOT USED
• D. There are no Allowances established for this project.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR BID ALTERNATES, VOLUNTARY BID ALTERNATES
01100 - 121611 & ALLOWANCES
01100 -1
SECTION 01200
CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT THE JOBSITE: The Contractor shall keep a set of Drawings,
the Project Manual, Addenda and Construction Change Bulletins, and copies of all approved
submittals at the Jobsite for reference throughout the Construction Duration.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE:
A. The PETCO- approved Construction Progress Schedule will be an integral part of the project
record, and shall establish completion dates for critical path tasks and other non - critical path
construction tasks.
B. The Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule shall graphically show, preferably by Gantt
Chart format, the order and interdependence of all major construction tasks necessary to
complete the work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished. The
Construction Progress Schedule shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. PETCO Tenant Space Construction Date of Commencement.
2. Scheduled submission of required Submittals to the Architect.
3. Work integration of major sub - trades.
4. Optimum delivery dates of PETCO- Furnished Items to the jobsite (dates may be
agreed and furnished by the PETCO Project Manager).
5. NOT USED
6. Final inspection, testing, and final cleanup.
7. Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO
8. Submission of Closeout Documents to PETCO.
9. Last Date of Change Order Request submission to PETCO.
C. NOT USED
1.04 CONTRACTOR'S JOBSITE OFFICE: NOT USED
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S ON -SITE TELEPHONE, FAX MACHINE AND E -MAIL:
A. Contractor's On -Site Telephone: The Contractor shall install and maintain an On -Site
•
Telephone complete with Answering Machine or Answering Service. The Contractor shall
maintain all telephone and answering functions in working condition at ALL times of the day
for the Construction Duration.
B. Contractor's FAX Machine: The Contractor shall install a fax machine with a separate
telephone incoming telephone number and maintain the FAX machine in working condition,
at all times, for the Construction Duration. The incoming FAX line must be set to receive FAX
transmission at ALL times of the day for the Construction Duration.
C. Contractor's On -Site E -Mail: The Contractor shall install and maintain a secured, On -Site E-
Mail System to send and receive e-mail. The Contractor shall maintain e-mail and telephone
functions in working condition for the Construction Duration.
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
01200 - 121611 01200 -1
D. The Contractor's Telephone and FAX machine may be removed from the jobsite after the
Date of Substantial Completion, but in any event no later than the Date of Final Completion,
except as may be otherwise directed by the PETCO Project Manager.
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S "CONSTRUCTION PHASE REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)" FORM:
A. The Contractor may request clarifications for information contained in the Construction
Drawings or the Project Manual from the Architect, via use of the "Construction Phase
Request for Information" form (aka "RFI Form ") that follows this Project Manual Section. The
Contractor is encouraged to provide a "Proposed Solution" as part of the RFI Form, using
supplementary sketches as may be necessary to convey the Contractor's proposed solution
adequately to the Architect.
B. The RFI form is available for e-mail use and electronic editing (MSWord format), and will be
provided via e-mail by the Project Architect if requested.
C. The Architect will review and respond to RFIs prepared by the Contractor's Project Manager
or the Contractor's Project Superintendent ONLY. Subcontractors' requests for information
• will be addressed ONLY when prepared by the Contractor's Project Manager or Contractor's
Project Superintendent.
D. Architect Sub - Consultants: The Contractor shall NOT contact any Architect's Sub -
Consultants (e.g. Structural Engineer, Mechanical/ Electrical Engineer, etc.) directly, either by
telephone, FAX or by fax RFI Form. ALL communication with the Architect's consultants
MUST be with the direct involvement of the Architect.
E. The Architect's response to an RFI is NOT an authorization to proceed with extra work. The
Contractor shall NOT proceed with "additional" or "extra work" without authorization from the
PETCO Project Manager. Any work initiated by the Contractor without prior approval by the
PETCO Project Manager may be considered by PETCO to be at the Contractor's risk and
possibly at the Contractor's expense.
•
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S "CONSTRUCTION 'RFI' TRACKING REPORT" FORM:
A. The Contractor shall track the status of submitted, resolved and un- resolved Requests For
Information, via use of the "Contractor's RFI Tracking Report" Form that follows this Project
Manual Section.
B. The Contractor shall submit an updated "Contractor's RFI Tracking Report" Form to the
PETCO Project Manager on a periodic, regular basis, with frequency to be coordinated with
the PETCO Project Manager.
C. The "Contractor's RFI Tracking Report" form is available for e-mail use and electronic editing
(in MSWord format), and can be provided to the Contractor via e-mail by the Project
Architect, if requested.
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS WEEKLY MEETINGS: NOT USED
1.09 CONTRACTOR'S WEEKLY CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS:
A. Starting one week after the Date of Tenant Space Construction Commencement, and then
every Friday of each week thereafter, the Contractor shall send Digital Construction Progress
Photographs to the PETCO Project Manager.
B. Digital Photographs Format: A minimum of twenty -four (24) Digital Construction Progress
Photographs shall be sent on a weekly basis, each Friday, to the PETCO Project Manager.
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
01200 - 121611 01200 -2
Photographs shall show, in summary, the progress of construction work. A descriptive
Narrative should be included in the e-mail, where appropriate.
C. Digital Photographs shall be sent via email, with the Project Name identified in the email
cover description, to the following e-mail address.
Jeff Johnson at e-mail address: jeff.johnson @petco.com
D. Alternative to Digital Photographs: Subject to acceptance by the PETCO Project Manager,
the Contractor shall prepare and send a minimum of twenty -four (24) color 4 "x6" photographs
each week, with the subject matter comprehensively representing the general progress of the
work completed to date, with each photograph labeled on the reverse in permanent ink,
without damaging the print side, "South Tigard, OR/ PETCO PM Job #11457 ", the Date that
photographs were taken, and keyed to an attached Descriptive Narrative.
E. All photographs shall be in focus and with minimum distortion. Select locations to provide
diversified overall views and close -up views of the work, from positions that are expected to
remain accessible throughout the progress of the work.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S SECURED STORAGE AND MATERIALS STAGING: NOT USED
1.11 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: Refer to Section 01700- Contract Closeout for details of the following.
A. Local Jurisdiction Closeout Documents.
B. Final Certificate Of Occupancy.
C. Contractor's Written Request For Punchlist Inspection.
D. Construction Punchlist Inspection.
E. Contractor's Written Notice Of Punchlist Completion.
F. NOT USED
G. Spare Parts, Maintenance And Extra Materials.
H. NOT USED
I. Project Record Construction Documents.
J. Building Maintenance Manuals.
K. NOT USED
L. Last date for submission of Change Order Requests.
1.12 PUNCHLIST INSPECTION: The PETCO Project Manager will visit the project site on or about the
Date of Substantial Completion, and will prepare a Project Punchlist of incomplete or deficient work
that must be completed by the Contractor prior to the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO.
1.13 WARRANTY PUNCHLIST INSPECTION: NOT USED
END OF SECTION
( Contractor's "Construction Phase Request For Information" Forms To Follow )
( Contractor's "Construction RFI Tracking Report" Form To Follow )
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
01200 - 121611 01200 -3
•
Contractor's Construction Phase
PET@@ Request for Information
PETCO "South Tigard, OR" Petco Job No. 11457 Contractor's RFI #
To (Project Architect): Sergio Henriquez FAX: 212 - 675 -4228
From (Contractor): FAX:
By submitting this Request for Information, the Contractor certifies that the Contractor's superintendent and all involved
subcontract trades have thoroughly reviewed the Construction Drawings AND the Project Manual, and the "Field Problem"
described in this Request for Information cannot be reconciled without the Architect's Review and Response.
Contractor's Information Request to Architect: Describe "Field Problem" AND Contractor's Proposed Solution
•
Contractor's Representative. Date/ Time Sent.
❑ Contractor's Sketch is Attached ❑ Refer to Detail/ Drawing OR Project Manual/ Section:
Unless more extensive review is required, the Architect should provide response within 2 working days after receipt of the
Contractor's RFI. The Architect will issue a Response (via FAX) to both the Contractor and the PETCO Project Manager.
Architect's Response to Contractor: ❑ Architect's sketch attached: SK# Dated:
Project Architect (Printed Name/ Initial): Date/ Time Sent
Architect will FAX a copy of this Response to PETCO Project Manager Jeff Johnson (FAX: 858 - 909 - 2738)
NOTE - -The Architect's Response to the Contractor's Request for Information does NOT represent or constitute a directive
to proceed with any Changes to the Contract's Scope of Work. The Contractor MUST seek express approval from the
PETCO Project Manager if changes in the Contract Sum or Time may result from executing the work according to the
Architect's Response.
PETCO South Tigard, OR
01201 - 121611
Contractor's Construction Phase
pEV@O Request for information
PETCO "South Tigard, OR" Petco Job No. 11457 Contractor's RFI #:
To (Project Architect). Sergio Henriquez e-mail shenriquez @sblm.com
From (Contractor): e-mail
By submitting this Request for Information, the Contractor certifies that the Contractor's superintendent and all involved
subcontract trades have thoroughly reviewed the Construction Drawings AND the Project Manual, and the "Field Problem"
described in this Request for Information cannot be reconciled without the Architect's Review and Response.
Contractor's Information Request to Architect: Describe "Field Problem" AND Contractor's Proposed Solution
Type your question here
Contractor's Representative: Date/ Time Sent:
Contractor's Sketch is Attached? Refer to Detail/ Drawing OR Project Manual/ Section: •
Unless more extensive review is required, the Architect should provide response within 2 working days after receipt of the
Contractor's RFI. The Architect will issue a Response (via FAX) to both the Contractor and the PETCO Project Manager.
Architect's Response to Contractor: Architect's sketch attached or to follow: SK# Dated:
Architect to type response here
Project Architect. Date/ Time Sent.
Architect will e-mail the Response (Adobe Acrobat version) to PETCO Project Manager Jeff Johnson (e - mail:
jeff.johnson @petco.com) AND to the Contractor
NOTE - -The Architect's Response to the Contractor's Request for Information does NOT represent
or constitute a directive to proceed with any Changes to the Contract's Scope of Work. The
Contractor MUST seek express approval from the PETCO Project Manager if changes in the
Contract Sum or Time may result from executing the work according to the Architect's Response.
PETCO South Tigard, OR
01202 - 121611
PETCO "South Tigard, OR"
RFI STATUS REPORT Contractor's Name HERE PETCO PM Job No. 11457
RFI# Request For Information Description Date Sent to Architect Date Received from
Architect
NOTE: This Submittal Status Report is intended for the Contractor's use in accordance with Section 01200 requirements. Contact the
Project Architect and Request an electronic copy of this form, if desired.
Basis. PETCO South Tigard, OR
01203- 121611
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, "Landlord
Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary of Work
for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all products and assemblies identified in this
Section's List of Project Submittals as a "Required Submittal ", no later than three (3) weeks
after the Date of Commencement, and revise and resubmit submittals to the Architect, if
required, to ensure compliance with the contract documents.
B. The Architect/ Engineer's review of the Contractor submittals is extended as a courtesy to the
Contractor in interpreting the requirements of, and to verify compliance with, the construction
documents. Unless noted as a "Required Submittal" in this Section's List of Project
Submittals, the Contractor shall NOT prepare submittals for products and assemblies that the
Contractor intends to furnish for this project "as specified" with no substitution.
C. Photocopies of the Architect/ Engineer's drawings are NOT acceptable as submittals.
D. Refer to the construction drawings for supplementary, non - standard items that may be
specifically noted to be submitted •for review.
E. All submittals MUST be reviewed first by the Contractor, and received by the Architect no
later than three (3) weeks after the Date of Tenant Improvement Start of Construction.
1.03 CONTRACTOR REQUESTED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Contractor - requested product substitutions will only be considered for acceptance by the
Architect if the following conditions are met:
1. Documented Delivery Problem: The Contractor must provide substantial written
documentation to support a claim of a delivery problem which is in conflict with the
construction schedule, including but not limited to copies of correspondence to and
from the product manufacturer which demonstrates that a delivery problem exists
relative to the timely completion of construction work. A Contractor - requested product
substitution will NOT be considered if the Contractor or any subcontractor has delayed
executing subcontract for labor agreements or scheduling subcontract work from the
time of construction contract award.
2. Construction Cost Savings: A Contractor - requested product substitution must result in
a net savings in total construction cost, with the proposed credit to PETCO itemized
and submitted along with the product substitution request.
3. The product substitution request must be submitted to the Architect in writing, using the
Request for Product Substitution form that follows this Section.
4. The Contractor must demonstrate that the requested product substitution is equal to or
superior to the product specified in the Project Manual.
5. The Contractor is solely responsible for the full coordination of the work of any trade
that may be affected by the Architect's acceptance of the Contractor's product
substitution.
6. A product substitution request that is accepted by the Architect is valid only upon the
Contractor's receipt of the Architect's written acceptance.
7. The Architect may reject a product substitution request if deemed to be in PETCO's
best interest.
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUBMITTALS
01340- 121611 01340 -
1.04 CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTAL PREPARATION AND REVIEW:
A. Submittals shall consist of manufacturer's scale drawings, catalogs or descriptive literature,
stating the complete characteristics of equipment as indicated on the drawings or in the
Project Manual. Erection drawings, if applicable, shall be submitted to indicate the locations,
arrangements, and sizes of products or assemblies.
B. Prior to submittal delivery to the Architect, the Contractor MUST carefully review and
coordinate all aspects of each submittal item, and shall verify that each item submitted is in
conformance with the construction documents.
1. The Contractor MUST annotate each product submittal to clearly indicate the product
model or type proposed for use, in order to adequately distinguish the proposed model
or product from among others which may be also depicted.
2. The Contractor MUST affix a Submittal Review Stamp and signature certifying that a
thorough review has been provided. The Submittal Review Stamp shall include:
•
a. Text similar to the following statement: "This submittal has been reviewed by
(Contractor's Name) and is in compliance with the Contract Documents':
b. Contractor's company name, and authorized reviewer's legibly printed name
and date of review.
3. Submittal copies received by the Architect that do not bear the Contractor's submittal
review stamp and signature will be returned to the Contractor without review.
C. Product Data and other Submittals NO LARGER THAN 11" x 17" format:
1. The Contractor shall submit no more than four (4) Contractor - reviewed, stamped and
signed submittal copies:
a. The Submittal Cover Transmittal shall include the PETCO project name, shall
clearly identify the accompanying documents as a Project Submittal, and shall
include the Contractor's name.
b. Fax Transmissions of Submittals are acceptable ONLY if specifically noted in the
List of Required Submittals in this Section or as specifically authorized in
advance by the PETCO Project Manager, and are acceptable only as a means of
expediting the review of specific time - critical building products and assemblies.
Hard copies of submittals sent via fax transmission must also be sent
concurrently to the Architect for the Architect's review.
c. Submittals received by fax that are not specifically noted on the List of Required
Submittals in this Section will NOT be reviewed by the Architect/ Engineer.
D. Shop Drawings or other product data LARGER THAN 11" x 17" format:
1. The Contractor shall submit one (1) Contractor - reviewed, stamped and signed copy of
each shop drawing.
2. Upon completion of submittal review, the Architect will:
a. Retain one copy reproduction for the engineer/ consultant if reviewed by that
consultant.
b. Return the reviewed submittal Reproducible (one original) to the Contractor.
3. All additional copies required by the Contractor shall be prepared by the Contractor at
the Contractor's expense, upon receipt of the reviewed submittal Reproducible from
the Architect.
1.05 ARCHITECT'S SUBMITTAL REVIEW:
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUBMITTALS
01340- 121611 01340 -2
•
A. The Architect/ Engineer shall review submittals in a timely manner and will note necessary
corrections, including all corrections necessary relating to artistic effect. The Contractor shall
subsequently provide any corrections to submittals required by the Architect/ Engineer.
B. The Architect/ Engineer's review of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for any deviation from the drawings or specifications, unless the Contractor has,
in writing, called the Architect/ Engineer's attention to such specific deviation at the time of
submittal. The Architect/ Engineer's review shall also not relieve the Contractor from either
responsibility for unidentified submittal errors or omissions; or from coordination of the
provisions for the installed submittal item; or from interface with other items of construction
affected by such deviation.
C. The Architect/ Engineer will affix the submittal review stamp and complete submittal review
one of three ways:
1. "No Corrections Noted ": The Contractor should distribute the copies.
2. "Make Corrections Noted ": the Contractor shall make corrections, and should distribute
copies. The Contractor shall NOT re- submit corrected submittals to the Architect/
Engineer that are "Approved As Noted ".
3. "Revise and Resubmit or Rejected ": The Contractor shall have "Rejected" submittals
corrected and re- submitted promptly to the Architect/ Engineer.
1.06 USE OF SUBMITTALS AT THE JOBSITE:
A. Every submittal at the jobsite must bear the Architect/ Engineer's submittal review stamp.
1. The Contractor must keep at all times one copy of each approved submittal at the
jobsite, in good order and available for reference by PETCO.
2. "Rejected" submittals shall NOT be permitted on the jobsite.
1.07 SUBMITTAL ERRORS, DEVIATIONS, OR OMISSIONS: Should errors, deviations, or omissions in
a submittal be noted by the Architect/ Engineer after the submittal has been reviewed and returned
to the Contractor, all corrective work necessary as a result of errors, deviations, or omissions shall
be provided by the Contractor, irrespective of the status of, or review comments of any prior
submittal review by the Architect/ Engineer.
(Refer to List of Required Submittals, next page)
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUBMITTALS
01340 - 121611 01340 -3
1.08 LIST OF REQUIRED SUBMITTALS:
Section Submittal Description To be Reviewed By Remarks
06200 Rough & Finish Carpentry
Casework Shop Drawings Architect Contractor Submittal
08100 Metal Doors & Frames
Metal Doors and Frames Product Data Architect Contractor Submittal
Door and Frame Schedule Architect Contractor Submittal
08410 Aluminum Entrance Doors & Storefront
Intenor Storefront Shop Drawings Architect Contractor Submittal
Automatic Sliding Entrance Drs Shop Dwgs Architect Contractor Submittal
08710 Finish Hardware
Finish Hardware List Architect Contractor Submittal
Finish Hardware Product Data Architect Contractor Submittal
08800 Glass & Glazing
Spandrel Glass Color Chart PETCO Project Manager Contractor Submittal
09650 Resilient Flooring
Concrete Slab Moisture Testing Results PETCO Project Manager Contractor Submittal
09660 Resilient Sheet Flooring
Concrete Slab Moisture Testing Results PETCO Project Manager Contractor Submittal
09670 Epoxy Flooring on Concrete
Concrete Slab Moisture Testing Results PETCO Project Manager Contractor Submittal
10400 Building & Pylon Signage
Signage Shop Drawings Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
15300 Fire Suppression System
Piping Layout Shop Drawings Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Hydraulic Calculations Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Fire Suppression Product Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
15400 Plumbing Systems
Floor Drains and Hair Interceptors Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Plumbing Fixture & Fittings Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Piping Matenals Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
15500 HVAC Systems
RTU Product Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Ductwork Shop Drawings Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Flue Vent Product Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Grilles, Register, Diffusers Product Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
RTU Thermostats Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Exhaust Fan product data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Unit Heaters product data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
16000 Electrical Systems
Lighting Fixture product data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Electrical Panel Shop Drawings Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
Power Pole Product Data Architect (PME Engineer) Contractor Submittal
END OF SECTION
( "Contractor's Request for Product Substitution" form to follow)
PETCO South Tigard, OR SUBMITTALS
01340 - 121611 01340 -4
Contractor's Construction Phase
pET@O Request for Product Substitution
PETCO "South Tigard, OR" Petco Job No. 11457
To (PETCO Project Manager): Jeff Johnson FAX: 858 - 909 -2738
To (Project Architect): Sergio Henriquez FAX: 212 - 675 -4228
From (Contractor): FAX:
Contractor's Representative Date / Time Sent:
By submitting this Request for Product Substitution, the Contractor and all involved subcontract trades certify that they have
thoroughly reviewed the Construction Drawings AND the Project Manual, and a Product Substitution for a product of equal or
superior quality, as compared to the product specified, is warranted for the reasons described.
Contractor's Product Substitution Request:
Contractor's Reason(s) for Substitution Request:
Contractor's Proposed CREDIT IF the Product Substitution is accepted: $( )DOLLARS
Architect's Response to Contractor/ PETCO:
I .
•
NOTES 1) The CONTRACTOR must submit all necessary Product Data for both the product specified and the product
substitution requested, so as to demonstrate that the Product Substitution requested is equal to or superior to the Product
specified. 2) The Architect's Response to the Contractor's Request for Information does not represent or constitute a
directive to proceed with any Changes to the Contract's Scope of Work. The Contractor must seek expressed approval
from the PETCO Project Manager if changes in the Contract Sum or Time may result from executing the work according to
the Architect's Response. 3) The Architect is not obligated to review and respond to a Request for Product Substitution unless so directed by the PETCO Project Manager.
PETCO South Tigard, OR
01341 - 121611
PETCO "South Tigard, OR" •
SUBMITTAL STATUS REPORT SBLM Architects SBLM Job # 11106
Date of Tenant Improvement Construction Date for Project Architect to begin sending (weekly) Submittal Status Reports to PETCO
Commencement: xx /xx /xx Project Manager: xx /xx /xx
Section Submittal Description Date Received Submittal Date Sent to Date Received Date Reviewed Action Taken by Date Sent to
by Architect Review by Consultant From Consultant by Architect Submittal Reviewer Contractor
Civil Product Data: Civil
02520 Concrete Paving Mix Design Civil
Concrete Paving Test Reports Civil
Anchor Bolt Layout Struc. Engr.
Concrete Accessories product data Struc. Engr.
03300 Concrete Mix Designs Struc Engr
Concrete Test Reports Struc. Engr
Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings Struc. Engr.
Concrete Masonry Color Samples Architect
Concrete Masonry Product Data Archt & Struc
04220 Coarse/ Fine Grout Mix Designs Struc. Engr.
Mortar Mix Designs Struc. Engr.
Wall Reinforcing Placement Drawings Struc Engr.
05120 Structural Steel Shop Drawings Struc. Engr.
05200 Metal Joists Shop Drawings Struc. Engr
05300 Metal Decking Product Data Archt & Struc
06200 Cabinet Shop drawing Architect
Cabinet product data Architect
07240 Water Managed EIFS product data Architect
EIFS color samples Architect
07500 Roofing Product Data Architect
Metal Doors and Frames product data Architect
08100 Door & Frame Schedule Architect
Dade Co Product Notice of Acceptance Architect
Aluminum Storefront shop drawings Architect
08410 Al. Sliding Entrance Doors shop drawings Architect
Al. Sliding Entrance Doors Product Data Architect
Dade Co Product Notice of Acceptance Architect
Finish Hardware Schedule/ List Architect
08710
Finish Hardware product data Architect •
08800 Spandrel Color Chart (exterior glazing) Do not submit Spandrel Color Charts to the Architect. Send to the PETCO Project Manager for Review and Color Selection.
09310 Ceramic Tile Product Data Architect I 1
Basis PETCO South Tigard, OR
01342 - 121611
PETCO "South Tigard, OR"
SUBMITTAL STATUS REPORT SBLM Architects SBLM Job # 11106
Section Submittal Description Date Received Submittal Date Sent to Date Received Date Reviewed Action Taken by Date Sent to
by Architect Review by Consultant From Consultant by Architect Submittal Reviewer Contractor
Concrete Floor Testing results Send Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Protect Manager for record purposes (not for review and approval).
09650 Resilient Floonng Product Data 'Architect I
Concrete Floor Testing results Send Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Project Manager for record purposes (not for review and approval)
09660 Resilient Sheet Flrg Product Data 'Architect I I I I I
Concrete Floor Testing results Send Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Project Manager for record purposes (not for review and approval).
09670 Epoxy Finish on Concrete Product Data 'Architect I I I I I
Concrete Floor Testing results Send Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Protect Manager for record purposes (not for review and approval).
10300 Pre -Fab Dock Shelter (for use with speed lift) Architect
FS Piping shop drawings PME Engr
15300 Hydraulic Calculations PME Engr
Fire Suppression Product Data PME Engr
Floor Drains, Hair Interceptor Product Data PME Engr
15400 Plumbing Fixtures/ Fittings Product Data PME Engr
Piping Materials Product Data PME Engr
HVAC Rooftop Unit Product Data PME Engr
HVAC Ductwork shop drawings - PME Engr
Grilles, Registers, Diffusers Product Data PME Engr
15500 RTU Thermostats Product Data PME Engr
Unit Heaters Product Data PME Engr
Flue Vent Product Data PME Engr
Exhaust Fan Product Data PME Engr
16000 Lighting Fixture Product Data PME Engr
Electncal Panel Shop Drawings PME Engr
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: This Submittal Status Report form Is to be used by PETCO's Tenant Improvement Architect to report the status of submittals receipt, review and processing to the PETCO Project Manager.
High- lighted YELLOW -- indicates Submittals for PETCO As -Is Project, where applicable.
High - lighted GREEN -- Submittal for PETCO Exhibit B or As -Is Project where exterior spandrel color may have to be approved
High - lighted LT GREEN — These submittals not usually listed for Exhibit B projects -- building shell detailing is by Landlord's Architect.
Basis PETCO South Tigard, OR
01342 - 121611
•
SECTION 01410
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Construction Quality Control Services will be provided by PETCO's Testing /Inspection
Agency in a contract for services with PETCO. Additional testing and inspections shall be
provided and /or coordinated directly by the Contractor as defined in this Section, and will
NOT be under PETCO's Testing /Inspection Agency's scope of work.
B. Both PETCO's and Contractor's Testing /Inspection Agency(s)' Project Engineer(s) shall be a
Professional Engineer licensed in Oregon. All test reports, inspection reports and
correspondence shall be certified by the Testing /Inspection Agency's Licensed Professional
Engineer.
C. Both PETCO's and Contractor's Testing /Inspection Agency(s) may reject materials or
workmanship which do not meet standards either at the storage plant or at the jobsite, and
shall notify the ' PETCO Project Manager immediately and in writing, of any rejection of
materials or workmanship.
D. The Contractor shall permit both PETCO's and Contractor's Testing /Inspection Agency(s)
access to the jobsite at all times, and shall provide supplementary labor and equipment as
may be required.
1.02 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS:
A. Special Inspections may be required by the local jurisdiction. If the Testing /Inspection Agency
is so licensed or otherwise approved to provide same, Special Inspections may be provided
under the Testing /Inspection Agency's scope of work subject to approval and authorization of
the PETCO Project Manager.
B. The Contractor shall advise the Architect and the PETCO Project Manager in a timely
manner if the Contractor is advised of any applicable requirements for Special Inspections.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PROVIDED BY PETCO'S
TESTING /INSPECTION AGENCY: NOT USED
1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR'S TESTING /INSPECTION
AGENCY: •
A. Portland Cement Certificates of Compliance:
1. The Contractor shall obtain the Certificates of Compliance from the cement
manufacturer which are delivered to the concrete producer.
2. The Certificates of Compliance must identify the cement as to production lot, bin, or
silo number, dating and routing of shipment, and compliance with the specified
standards.
3. The Contractor shall promptly provide all Certificates of Compliance and other test
results to the Testing /Inspection Agency, and shall provide other specific physical
and chemical data if required by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Aggregate Sieve Analysis Test and Specific Gravity Test:
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY
PETCO South Tigard. OR CONTROL SERVICES
01410 - 121611 01410 -
1. Provide one aggregate test, unless the character of material changes, material is
substituted, or additional aggregate testing is requested by the Architect/Engineer.
2. Testing sample from conveyor belts or batching gates at the ready -mix plant shall
include a Sieve Analysis Test and Specific Gravity Test to determine product
compliance with specified standards and grading.
3. The Contractor shall promptly provide all Sieve Analysis Test and Specific Gravity Test
results to the Testing /Inspection Agency, and shall provide other specific physical and •
chemical data if required by the Architect /Engineer.
C. Laboratory Design Mix:
1. The Contractor shall provide the Concrete Mix Design, in accordance with ACI 318,
Chapter 5, after approval of the aggregate, and whenever the character or source of
materials is changed.
2. The Contractor shall provide copies of the Concrete Mix Designs for all mixes, as
prepared by a Licensed Professional Engineer, to the Testing /Inspection Agency.
3. Laboratory Design Mix shall also be submitted to the Architect/Engineer per Section
01340 - Submittals.
D. Concrete Test Reports:
1. Concrete Test Reports shall contain concrete supplier, weather, air temperature
(range), required strength of concrete, water - cement ratio, weight per cubic yard at the
batching plant, source and type of aggregates and cement, and moisture content of
aggregate.
2. Concrete Test Reports shall also be submitted to the Architect/Engineer per Section
01340- Submittals.
E. Concrete Core Tests:
1. The Contractor shall provide supplementary concrete core tests when specifically
directed by the PETCO Project Manager because of low cylinder test results.
2. The concrete core(s) shall be cut from locations directed by the PETCO Project
Manager or Architect/Engineer, per ASTM C42, and prepared and tested per ASTM
C39.
F. Metal Deck Fastening Inspection:
1. Prior to the start of metal decking installation, the Contractor shall verify that the
materials at the jobsite comply with the specified standards, that the installing
subcontractor is qualified and fully informed as to the procedures to be followed.
2. During installation, the Contractor shall verify that materials are installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Upon completion of the metal decking installation, the Contractor shall retain the
services of a Licensed Professional Engineer to obtain certification that the metal deck
fastening was provided in accordance with applicable standards.
4. Letter of Certification: The Contractor shall send the Engineer's Letter of Certification
to the PETCO Project Manager, and shall include a copy of the letter in the Building
Maintenance Manuals per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
G. Roof Inspection and Testing:
1. Prior to the start of roofing installation, the Contractor shall verify that the materials at
the jobsite comply with the specified standards, that the installing subcontractor is
qualified and fully informed as to the procedures to be followed.
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTROL SERVICES
01410- 121611 01410 -2
•
2. During installation, Contractor shall verify that materials are installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Warranty Inspection: Upon completion of the roofing installation, the Contractor shall
contact the roofing manufacturer to provide a warranty inspection.
1.05 ROOFING INSPECTION BY PETCO'S ROOFING INSPECTION AGENCY:
A. In addition to the roofing manufacturer's inspection as a part of the manufacturer's roofing
warranty program, PETCO may elect to have an independent Roofing Inspection Agency
inspect the in- progress or completed installation of the roofing system.
B. In the event that the PETCO Project Manager contracts directly with an independent Roofing
Inspection Agency for roofing inspection services, the Contractor shall provide complete
access to all roofing materials prior to installation, complete access to the area to receive
roofing work as a part of the contract for general construction, and complete access to the
Contractor and /or subcontractor's field records with respect to all roofing provisions.
1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION NOT REQUIRED BY PETCO: PETCO does NOT require inspection
of or testing of mill tests on cement and steel, or design and inspecting concrete formwork.
1.07 TEST REPORTS FORMAT AND DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS:
A. All Test and Field Reports must include the Project Name, Project Address, Contractor's
Name and Date Inspection and /or Testing was provided. All reports shall be typewritten, and
shall bear the signature and seal of the Project Testing Laboratory Engineer. The distribution
of all report copies shall be noted on ALL reports. The Testing /Inspection Agency shall
distribute all Test and Field Reports no later than seven (7) calendar days after providing that
portion of the inspection and testing work.
B. Report Distribution: One copy of all Test and Field Reports or Special Inspections shall be
sent by the Testing /Inspection Agency directly to the PETCO Project Manager, Project
Architect, and the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
•
•
CONSTRUCTION QUALITY
PETCO South Tigard. OR CONTROL SERVICES
01410- 121611 01410 -3
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, the term
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide an orderly and efficient project closeout and transfer of the
completed work to PETCO, including timely delivery of the Closeout Documents and related
items to PETCO, no later than 60 Calendar Days after the Tenant Space Turnover to
PETCO, including the following, as further described in this Section:
1. Local Jurisdiction Closeout Documents.
2. Final Certificate of Occupancy.
3. Contractor's Written Request For Punchlist Inspection.
4. Construction Punchlist Inspection.
5. Contractor's Written Notice of Punchlist Completion.
6. NOT USED
7. Notice of Completion.
8. Spare Parts, Maintenance And Extra Materials.
9. NOT USED
10. Project Record Construction Documents.
11. Building Maintenance Manual.
12. NOT USED
•
B. Requests for Change Orders must be received by the PETCO Project Manager no later than
ninety (90) days after the Date of Final Completion. Requests for Change Orders received
after this time will not be considered.
1.03 LOCAL JURISDICTION CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS: The Contractor shall promptly provide to
PETCO any and all additional closeout documents, forms and applications which may be required
for submittal to the local jurisdiction by the Architect of Record or Engineer(s) of Record to satisfy
local project closeout and Final Certificate of Occupancy requirements.
1.04 FINAL CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY: The Contractor shall obtain and install the Final
Certificate of Occupancy in the Store display location where directed by the PETCO Project
Manager. The Contractor shall include copies of the Final Certificate of Occupancy in the Building
Maintenance Manuals provided to PETCO as further described in this Section.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S WRITTEN REQUEST FOR PUNCHLIST INSPECTION: The Contractor shall
submit written notice to the PETCO Project Manager, in a timely manner so as to allow adequate
scheduling of the punchlist site visit, that the Contractor has reviewed the contract documents,
inspected the installed, completed work and verified the work is complete and ready for the PETCO
• Project Manager's Construction Punchlist Inspection.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION PUNCHLIST INSPECTION:
A. The Construction Punchlist Inspection will be provided by the PETCO Project Manager on or
about the Date of Substantial Completion. A copy of the Construction Punchlist, which will list
items as "Incomplete" (not completed within the Construction Time established in the Lease
Agreement) or as "Punchlist Items" (provided within the Construction Time established in the
Lease Agreement but needing additional work to correct deficient or incomplete work), will be
provided to the Contractor.
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700-121611 01700 -
•
B. The Contractor shall complete all items noted on the Construction Punchlist within the time
limit stated in the Lease Agreement. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the PETCO
Project Manager, all Construction Punchlist items must be completed by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the PETCO Project Manager, no later than the Date of Final Completion.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S NOTICE OF PUNCHLIST COMPLETION: NOT USED
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S NOTICE OF CHANGE ORDER REQUEST STATUS: NOT USED
1.09 NOTICE OF COMPLETION: The Contractor shall provide a completed Notice of Completion form
to the PETCO Project Manager no later than fourteen (14) days after the day of the Punchlist
Inspection. This form is provided by PETCO, and is included in the Project Manual after this
Section.
1.10 SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE AND EXTRA MATERIALS: The Contractor shall deliver all
products, spare parts and maintenance and extra materials specified, to the project site, and place
in a location approved or designated by the PETCO Project Manager. The delivery of all spare
parts and maintenance materials should be acknowledged by the PETCO Project Manager prior to
project site turnover to PETCO.
1.11 VERIFICATION OF VENDOR LISTS OF GOODS RECEIVED WITH PETCO DISTRICT
MANAGER: NOT USED
1.12 PROJECT RECORD CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ON COMPACT DISC:
A. The Contractor shall maintain one set of the Project Record Construction Documents on the
jobsite throughout the course of construction. The Contractor shall transpose all revisions to
the work from field -use construction documents to the Project Record Construction •
Documents, shall record all pertinent information in a timely manner concurrent with the
construction progress, and shall deliver the resulting prepared set of Project Record
Construction Documents to PETCO upon completion of all construction work.
1. Record Construction Drawings: The Contractor shall provide to PETCO, one (1) set of
bond photocopy and two identical Compact Discs of scanned drawing images, and
shall include all revisions to the work after the issuance of the Conformance Set
drawings, noted on the drawings by the Contractor, including but not limited to:
a. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
b. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.
c. Record of all changes to the work authorized by Change Bulletin or other
directive from PETCO (if any).
2. The Contractor shall store Project Record Construction Documents at the jobsite, but
shall keep these documents separate from the documents used for construction
reference purposes and field work.
3. At the completion of construction, the Contractor shall prepare two identical Compact
Discs in plastic sleeves, with scanned drawing images in either TIF or PDF format. The
Compact Discs must each identify the PETCO project, with handwritten or label -
generated description on a peel -off sticker.
4. At the completion of construction, the Contractor shall provide one complete set of
bond photocopy drawings, to be left on site in the Plan Holder at the Telephone Board
in the Pre -Sales Room. The Plan Holder is to be located as shown on the drawings and
as specified in Section 10300.
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700- 121611 01700 -2
5. The Contractor shall submit Project Record Construction Documents to the PETCO
Project Manager.
1.13 SUBMITTALS: Submittals and shop drawings bearing the Contractor's/ Architect's/ Engineer's
submittal review "approval" stamps, shall be maintained at the jobsite throughout the course of
construction, for reference by the Contractor, and the PETCO Project Manager.
1.14 BUILDING MAINTENANCE MANUAL ON COMPACT DISC:
A. Building Maintenance Manual - -CD Format:
1. The Contractor shall prepare two identical Compact Discs in plastic sleeves, with
scanned or converted Portable Document Format (PDF) copies of the following project
data. The Compact Discs must each identify the PETCO project, with handwritten or
label- generated description on a peel -off sticker.
2. Organizational Content:
a. "Table of Contents ".
b. "Part 1 ": Directory with listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consulting Engineers, Contractor, Subcontractors and Major
Equipment Suppliers.
c. "Part 2 ": The Contractor shall compile all operation and maintenance
instructions, organized and subdivided by sequential Project Manual CSI Section
and arranged within each CSI Section by system. The following documentation
shall be included:
1) List of equipment.
2) Parts list of each equipment component.
3) Operating instructions and significant design criteria.
4) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
5) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended
cleaning methods and special precautions, including the identification of
detrimental cleaning agents.
d. "Part 3 ": The Contractor shall include items as detailed in the List of Building
Maintenance Manual Parts 2, 3 and 4 Contents Requirements.
e. "Part 4 ": The Contractor shall include a copy of each product warranty, service
warranty and /or other guarantee document from manufacturers as specified in
other Project Manual Sections.
1.15 LIST OF BUILDING MAINTENANCE MANUAL PARTS 2, 3 & 4 CONTENTS:
Section Description Building Maintenance BMM
Reference Manuals (BMMt Part
BMM Table of Contents To be included in BMM -
BMM Director To be included in BMM Part 1
01700 Contract Closeout
Copy of Final Certificate of Occupancy To be included in BMM Part 3
Project Punchlist To be included in BMM Part 3
05300 Metal Decking
Metal Deck Inspection To be included in BMM Part 3
Engineer's Certification Letter To be included in BMM Part 3
07250 Exterior Insulation Finish System Repairs
Manufacturer Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
07540 Roofing System Repairs
07600 Sheet Metal
Manufacturer Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
07190 Moisture Mitigation Systems
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700- 121611 01700 -3
Mfr(s) Product Warranty ( -ies) To be included in BMM Part 4
07920 Sealants & Caulking
Mfr(s) Product Warranty ( -ies) To be included in BMM Part 4
08100 Metal Doors & Frames
Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
08300 Special Doors
Rolling Door Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
Double Acting Door Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
08410 Aluminum Entrance Doors & Storefront
Storefront Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
Automatic Doors Operating Instructions To be included in BMM Part 2
Automatic Doors Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
AAADM Compliance Form To be included in BMM Part 3
08800 Glazing
Glazing Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
09510 Acoustical Ceiling
ACT Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
09650 Resilient Flooring
Flooring Mfr. Product Warranties To be included in BMM Part 4
Flooring Adhesive Product Warranties To be included in BMM Part 4
09660 Resilient Sheet Flooring
Flooring Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
Flooring Adhesive Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
09670 Epoxy Finish on Concrete
Epoxy Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
09910 Concrete Sealer
Sealer Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
10300 Miscellaneous Specialties
Dock Bumpers Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
Dock Leveler Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
Dock Shelter Mfr. Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
Window Shades Product Warranty To be included in BMM Part 4
15300 Fire Suppression System
Operation & Instructions Manuals To be included in BMM Part 2
Record Drawings Provide ALL Construction Documents field revisions.
15400 Plumbing
Operations & Instruction Manuals To be included in BMM Part 2
Sterilization Certificate To be included in BMM Part 3
Mfr. Product Warranties To be included in BMM Part 4
Record Drawings Provide ALL Construction Documents field revisions.
•
15500 HVAC Systems
Operation & Instruction Manuals To be included in BMM Part 2
Air Balancing Report To be included in BMM Part 3
HVAC System Startup Statement To be included in BMM Part 4
Mfr. Product Warranties To be included in BMM Part 4
Record Drawings Provide ALL Construction Documents field revisions.
16000 Electrical Systems
Operations & Instruction Manuals To be included in BMM Part 2
Ampacity Test Report To be included in BMM Part 3
Mfr. Product Warranties To be included in BMM Part 4
Energy Management System Startup To be included in BMM Part 4
Deficiency Report
Record Drawings Provide ALL Construction Documents field revisions.
• 1.16 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: NOT USED
1.17 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTIES: NOT USED
END OF SECTION
(PETCO "Notice of Completion" form to Follow)
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700- 121611 01700 -4
Recording Requested By
And when recorded return to
r - 1
PETCO Animal Supplies, Inc.
9125 Rehco Road
San Diego, CA 92121
Attn: Martha L. Cannon
L J
Space above this line for Recorder's Use
NOTICE OF COMPLETI•N
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT:
I. The undersigned is the owner of the interest or estate stated below in the property herinafter
described.
II. The full name of the undersigned is
III. The complete address of the undersigned is
IV. The nature of the title of the undersigned is
V. The full names and complete addresses of all persons, is any, who hold title with the
unersigned as joint tenants or as tenants in common are:
Co- owner's Name(s) Co- owner's Complete Address (Street, City, State, Zip)
•
VI. The names of the predecessors in interest of the undersigned, if the property was transferred
subsequent to the commencement of the work or improvement herein referred to, include, but are
not limited to the following individuals.
Co- owner's Name(s) Co- owner's Complete Address (Street, City, State, Zip)
VII. A work of improvement on the property described below was completed on
VIII. The names of the original contractor, if any, for the work of improvement was
The kind of work done or finished was
IX. The property on which the work of improvement was completed is in the city of
Cdunty of , State of , and is described as follows:
X. The street address of the said property is
Dated this day of
(Owners Signature) (Owners Typed or Pnnted Name)
VERIFICATION
I the undersigned, say:
I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the
forgoing is true and correct:
(Date and Place) (Signature)
•
SECTION 01710
CONSTRUCTION & FINAL CLEANING
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall maintain the building and jobsite in a standard of cleanliness
throughout the construction period as described in this Section.
1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED: Work not included in the Contractor's scope of cleaning work is limited to
any portion of the work accepted and occupied by PETCO prior to the Date of Tenant Space
Turnover to PETCO, or any area excluded from the requirements of this Section by PETCO.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS CLEANING:
A. Jobsite construction cleanup shall be provided as required to prevent accidents to personnel,
protect all work in place, and • to ensure completion of the project in an orderly manner.
Jobsite construction cleanup shall consist of the removal of all mud, oil, grease, sand, gravel,
dirt, trash, scrap debris and excess materials, from any floor space or walking surface on the
jobsite that may cause tripping or other accidents involving workmen, ladders, or equipment.
B. The roof surface shall be cleaned on a regular basis throughout the course of construction to
ensure that no construction debris damages the roof membrane.
1.05 FLOOR WAXING (NEW VINYL TILE AND OTHER STORE FLOORING):
A. Work must be scheduled to allow Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring adhesive and installation to
cure for a minimum of 48 hours, or as may be alternatively recommended by the flooring
manufacturer, before commencement of the first wet maintenance work.
B. VCT Flooring must be clean free of marks, paint overspray, stains and smudges.
C. In order to provide a premium appearance standard, the Contractor shall provide Floor
Waxing of new VCT Flooring in accordance with Butcher's "Art of Floor Care Training Guide ".
D. The Contractor shall provide Butcher's "Hot Springs Cleaner" and automatic floor scrubber
cleaning in accordance with Butcher's "Art of Floor Care Training Guide ".
E. The Contractor shall apply five (5) even, medium coats of Butcher's "Mainstay Floor Finish ",
Part #931032, using a clean mop finish, and ensuring that each successive coat is
completely dry to the touch before recoating.
F. The scope of Floor Stripping & Waxing work is floor cleaning, followed by the application of
two (2) slop coats of new finish over all Vinyl Composition Tile with the exception of flooring
FC -07A (at Grooming Salon and Grooming Reception) and all Vinyl Sheet Flooring.
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S FINAL CLEANING OF OTHER SURFACES:
A. The Contractor shall provide Final Cleaning immediately prior to the Punchlist Inspection, and
as scheduled and coordinated with the PETCO Project Manager.
B. The Contractor shall remove paper labels from glass, fixtures and equipment only after the
respective items have been inspected, verified, and approved to ensure that each item
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONSTRUCTION & FINAL CLEANING
01710- 121611 01710 -1
complies with the construction documents requirements. Remove paint from and clean all
permanent labels and plates so that they remain legible. Permanently attached equipment
labels and plates shall not be removed.
C. In addition to a general "broom clean" condition, the Contractor shall provide cleaning of the
following building exposed surfaces:
•
1. Exposed Structural Steel (interior and exterior): Clean free of dirt and paint overspray.
Remove bar joist shipping tags and structural steel shipping labels. Provide touch -up
paint as required.
2. Painted Surfaces (interior and exterior): Clean free of marks, paint overspray, stains
and smudges. Provide touch -up paint as required.
3. Concrete Floors (interior): Clean free of marks, paint overspray, stains and smudges.
Buff concrete floors.
4. VCT Flooring: Clean free of marks, stains and smudges that appear after floor stripping
& waxing but prior to the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO.
5. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Clean free of marks, stains and smudges that appear after floor
stripping & waxing but prior to the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO.
6. Aluminum storefront and glass (interior and exterior): Remove labels, paint overspray
and protective shipping items. Polish aluminum and glass.
7. Finish Hardware (interior and exterior): Clean free of marks, paint overspray, stains and
smudges. Polish finish hardware.
8. Toilet Fixtures and Accessories: Remove protective coverings and labels. Clean free of
marks, paint overspray, stains and smudges. Clean toilet fixtures; polish accessories.
9. Stainless steel and other miscellaneous metal surfaces: Remove protective coverings
and labels. Clean free of marks, paint overspray, stains and smudges.
10. General exposed interior surfaces: Clean free of marks, paint overspray, stains and
smudges. Leave uniformly clean and dust free.
11. Roof: Clean free of any and all remaining construction debris.
1.07 FINAL EXTERIOR CLEANUP:
A. Final Exterior Cleanup shall be performed prior to the PETCO Project Manager's Punchlist
Inspection, and as scheduled and coordinated with the PETCO Project Manager.
B. No construction debris or miscellaneous unspecified materials shall be left or discarded on
this project site.
•
C. Construction debris and materials scheduled for disposal shall be removed from the project
site in a legal means for a locally permitted manner of disposal.
D. The following Exterior of Tenant Space finishes shall be cleaned as described, weather
conditions permitting. If weather conditions do not allow final site cleaning at the time of the
PETCO Project Manager's Punchlist Inspection, the Contractor shall coordinate an
alternative means of Final Site Cleanup completion with the PETCO Project Manager:
1. Exterior concrete slabs and sidewalks adjoining the PETCO Tenant Space: Clean free
of mud, dirt, and debris. Power sweep and clean with water and detergent as required.
2. NOT USED
3. Asphaltic and concrete paving adjoining the PETCO Tenant Space: Clean free of
construction - generated mud, dirt, and trash. Power sweep and clean with water and
detergent as required.
4. Directional signage: Clean free of construction - generated marks, stains and smudges.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONSTRUCTION & FINAL CLEANING
01710 - 121611 01710 -2
SECTION 01730
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Any material or procedure specified by reference number, symbol, or title of a standard such
as a commercial standard, federal specification, trade association standard, technical society
standard, or other similar standard document shall comply with the requirement in the latest
revision thereof and any amendment or supplement thereto, except as may be limited as to
type, class or grade, or modified in such reference. Reference documents shall be
considered an integral part of this Project Manual as if included in their entirety.
B. The Landlord Contractor shall comply with requirements of association, trade, or Federal
Standards, except when more stringent requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
C. Should a specified reference standard conflict with the Construction Documents, the Landlord
Contractor shall request a clarification from the Architect before proceeding with the work, by
using the RFI Form per Section 01200- Construction Administration.
1.02 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES:
AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue NW, Washington DC 20006
AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue NW, Washington DC 20005
AASHTO American Assn. Of State Highway 444 North Capitol Street NW, Washington DC 20001
and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit MI 48219
ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago IL 60601
Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building, College Park MD 20740
AISC American Institute of Steel 400 North Michigan Avenue, 8 Floor, Chicago IL 60611
Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16`" Street NW, Washington DC 20036
AITC American Institute of Timber 333 W. Hampden Avenue, Englewood CO 80110
Construction
AMCA Air Movement & Control Assn. 30 West University Drive, Arlington Heights IL 60004
ANSI American National Standards 1430 Broadway, New York NY 10018
Institute
APA American Plywood Association P.O. Box 11700, Tacoma WA 98411
ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration 1501 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington VA 22209
. Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta GA 30329
Refrigerating & Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical 345 East 47 Street, New York NY 10017
Engineers
ASPA American Sod Producers Assn. 4415 West Harrison Street, Hillside IL 60162
ASTM American Society for Testing & 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia PA 19103
Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive, Arlington VA 22206
AWPA American Wood Preservers' Assn. 7735 Old Georgetown Road, Bethesda MD 20014
AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, NW, Miami FL 33135
AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver CO 80235
BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive, Reston VA 22091
CDA Copper Development Association 57 Floor, Chrysler Building, 405 Lexington Avenue,
New York NY 10174
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Mfrs. Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue NW, Washington DC 20036
PETCO South Tigard, OR REFERENCE STANDARDS
01730- 121611 01730 -1
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg IL 60195
DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road, McLean VA 22102
EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract 1015 15'" Street NW, Washington DC 20005
Committee/ American Consulting
Engineers Council
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown NY 10591
Association
• FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association. 3310 Harrison, White Lakes Professional Bldg., Topeka
KS 66611
FM Factory Mutual System P. O. Box 688, Norwood MA 02062
FS Federal Specifications GSA Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197,
Specifications & Consumer Info. Washington DC 20407
Distribution Section (WFSIS)
GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue, Evanston IL 60201
ICBO International Conference of 5360 S. Workman Mill Road, Whittier CA 90601
Building Officials
IEEE Institute of Electrical & 345 East 47'" Street, New York NY 10017
Electronics Engineers
IMIAC All Weather Council International 815 15 Street NW, Washington DC 20005
Masonry Institute
MBMA Metal Building Mfrs. Association 1230 Keith Building, Cleveland OH 44115
MIL Military Specification Naval 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia PA 19120
Publications & Forms Ctr.
ML /SFA Metal Lath/ Steel Framing Assn. 221 North LaSalle Street, Chicago IL 60601
NAAMM National Assn. of Architectural 221 North LaSalle Street, Chicago IL 60601
Metal Manufacturers
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Assn. P. O. Box 781, Herndon VA 22070
NEBB National Environmental 8224 Old Courthouse Road, Vienna VA 22180
Balancing Bureau
NEMA National Electrical Mfrs. Assn. 2101 "L" Street NW, Washington DC 20037
NFPA National Fire Protection Assn. 1619 Massachusetts Avenue NW, Washington DC
20036
NSWMA Nat'l Solid Wastes Mnqmt. Assn. 1730 Rhode Island Avenue NW, Washington DC 20036
NWMA National Woodwork Mfrs. Assn. 205 W. Touhy Avenue, Park Ridge IL 60068
PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road, Skokie IL 60077
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wells Street, Chicago IL 60606
PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce, Washington DC 20203
SID Steel Deck Institute P. O. Box 9506, Canton OH 44711
SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North, 14600 Detroit Avenue
Cleveland OH 44107
SIGMA Sealed Insul. Glass Mfrs. Assn. 111 East Wacker Drive, Chicago IL 60601
SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48`" Avenue North, Suite A, Myrtle Beach SC
29577
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning 8224 Old Court House Road, Vienna VA 22180
Contractors' National Association
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh PA 15213
TCA Tile Council of America Inc. P. O. Box 326, Princeton NJ 08540
UL Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. 333 Pfinqston Road, Northbrook IL 60062
WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc. 1500 Yeon Building, Portland OR 97204
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR REFERENCE STANDARDS
01730- 121611 01730 -2
•
SECTION 02220
TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide utility trench excavations; compacted bedding under fill,
over utilities to subgrade elevations; backfilling and compaction; and compliance with State
trenching act and laws, trench safety engineering design and OSHA standards.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 03310- Concrete Floor Preparation.
1.04 REFERENCES:
A. ANSI/ ASTM C136- Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B. ANSI/ ASTM D698- Test Methods for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate
Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb. (2.49) kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.
C. ANSI/ ASTM D1556- Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method.
D. ASTM D2922 and ASTM D3017- Nuclear Method.
1.05 TRENCHING: Trench safety design shall be in compliance with applicable City and State codes
and in compliance with Federal Regulations Part 126 of OSHA, Sub -part P is incorporated by
reference.
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS: Fill materials shall have a plasticity index not less than 4 and not greater than
15. All select fill shall be compacted to a dry density of at least 95 percent ASTM 698; slope all
trenches to drain.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION:
A. Excavate subsoil as required for sanitary sewer, water and gas piping to municipal utilities.
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection.
C. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing force splay of foundations.
D. Hand trim excavation for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove all loose matter.
E. Removed lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard as measured by volume.
F. Correct any over - excavated or unauthorized excavations at no cost to PETCO.
G. Stockpile excavated material in a designated on -site location if scheduled for re -use, and
remove excavated material from site that is not to be re- used..
PETCO South Tigard. OR TRENCHING
02220 - 121611 02220 -1
3.02 BEDDING FILL: Support all piping during the placement and compaction of bedding fill.
3.03 BACKFILLING:
A. Backfill trenches to the indicated contours and elevations. The top surface of general backfill
shall be within 1" of the required elevations.
B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over
porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches
compacted depth.
D. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Field testing including tests and analysis of fill material will be provide by the Testing/
Inspection Agency per ANSI/ ASTM D698 and as specified in Section 01410- Construction
Quality Control Services.
B. Compacting testing will be provided by the Testing/ Inspection Agency in accordance with
ANSI/ ASTM D1556, Nuclear ASTM 689, ASTM D2922, ASTM 3011 and Section 01410 -
Construction Quality Control Services.
C. If tests indicate that the fill material or work does not meet specified requirements, the
Contractor shall remove the deficient fill material, replace and re -test fill material at no cost to
PETCO.
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK: The Contractor shall provide additional fill and re- compact all
fill areas which are subjected to the Contractor's or any subcontractor's vehicular traffic, until the
Date of Final Completion.
3.06 CONCRETE SLAB INFILL AT BUILDING FLOOR SLAB TRENCHING:
A. The Contractor shall provide reinforced concrete at interior trenching. Provide welded wire
fabric reinforcement for concrete slab and trenching infill, and reinforcing dowels where the
new concrete slab for trenching infill abuts existing concrete slab.
B. Moisture/ Vapor Barrier: Provide a moisture /vapor barrier, located under a 3 -inch layer of
approved, granular self- draining compactable fill under the subsequently placed concrete
slab. The moisture /vapor barrier shall consist of "Visqueen" or equal manufactured
polyethylene sheeting product, 6 mils minimum thickness, with all joints taped and sealed per
ASTM D2130.
C. Reinforcement of Concrete Slab Topping shall be in accordance with the following minimum
standards, or as may be superseded by the local jurisdiction; or as may be otherwise
specified by the building shell architect/ engineer:
1. Slab on Grade Trench Construction: 3000 psi Concrete slab on grade; reinforced with
ASTM A185 Welded Wire Fabric; and placed on vapor barrier and prepared subgrade.
2. Structural Slab: As specified by the building shell engineer.
3. Dowels: Provide ASTM A615, Grade 60, 1/2" diameter x 8" deformed reinforcing
dowels spaced 32" on center maximum, 4" epoxy embed into existing concrete slab.
PETCO South Tigard, OR TRENCHING
02220 - 121611 02220 -2
•
D. Epoxy Adhesive: The Contractor shall provide epoxy product equal to Rawl Dowel -Fast, two -
component, non - sagging (ASTM C -881 Types I, II, IV and V/ Grade 3 Classes B and C)
epoxy by Powers Fastening Inc., New Rochelle NY (914- 235 - 6300).
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM D -695): 10,000 psi.
2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D -638): 3500 psi at 7 days.
3. Flexural Strength (ASTM D -790): 5300 psi.
4. Bond Strength (ASTM C -882): 2000 psi concrete to concrete, 2 -day moist cure;
2000 psi steel plate to concrete, 2 -day moist cure.
E. Finish of Concrete Slab Topping shall be per Section 03310- Concrete Floor Preparation.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR TRENCHING
02220 - 121611 02220 -3
SECTION 03310
CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL •
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide concrete floor preparation of existing concrete floors where
shown on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as needed for a complete and proper
preparation to receive subsequent floor surfacing.
B. Floor preparation as specified in this Section is intended where existing conditions require the
use of mechanical abrading equipment or chemical removers as supplementary methods of
floor preparation to receive scheduled finish floor materials. Floor preparation includes the
partial or complete removal of existing under -slab items that protrude above the finish floor
line and, if left in place without modifications or removal, would subsequently affect the
installation and performance of applied finish floor materials.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. NOT USED
B. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring.
C. Section 09660- Resilient Sheet Flooring.
D. Section 09670 -Epoxy Flooring on Concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAVY DUTY FLOOR CLEANING:
A. For existing floor surfaces requiring Floor Cleaning as part of the Concrete Floor Preparation,
EXCEPT at floor surfaces scheduled to receive Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT), provide a
heavy duty biodegradable citrus -based degreaser product equal to Citrex by L & M
Construction Chemicals Inc., Omaha NE (800- 362 - 3331).
B. For existing floor surfaces scheduled to receive Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT), provide a
heavy -duty concrete floor cleaning product that is compatible with the finish flooring and
flooring adhesives to be installed.
2.02 ETCHING AND LAITANCE REMOVER: For floor surfaces scheduled to receive Resilient Flooring,
furnish a muriatic acid 10% Etching and Laitance Remover solution, with supplementary rinsing and
neutralizing agents, all as specifically approved as a compatible product by the flooring product
manufacturer. Do NOT use Etching and Laitance Remover for surfaces scheduled to receive
Concrete Sealer.
2.03 FLOOR ABRADING WORK: If required in order to install the floor covering specified in the floor
area subject to floor abrading, provide floor abrading equipment designed to provide dry, dustless
surface shotblast abrading and utilizing an integral vacuum system, equal to abrading equipment as
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION
03310- 121611 03310 -1
•
manufactured by Wheelabrator Blastrac, Berlin NJ. All equipment, materials and methods shall be
in compliance with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2.04 FLOOR PATCHING PRODUCTS:
A. Flash Patch and Skim Coating:
1. For cracks, minor holes, crevices, score marks, control and construction joints, the
Contractor shall .provide concrete patching product compatible with finish flooring
adhesives, equal to products by Armstrong World Industries, Lancaster PA (800 -448-
1405).
a. Armstrong S -194 Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler.
b. Armstrong S -183 Fast Setting Cement -Based Underlayment.
c. Armstrong S -184 Fast Setting Cement -Based Patch and Skim Coat.
2. For holes and larger patches, provide concrete patching product equal to L & M
Durapatch Industrial, fiber - reinforced high- strength cement -based patching system, by
L & M Construction Chemicals Inc.
a. Acceptable Alternative: Provide "Ardex SD -P lnstantpatch", self- drying, fast -
setting, Concrete Underlayment Patch, by Ardex Engineered Cements, Aliquippa
PA (724- 203 - 5000).
2.05 FLOOR LEVELING PRODUCTS:
A. Floor Leveling (Underlayment): Provide Self- Leveling Underlayment Concrete equal to
"Ardex K -15 ", Ardex Engineered Cements, Aliquippa PA (724- 203 - 5000), at areas scheduled
to receive finish flooring, and in quantities and layers of application necessary to achieve the
level tolerance as recommended by the flooring product manufacturer.
B. Floor Leveling (Concrete Topping): Provide Self- Leveling Concrete Topping equal to "Ardex
K- 500 ", by Ardex Engineered Cements, at areas scheduled to receive no additional finish
flooring with the possible exception of Concrete Sealer/ Hardener.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION: Provide all Concrete Floor Preparation work in accordance
with governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and as recommended by the flooring product
manufacturers and their respective trade association standards.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR • CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION
03310 - 121611 03310 -2
SECTION 05400
COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide cold- formed metal framing and accessories at exterior
and interior metal framed assemblies where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section,
and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 09260- Gypsum Wallboard & Partition System.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals. •
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 All framing stud and joist members shall be of the type, size and gauge shown on the drawings, and
shall be equal to products manufactured by Dietrich Industries Inc., Pittsburgh PA (412/ 281 - 2805).
2.02 Framing studs and joists shall be formed from steel conforming to ASTM A446; Grade D for 14 GA
and 16 GA; Grade B for 18 GA and 20 GA; and galvanized per ASTM A 653. Structural calculations
should be prepared utilizing one of the following:
SQ Grade 22 minimum yield strength 33
SQ Grade 40 minimum yield strength 40
SQ Grade 50 minimum yield strength 50
2.03 All galvanized 18 and 20 gauge framing studs and joists, and all galvanized track, bridging, end
closures and accessories shall be formed from steel conforming to ASTM A653, SQ Grade 33, with
a minimum yield of 33,000 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 ERECTION:
A. Tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure. Axially loaded studs shall be
installed in a manner which will assure that ends of the studs are positioned in the track with
a minimum gap, prior to stud and track attachment.
B. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common
structural element, or they shall be butt- welded or spliced together.
C. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both upper
and lower tracks.
PETCO South Tigard, OR COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING
05400- 121611 05400 -1
•
D. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below windowsills, above window and door heads, at
free standing stair rails, and elsewhere to furnish support, and shall be securely attached to
supporting members.
E. Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging rows shall
be spaced for walls up to 10' -0" height, with one row at mid - height; and for walls exceeding
• 10' -0" height, with bridging rows spaced not to exceed 5' -0" on- center.
F. Provisions for structure vertical movement shall be provided where indicated on the drawings
using a manufactured Vertical Slide Clip system or other means per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.03 ERECTION (AXIAL LOAD - BEARING):
A. Tracks shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure.
B. Complete uniform and level bearing support shall be provided for the bottom track. At track
butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural
element, or they shall be butt welded or spliced together.
C. Jack studs shall be installed bellow windowsills, above window and door heads and at
freestanding stair rails, and shall be securely attached to supporting members.
D. Wall stud bridging shall be installed in a manner to provide resistance to both minor axis
bending and rotation. Bridging rows shall be equally spaced not to exceed 5' -0" on- center for
wind loading only, or 4' -0" on- center for axial loading.
3.04 ERECTION OF COLD - FORMED STEEL JOISTS:
A. Joists shall be located directly over bearing studs or a load distribution member shall be
provided at the top track.
B. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points; and joist bridging, where indicated on the drawings.
C. Provide an additional joist under parallel partitions when the partition length exceeds one -half
the joist span and around all floor and roof openings that interrupt one or more spanning
members unless otherwise noted.
D. End blocking shall be provided where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation.
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING
05400 - 121611 05400 -2
•
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, the term
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide miscellaneous metal work as shown on the drawings, as
specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation, such as:
1. Anchor bolts, washers and nuts.
2. Angle frames for rooftop mounted equipment openings, including but not necessarily
limited to exhaust fans, roof hatch, and rooftop HVAC units (part of building shell
construction).
3. Angle and /or channel jambs at masonry openings (part of building shell construction).
4. Banner Anchors at building exterior (Front Elevation) wall and top of parapet coping.
5. Bearing Plates.
6. Bollards with Chain.
7. Door Lintels and other masonry opening lintels (part of building shell construction).
8. Exterior Metal Stairs (part of building shell construction).
9. NOT USED
10. Hitching Rings.
11. NOT USED
12. Leveling Plates.
13. NOT USED
14. Metal Pipe Railings.
15. Rainwater Conductor Guards (part of building shell construction).
16. Rodent Barrier Hardware Cloth.
17. NOT USED
18. Security Bars at all roof openings and all wall openings greater than 12 "x12 ",
including but not necessarily limited to wall louvers and exhaust fans.
19. Security Bars at RTU roofcurbs when existing roofcurbs are being re -used. Security
Bars are furnished as part of the new RTUs/ new roofcurbs package per Section
15500 when new roofcurbs are provided.
20. Security Mesh at exterior metal- framed walls, exterior soffits or interior demising
partitions.
21. Concealed Tube Steel Structural Columns at aluminum storefront (part of building
shell construction).
22. Unistrut and all- thread support rods for suspended plumbing, mechanical and
electrical equipment and other assemblies.
23. Additional miscellaneous steel items that may not be listed but are required for this
project; refer to the drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Comply with following standards, as pertinent.
1. Rolled steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36.
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 121611 05500 -
2. Cold formed steel plates, etc.: ASTM A283, Grade C.
3. Steel tubing: ASTM A500/A501, Grade B. (Fb = 27,700 psi, E = 24,000,000 psi).
4. Steel bars and bar -size shapes: ASTM A306, Grade 65 or ASTM A36.
5. Cold finished steel bars: ASTM A108.
6. Cold rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336.
7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating.
8. Stainless steel sheets: AISI Type 302 or 304, 24 gauge, with number 4 finish.
9. Gray iron casting: ASTM A47.
10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A48, Class 10.
11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
12. Concrete inserts: Threaded or wedge -type galvanized malleable cast iron per ASTM
A27. Required bolts, shims and washers, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A153.
2.02 FASTENERS:
A. General: For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, provide zinc - coated fasteners;
provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for the particular use.
B. Comply with the following standards as applicable.
1. Bolts and nuts: provide hexagon -head regular type, ASTM A307, Grade A.
2. Lag Bolts: provide square head type complying with Fed. Spec. FF -B -561.
3. Machine Screws: provide cadmium plated steel type, Fed. Spec. FF -S -111.
4. Washers: Plain Washers to be Fed. Spec. FF -W -92, round, carbon steel; Lock
Washers to be Fed. Spec. FF -W -84, helical spring type carbon steel.
5. Toggle Bolts: provide type, class, and style needed, Fed. Spec. FF -B -588.
6. Anchorage Devices: provide expansion shield, Fed. Spec. FF -S -325.
2.03 BANNER ANCHORS AT BUILDING EXTERIOR (FRONT ELEVATION):
A. Coping- Mounted Banner Anchors: The Contractor shall furnish and install banner anchors
on the building shell's parapet coping, where shown and as detailed on the drawings,
consisting of stainless steel components, by McMaster -Carr Supply Company, Los Angeles
CA (562- 692 -5911; www.mcmaster.com) and supplementary sealant and roofing membrane
components, as detailed. Each Coping- Mounted Banner Anchor assembly consists of the
following parts:
Part of Assembly Thread/ Remarks McMaster -Carr Part No.
Headless Hanger Screw 3/8 " -16 Thread, 1 per 90915A636
banner anchor (18 -8 Stainless Steel)
Stainless Steel Fender For 3/8" screw size, 1 per 90313A115
Washer, 1.5" OD banner anchor (18 -8 Stainless Steel)
Rubber Washer, 5/8" OD For 3/8" screw size, I per 90130A031
banner anchor
Eye Nut, Oval Eye 3/8" - 16 Thread, 1 per 3061T25
banner anchor (316 Stainless Steel)
Roof Membrane Patch and See Detail
roofing sealant
B. Wall- Mounted Banner Anchors: The Contractor shall furnish and install recessed banner
anchors on the building exterior wall, where shown and as detailed on the drawings. Provide
one (1) of either Model #14 -501, Model #14 -500, or Model #14 -530, Cup Anchor with cross
bar or eye (varies according to the model ordered), by Recreonics Inc., Louisville KY (800-
428 -3254; website www.recreonics.com) at each Wall- Mounted Banner Anchor location.
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 121611 05500 -2
1. Installation: As detailed on the drawings, permanently install the Cup Anchor in a core -
drilled hole in the exterior masonry wall, so that the face of the Cup Anchor is aligned
with the face of building shell masonry.
2. Grout the void space by using either non - shrink grout colored the same as the
masonry, or by using an injection epoxy system equal to HIT HY20 Injection Adhesive
Anchoring System for Masonry Construction, by Hilti, Tulsa OK (800- 879 - 8000). Mask
the face of the Cup Anchor during grouting work.
2.04 BOLLARDS:
A. Interior Bollards shall be 4 -1/2" diameter, 42" height, Schedule 10 steel pipe bollards with
powder- coated finish marked with black- and - yellow striped tape, and with 1/4" thick, slotted
base plate to receive four mounting anchors, equal to Part No. 57895T47, by McMaster -Carr
Supply Company, Los Angeles CA (562- 692 -5911; www.mcmaster.com).
1. Chain: Provide length of chain adequate to span the distance between interior bollards'
chain eye anchors with no more than approximately 4" sag, equal to McMaster -Carr
Part No. 3594T49, zinc plated, ungraded steel straight link chain, material diameter
0.25 ", inside link width 0.45 ", inside link length 1.55 ", approximately 7 links per foot.
2. Chain Eye Anchor: Provide one Chain Eye, field welded to each side of an Interior
Bollard that is shown on the drawings to receive Chain. The Chain Eye Anchor should
be located on all Bollards intended to receive chain, at an equal, 38" height above the
floor.
3. Connector: Provide two (2) threaded connectors, one at each end of a section of chain,
equal to McMaster -Carr Part No. 3711T23 "Oval with Large Opening ", zinc plated
steel.
4. Mounting Anchors: Secure each Interior Bollard to the concrete floor slab with four (4)
epoxy grouted anchor bolts or expansion anchors, sized for 3" minimum anchorage
depth.
B. Exterior Imbed Bollards: NOT USED
C. Exterior Bolt -Down Bollard: NOT USED
1. Exterior Pipe Bollards located in receiving areas shall be painted Color OSHA Safety
Yellow. Exterior Pipe Bollards located at the front building elevation or similar location
where appearance may be important, shall be painted as specified on the drawings.
2.05 FLOOR MOUNTED HITCHING RINGS: NOT USED
2.06 HITCHING RINGS (at Pet Grooming Areas):
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install Hitching Rings, where shown on the drawings,
consisting of stainless steel components, by McMaster -Carr Supply Company, Los Angeles
CA (562- 692 -5911; www.mcmaster.com). Each Hitching Ring Assembly consists of the
following parts:
Part of Assembly McMaster -Carr Part No. Remarks
Tie -Down Ring McMaster Carr Part No. 31665T22 1 per hitching ring
316 Stainless Steel
Screws, No. 6 x 2" McMaster Carr Part No. 90315A442 4 per hitching ring
18 -8 Stainless Steel
B. Description: Base Plate 1 -3/8" x 1- 9/16 "; Base Plate Ring Diameter 3/4 "; Large Ring
Diameter 1 -5/8 ".
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 121611 05500 -3
C. Secure each Hitching Ring to concealed wood blocking or sheet metal reinforcing with
stainless steel fasteners where shown on the drawings.
•
2.07 METAL LADDER AND RAILINGS:
A. Fabricate ladder as shown on drawings, in accordance with local applicable construction
codes, and in accordance with ANSI 14.3 "Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders ".
B. Ladder shall support a live load of 100 lb / s.f. with stringer deflection not exceeding L/360 of
span; railings and attachments shall resist a lateral force of 300 lbs. at any point.
C. Prime paint all components. Finish paint ladder, as indicated on the drawings and per Section
09900 - Painting.
2.08 RODENT BARRIER HARDWARE CLOTH:
A. Provide 4 x 4 mesh (1/4" x 1/4 "), 23 gauge, galvanized steel, welded wire hardware cloth, in
48" rolls, by TWP Inc., Berkeley CA (800- 227 -1570; www.twpinc.com), Midwest Air
Technologies Inc. (800- 628 -8815; www.midwest - air.com).
1. Alternative Supplier: Wire Cloth Part No. 9217T46 by McMaster -Carr Supply Company,
Los Angeles CA (562- 692 -5911; www.mcmaster.com)
B. Secure Rodent Barrier Hardware Cloth, concealed behind the subsequently installed gypsum
wallboard finish, to the bottom track and face of framing of all Petco Tenant Space perimeter
partitions that are common with the inside surface of the tenant space building shell's exterior
walls, and secure to the bottom track and face of framing of all tenant separation partitions.
2.09 SECURITY MESH:
A. Provide carbon steel security mesh equal to ASM #1.0 -16F (1.090" SWD x 2.56" LWD center
to center of bond), with overall 0.48" thickness, 77% open area, maximum carbon content
0.15 %, as manufactured by AMICO, Birmingham AL (800- 366- 2642). Conventional higher
carbon expanded metal mesh, not manufactured specifically for security purposes, is NOT
permitted for this use.
1. Provide security mesh sections installed in a continuous, staggered pattern to a
minimum height of at least 8 feet above the finish floor, or to an additional height if so
specified on the drawings.
2. Install Security Mesh directly to the metal stud demising partition framing on the
PETCO side of the partition.
3. In the event that an existing finished demising partition is scheduled to receive a
furred or other supplementary finish on the PETCO -side of the partition, then the
security mesh shall be installed on the existing partition finish, with anchorage
through existing finish ( -es) to the wall framing.
2.10 TRASH ENCLOSURE, GATE AND HARDWARE: NOT USED
2.11 SHOP PAINT: Provide primer meeting Fed. Spec. TT -P -636. Prime paint components, Color Primer
Red. For repair of galvanizing, use a high zinc dust content paint complying with MIL -P- 21035.
2.12 GALVANIZING: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete slabs and as noted on drawings, in
accordance with ASTM Al23, minimum 1.25 oz/ sq. ft.
2.13 FABRICATION: Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces that are true to the required lines and
levels, grinding exposed welds smooth and flush, forming exposed connections with hairline joints
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL FABRICATIONS
05500- 121611 05500 -4
and using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Prior to shop painting or priming, properly clean
metal surfaces as required for the applied finish and for the proposed use of the item. On surfaces
inaccessible for painting after assembly or erection, apply two primer coats.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION: Set work accurately and anchored firmly into position, plumb and level. Work .
embedded in concrete shall be treated as specified, and set with concrete patching material. Where
field welding is required, comply with AWS recommended procedures for shielded metal -arc
welding for appearance and quality of weld and for methods to be used in correcting welding work.
Grind exposed welds smooth, and touch -up shop prime coats. Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces
which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed
field connections. Clean and re -prime field welds, bolted connectors, and abraded areas of shop
priming or finish material.
END OF SECTION •
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL. FABRICATIONS
05500 - 121611 05500 -5
SECTION 06200
ROUGH & FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in some Project Manual
Sections, "Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 -
Summary of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 ROUGH CARPENTRY SUMMARY:
A. Rough Carpentry: The Contractor shall provide carpentry work including materials and
fasteners as needed for a complete and proper installation, including but not limited to:
1. Concealed mounted blocking as may be required for wall- mounted items that cannot
be supported by metal strapping.
2. Surface mounted plywood at the Pre -Sales room.
3. Wood blocking to shim level at all HVAC rooftop unit roof curbs.
4. • Plywood wainscot at the Pre -Sales room.
5. Other wood assemblies (interior and /or exterior) as may be indicated on the drawings.
1.03 FINISH CARPENTRY SUMMARY:
A. Base and Wall Cabinets: The Contractor shall provide the following:
1. Break Room: Base Cabinets and Wall Cabinets.
2. Cage Room: Storage Cabinets and Wall Cabinets.
3. Wellness Room: Wall Cabinet.
B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: The Contractor shall provide Plastic Laminate Countertops on
particleboard underlay.
1. Break Room. •
2. Office.
3. Mens and Womens Restrooms.
4. Other locations if indicated on the drawings.
C. Plastic Laminate Accessory Items: The Contractor shall provide Plastic Laminate Accessory
Items on particleboard underlay:
1. Coat Rack at Break Room.
2. Clipboard Rack at Office, located above countertop, under shelf.
3. Shelves with support brackets at Office.
4. Shelf at Work Room.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: The Contractor shall submit cabinet shop drawings and product data in sufficient
detail to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER AND PLYWOOD:
A. Rough Carpentry (non - structural blocking) shall be Hem -Fir or equal, No. 2 grade or better.
Plywood at Pre -Sales shall be 5/8" thick Sanded Plywood Panel, APA Interior B -D.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROUGH & FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 121611 06200 -1
B. Pressure Treated Plywood . (where fire retardant wood is required by code or jurisdiction):
Provide fire retardant treated plywood, with flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E -84, equal to "Exterior Fire -X" treatment, by Hoover Treated Wood
Products Inc., Thompson GA (706- 595 - 5058).
C. Fire Retardant Treated Wood and Plywood (where fire retardant wood is required by code or
jurisdiction): Provide AWPA Type A fire retardant treatment, flame spread rating of 25 or less
when tested in accordance with ASTM E -84, equal to "Pyro- Guard" treatment, by Hoover
Treated Wood Products Inc.
1. Alternative Applied Fire Retardant Coating: Provide spray or immersed Fire Retardant
Coating achieving a Class "B" rating, equal to Flame Control Coating System, No. 129
Varnish Base Coat and No. 130 Varnish Overcoat Low Sheen, by Flame Control
Coatings Inc., Niagara Falls NY (716- 282 - 1399).
a. Fire Hazard Classification: Tested per ASTM E -84.
b. Acceptable Alternate: Provide Flame Stop I -DS, pyrolitic fire retardant penetrant,
by Flame Stop Inc., Ft. Worth TX (877- 397 -7867; www.flamestop.com).
1) Class A one -coat system, dries clear, applied by spray, brush or roll
application, or immersion, on clean previously stained wood as scheduled.
2) Fire Hazard Classification: Tested per ASTM -E -84; NFPA 255; UL 723.
2.02 BASE AND WALL CABINETS:
A. Provide AWI Custom quality grade base and wall cabinets in the dimensions and
arrangement shown on the drawings.
1. Break Room, Cage Room, Wellness Room: All exposed vertical surfaces.
a. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Beige #1530 -60 matte. No product substitutions.
(PETCO Reference "PL -04 ")
2. Men and Women Restrooms: Exposed vertical surfaces at Countertop Skirt.
3. Standard Criteria:
a. Cabinets shall be of European frameless construction; with cabinet spreaders;
with mortise - and -tenon bottoms and back, glued and mechanically fastened into
cabinet ends.
b. Cabinet Interior and semi - exposed surfaces shall be Color White melamine.
c. Cabinet Exterior shall be plastic laminate with PVC edges in color matching the
laminate faces.
B. Cabinet and Drawer Hardware:
1. Cabinet Door Hinges: equal to Blum 125 degree, self - closing.
2. Drawer slides: equal to Blum Metabox -320 Series.
3.. Shelf Pins: 8mm plated metal, with holes spaced 32mm on centers.
4. Cabinet Door and Drawer Pulls: Contractor shall provide one Wire Pull, 4" wrought
brass with chromium plated finish, equal to Ives #38, by HB Ives, Wallingford CT (800-
525 -0336) at each sliding drawer, and at each hinged cabinet door.
2.03 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS:
A. Provide post - formed and standard plastic laminate countertops in the dimensions and
arrangement shown on the drawings.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROUGH & FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 121611 06200 -2
1. Break Room, Wellness Room, Men and Women Restrooms: Provide Post - formed
Countertop with integral 4" backsplash and front edge, with field - applied, square -edged
sidewall trims.
a. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Blond Echo #7939 -38 fine velvet texture. No
product substitutions. (PETCO Reference "PL -01 ")
2. Office: Provide Standard, Square -Edge Countertop.
a. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Blond Echo #7939 -38 fine velvet texture. No
product substitutions. (PETCO Reference "PL -01 ").
B. Countertop Support Brackets:
1. Provide Knape Vogt #208 Ultimate L- Bracket, 500mm size, 19.5" depth x 12.9" height,
Color White, by Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co., Grand Rapids MI (616- 459 -3311;
www. kv.com ).
2. Acceptable Mfr: Stanley #795 - 257555 Heavy Duty Shelf Bracket, 20" depth x 13"
height, Color White.
2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE COAT RACK:
A. Provide plastic laminate on 3/4" particleboard coat rack at the Break Room.
1. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Beige #1530 -60 matte. No product substitutions.
(PETCO Reference "PL -04 ")
B. Coot Hooks: Contractor shall provide four coat hooks on the Coat Rack, equal to Ives #405,
by HB Ives, Wallingford CT (800- 525 - 0336).
2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLIPBOARD RACK:
A. Provide plastic laminate on face and edges of 4" x 3/4" x length of wall elevation,
particleboard clipboard rack at the Office.
1. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Beige #1530 -60 matte. No product substitutions.
(PETCO Reference "PL -04 ")
B. Clipboard Rack Hooks: Contractor shall provide zinc - plated screw -in L -hooks (approximately
1/2" leg) at 12" OC, with minimum 6" spaced distance to adjacent shelf brackets.
2.06 PLASTIC LAMINATE SHELVES (OFFICE):
A. Where shelves are shown on the drawings, provide plastic laminate on face and edges of 18"
x 3/4" x length of wall elevation, particleboard shelf.
1. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Blond Echo #7939 -38 fine velvet texture. No product
substitutions. (PETCO Reference "PL -01 ")
B. Shelf Support Brackets:
-1. Provide Knape Vogt #208 Ultimate L- Bracket, 400mm size, 15.6" depth x 10.6" height,
Color White.
2. Alternative Mfr: Stanley #795 - 257550 Heavy Duty Shelf Bracket, 16" depth x 10"
height, Color White.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROUGH & FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 121611 06200 -3
•
2.07 PLASTIC LAMINATE SHELF (WORK ROOM):
A. Where shown on the drawings, provide plastic laminate on face and edges of 12" x 60" x 3/4"
particleboard shelf.
1. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Blond Echo #7939 -38 fine velvet texture. No product
substitutions. (PETCO Reference "PL-01")
B. Shelf Support Brackets:
1. Provide Knape Vogt #208 Ultimate L- Bracket, 300mm size, 11.6" depth x 8.3" height,
Color White, by Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co.
2. Alternative Mfr: Stanley #795 - 257545 Heavy Duty Shelf Bracket, 12" depth x 8" height,
Color White.
2.08 STOREFRONT WINDOW LEDGE AT RETAIL:
A. Provide post- formed plastic laminate window ledge as shown on the drawings. Except for the
alternative manufacturers listed, no plastic laminate substitution is permitted.
1. Color shall be Wilsonart Color Blond Echo #7939 -38 fine velvet texture. No product
substitutions. (PETCO Reference "PL -01 ")
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FINISH CARPENTRY: Set and secure finish carpentry items in place, rigid, plumb and square.
Permanently fix items using appropriate anchorages. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
Countersink semi - concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components and conceal with
filler to match surrounding wood, place flush with surrounding surfaces. Carefully scribe finished
items that are against other building materials, leaving 1/32" gaps.
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROUGH & FINISH CARPENTRY
06200- 121611 06200 -4
SECTION 07190
MOISTURE MITIGATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide Moisture Mitigation if the new or existing concrete
subfloor exceeds the finish flooring or adhesive manufacturer's measured Moisture Emission limits.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 03310- Concrete Floor Preparation.
B. Section 09650- Resilient Flooring.
C. Section 09660- Resilient Sheet Flooring.
D. Section 09670- Epoxy Finish on Concrete.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.05 WARRANTY: Provide the Moisture Mitigation System manufacturer product warranty in the Building
Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOISTURE MITIGATION FOR VINYL COMPOSITION TILE AND VINYL SHEET FLOORING:
A. The acceptable moisture emission level for Vinyl Composition Tile and Vinyl Sheet Flooring
may not exceed 5.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
B. Moisture Mitigation Treatment: The Contractor shall provide concrete slab treatment using
products by Koester American Corporation, Virginia Beach VA (757- 425 -1206;
www.koesterusa.com). Application shall be by a manufacturer - approved applicator.
1. For Moisture Emission Level of over 5.0 to 10.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24
hours, and pH less than 14: Provide Koester VAP I pH single coat vapor control
treatment.
2. For Moisture Emission Level of over 10.0 to 25.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24
hours, and pH less than 14: Provide Koester VAP 1 2000 single coat vapor control
treatment.
C. Acceptable Alternative Moisture Mitigation Treatment: The Contractor shall provide Creteseal
CS2000, concrete slab vapor control treatment using product by Creteseal Concrete
Waterproofing Products Inc., Anaheim CA (800- 278 -4273, www.creteseal.com).
2.02 MOISTURE MITIGATION FOR EPDXY FLOORING:
A. The acceptable moisture emission level for Epoxy Flooring may not exceed 3.0 pounds per
1000 square feet per 24 hours.
B. Concrete surfaces may be shot - blasted for concrete moisture testing, but must be shot -
blasted for the subsequent epoxy flooring installation.
PETCO South Tigard, OR MOISTURE MITIGATION SYSTEMS
07190 - 121611 07190 -1
1. For concrete moisture testing, the steel bead shot size should be a #230 to #280 mesh
profile to obtain a satisfactory surface, or as may be alternatively recommended by the
Moisture Mitigation product manufacturer.
2. For shot -blast preparation required for epoxy flooring installation, refer to Section
09670 -Epoxy Finish on Concrete.
C. Moisture Mitigation Treatment: The Contractor shall provide concrete slab treatment using
products by Koester American Corporation, Virginia Beach VA (757- 425 -1206;
www.koesterusa.com). Application shall be by a manufacturer - approved applicator.
1. For Moisture Emission Level of over 3.0 to 10.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24
hours, and pH less than 14: Provide Koester VAP I pH single coat vapor control
treatment.
2. For Moisture Emission Level of over 10.0 to 25.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24
hours, and pH less than 14: Provide Koester VAP 1 2000 single coat vapor control
treatment.
D. Acceptable Alternative Moisture Mitigation Treatment: The Contractor shall provide Creteseal
CS2000, concrete slab vapor control treatment using product by Creteseal Concrete
Waterproofing Products Inc., Anaheim CA (800 - 278 -4273, www.creteseal.com).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 CONCRETE FLOOR SHOTBLAST: Clean all surfaces to receive moisture vapor reduction system.
Shotblast all floors and clean surfaces with vacuum to remove all residue off the substrate. Remove
all defective materials, and foreign matter such as dust, adhesives, leveling compounds, paint, dirt,
floor hardeners, bond breakers, oil, grease, curing agents, form release agents, efflorescence and
laitance. Repair all cracks, expansion joint, control joints, and open surface honeycombs and fill in
accordance with product manufacturer recommendations. Inform moisture mitigation system
manufacturer if concrete additives like chlorides or any other soluble compounds that can
contaminate surfaces have been used in the concrete mix. Reinforcing fibers must be burned off,
scraped and vacuumed. Do not Acid Etch.
3.03 CONCRETE FLOOR PREPARATION:
A. A cementitious underlayment system with an approved epoxy primer, if required by the
flooring manufacturer, may be used to level and smooth surfaces after shotblasting the floor
on top of the water vapor reduction system. The underlayment system utilized must be
installed in accordance with the underlayment system manufacturer's printed instructions and
within the specified limits. No underlayment system containing gypsum shall be allowed.
B. When water based adhesives are utilized in the floor covering installation, use an approved
underlavment system with primer prior to the Installation of the flooring system. Please
consult the adhesive manufacturer for their minimum recommended thickness of
cementitious underlavment to absorb excess moisture In the adhesive. Leveling of the
substrate shall not be considered part of the water vapor reduction system.
3.04 INSTALLATION: Install all work of this section in strict accordance with the construction details,
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended
installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR MOISTURE MITIGATION SYSTEMS
07190 - 121611 07190 -2
•
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
•
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: Provide Building Insulation where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section,
and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK: NOT USED
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Rigid Insulation: Provide rigid insulation equal to products by Dow Chemical Company,
Midland MI (800- 441 - 4369).
1. Perimeter Slab Insulation: Provide 1 -1/2" thick (R -7.5) rigid insulation board equal to
"Dow Styrofoam Score Board ".
2. Masonry Interior Wall Insulation: Provide 1 -1/2" thick (R -7.5) rigid insulation board
equal to "Dow Styrofoam Z -Mate Board ".
B. Fiberglass Batt Insulation: Provide Fiberglass Batt Insulation equal to products by
CertainTeed Corp., Valley Forge PA (800- 523 - 7844); Owens Corning, Toledo OH (800 -438-
7465); Johns Manville, Denver CO (800- 644 - 4013); or Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville IN
(800- 825 - 4434).
C. Exterior Wall Thermal Insulation: Provide either 3 -1/2" thick foil faced glass fiber batts with an
insulation -only value of R -11 in wall cavities less than 3 -5/8 "; or provide 6" thick foil faced
glass fiber batts with an insulation -only value of R -19 at exterior wall construction where wall
cavities are at least 6 ". Insulation shall be equal to CertainTeed CertaPro Foil Faced Batts
(with integral vapor retarder, for use in concealed applications only) rated with surface
burning characteristics per ASTM E84, including Maximum Flame Spread Index 75; and
Maximum Smoke Developed Index 450.
D. Interior Partition Thermal Insulation: Provide 3 -1/2" thick foil faced glass fiber batts with an
insulation -only value of R -11, where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. Insulation shall be
equal to CertainTeed CertaPro Thermal FSK -25 Faced Batts (with integral vapor retarder, for
use in exposed applications) rated with surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84,
including Maximum Flame Spread Index 75; and Maximum Smoke Developed Index 450.
E. Interior Sound Attenuation (concealed): Provide 3 -1/2" unfaced glass fiber batts for interior
sound attenuation purposes at walls, at suspended ceilings and other locations where shown
or scheduled on the Drawings. Insulation shall be equal to CertainTeed CertaPro
AcoustaTherm Batts, rated with surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84, including
Maximum Flame Spread Index 25; and Maximum Smoke Developed Index 50.
PETCO South Tigard, OR BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 121611 07210 -
F. Interior Sound Attenuation (exposed): Provide 3 -1/2" PSK -faced (White) glass fiber batts for
interior sound attenuation purposes at exposed structure and other locations where shown or
scheduled on the Drawings. Insulation shall be equal to Owens - Corning Flame Spread 25-
PSK Fiberglass, with color White polypropylene- scrim -kraft facing, rated with surface burning
characteristics per ASTM C665, Type III, Class A; Maximum Flame Spread Index 25; and
Maximum Smoke Developed Index 50.
G. White Vinyl Foil Liner: Provide sheet liner over existing roof/ ceiling insulation that will be
exposed in the new construction, with color White, polypropylene- scrim - kraft (PSK) facing
equal to Advanced Foil Systems products by Lamtec Corporation, Flanders NJ (973 -584-
5500). Rated with surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84, including Maximum Flame
Spread Index 25 (film exposed); and Maximum Smoke Developed Index 40 (film exposed).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
•
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION: Install all work of this section in strict accordance with the construction details,
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended
installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR BUILDING INSULATION
07210- 121611 07210 -2
SECTION 07250
EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM REPAIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: Provide an repairs to existing Exterior Insulation Finish System, as shown on the
drawings, as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 06200- Rough & Finish Carpentry and Section 09260- Gypsum
Wallboard & Partition System; product specification for EIFS substrates.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: The Exterior Insulation Finish System manufacturer's specifications and
recommended standard installation details shall be followed completely, and shall be considered a
part of this Section as if the manufacturer's specification was included in its entirety.
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall provide the Manufacturer's Standard 5 -Year
Product Warranty in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted per Section 01700 -
Contract Closeout.
B. Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE EIFS MANUFACTURERS:
A. Basis of Design: Provide Outsulation EIFS System, by Dryvit Systems Inc., Warwick RI (401-
822- 4100).
•
1. Sheathing: Exterior Gypsum Sheathing, meeting ASTM C79 requirements for water -
resistant core or Type X core, product type subject to acceptance by the EIFS
manufacturer as part of the warranted EIFS system. Refer to Section 09260- Gypsum
Wallboard & Partition System. Do NOT provide Exterior Gypsum Sheathing without
also providing exterior plywood sheathing backup at any location where PETCO
signage is scheduled to be provided.
2. Air/ Weather Barrier: Dryvit "Backstop" acrylic Air/ Weather Barrier.
3. Flashing Trims: Manufacturer's standard, as designed and manufactured for the
intended purpose.
4. Exterior Insulation Board: Dryvit Exterior EPS insulation board, board minimum
thickness 3/4" deep or thicker as shown on the drawings, with a minimum 3/4" EPS
material thickness at its least section. EPS Board shall be aged/ air -dried for the
equivalent of six weeks prior to installation.
5. Mechanical EPS Fasteners:
a. Wind Devil Fasteners, by Wind -Lock Corporation, Leesport PA (800- 872 - 5625).
•
No substitutions are permitted.
PETCO South Tigard, OR EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM REPAIRS
07250 - 121611 07250 -1
•
1) Light Gauge Steel Framing: Type LM fastener and plate system, 5/8"
minimum penetration into framing.
2) Heavy Gauge Steel Framing: Type S fastener and plate system, 5/8"
minimum penetration into framing.
3) Masonry: Type ME expansion fastener and plate system, 1" minimum
penetration into masonry.
b. Mechanical Fasteners may not be a part of the standard Dryvit system; however,
it is an Architect - required component for this project in addition to adhesive
application which may be required as a part of the manufacturer's warranted
system.
6. Exterior Basecoat: Dryvit Exterior Basecoat.
7. Reinforcing Mesh:
a. Above 8' -0" height at adjacent finish grade: Dryvit Standard Reinforcing Mesh
(4.3 oz. per square yard).
b. Below 8' -0" height at adjacent finish grade: Dryvit Panzer 15 Reinforcing Mesh
(15 oz. per square yard), applied as a secondary reinforcement under USG
Standard Reinforcing Mesh at these wall areas.
8. Textured Finish: Dryvit Exterior Textured Finish, trowel applied, minimum installed
thickness 1/6" over reinforcing, 3/16" maximum thickness.
9. Color/ Texture (Drawing Key Symbol "EIFS -1 "): Color to be determined; Texture "Dryvit
Sandblast ".
B. Acceptable Alternative EIFS: Provide Senerflex EIFS System, by Senergy, Cranston RI (800-
221- 9255). •
1. Sheathing: Exterior Gypsum Sheathing, meeting ASTM C79 requirements for water -
resistant core or Type X core. Refer to Section 09260- Gypsum Wallboard System. Do
NOT provide Exterior Gypsum Sheathing at any location where PETCO signage is
scheduled to be provided; provide an Alternative Sheathing as follows:
a. Alternative Sheathing: Exterior Plywood Sheathing, if shown on the drawings,
product type subject to acceptance by the EIFS manufacturer as part of the
warranted EIFS system. Refer to Section 06200- Rough & Finish Carpentry.
b. Alternative Sheathing: Cement Board, if shown on the drawings, product type
subject to acceptance by the EIFS manufacturer as part of the warranted EIFS
system. Refer to Section 09260- Gypsum Wallboard & Partition System.
2. Weather Resistive Barrier Membrane: Tyvek StuccoWrap Weather- Resistant Barrier,
by Dupont Tyvek, Wilmington DE (800- 448 - 9835).
3. Drainage Mat: Senergy Drainage Mat, three - dimensional drainage core consisting of
fused entangled filaments.
4. Flashing Trims: Manufacturer's standard, as designed and manufactured for the
intended purpose.
5. Exterior Insulation Board: EPS insulation board, ASTM C578 Type 1, insulation board
board with minimum thickness 3/4" deep or thicker as shown on the drawings, with a
minimum 3/4" EPS material thickness at its least section. EPS Board shall be aged/
air -dried for the equivalent of six weeks prior to installation.
6. Mechanical EPS Fasteners:
a. Wind Devil Fasteners, by Wind -Lock Corporation, Leesport PA (800- 872 -5625)
or equivalent fastener as recommended by USG.
PETCO South Tigard, OR EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM REPAIRS
07250 - 121611 07250 -2
1) Light Gauge Steel Framing: Type LM fastener and plate system, 5/8"
minimum penetration into framing.
2) Heavy Gauge Steel Framing: Type S fastener and plate system, 5/8"
minimum penetration into framing.
3) Masonry: Type ME expansion fastener and plate system, 1" minimum
penetration into masonry.
7. Exterior Basecoat: Senerflex Standard Base Coat, 100% acrylic, mixed with portland
cement.
8. Reinforcing Mesh:
a. Above 8' -0" height at adjacent finish grade: Flexguard 4 Standard Reinforcing
Mesh.
b. Below 8' -0" height at adjacent finish grade: Flexguard 15 Reinforcing Mesh,
applied as a secondary reinforcement under Flexguard 4 Standard Reinforcing
Mesh at these wall areas.
9. Textured Finish: Senerflex Exterior Textured Finish, 100% acrylic, trowel applied,
minimum installed thickness 1/16" over reinforcing, 3/16" maximum thickness.
10. Color/ Texture (Drawing Key Symbol "EIFS -1 "): Color to be determined; Texture
Senerflex Sand Texture.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. The EIFS manufacturer's specifications and recommended standard installation details shall
be followed completely, and shall be considered a part of this Section as if the manufacturer's
specification was included in its entirety.
B. Install the work of this section in accordance with the shop drawings and with pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, anchoring all components firmly
into position straight, level, and plumb within a tolerance of 1:1000 vertical and horizontal.
C. The overall minimum base coat thickness shall be sufficient to fully embed the mesh in
multiple base coat applications.
D. EIFS surfaces in contact with sealants shall be coated with manufacturer - approved sealer.
E. EIFS panel tolerance: Maximum variance from plane shall be 1/4" within a 4 -foot radius.
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM REPAIRS
07250- 121611 07250 -3
SECTION 07540
ROOFING SYSTEM REPAIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide supplementary roofing work at the existing roofing system where
indicated on the drawings, as specified in this section, and as needed for a complete and
proper installation.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all aspects of supplementary roofing work with the Landlord,
and shall provide all protective means necessary during the course of this work.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Refer to Section 07720 -Roof Accessories for description of accessory items
including but not limited to, walkway pads, pipe flashings and curb flashings.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Specifications: All roofing material manufacturer's specifications shall be
followed completely and shall become a part of this specification as if the manufacturer's
specification was included entirely herein.
B. Roofing Subcontractor: All roofing work shall be provided by a single roofing company
experienced with the type of roofing required. The Roofing Subcontractor shall be an
Approved Installer as designated by the roofing product manufacturer.
1.06 SUPPLEMENTARY ROOFING WORK TO MAINTAIN EXISTING WARRANTY: NOT USED
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
A. Storage of Materials:
1. Stand goods on a clean floor to keep all items free from foreign matter.
2. Store roofing materials in a dry place, on raised platforms and cover with waterproof
tarpaulins, inside or in closed vans, protected from the sun and the weather.
3. Store adhesives, primer, pourable sealer and sealants in a dry area, with a
temperature maintained as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Do not store uncured flashing membrane on roof or at temperatures over 75 deg F.
1.08 WARRANTY: NOT USED
•
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLASHING: Provide reinforced membrane flashing at all roof penetrations and parapets, except as
noted otherwise in manufacturer's written specifications and drawings. Refer to the roofing
manufacturer's Flashing Specifications for applicable conditions.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROOFING SYSTEM REPAIRS
07540 - 121611 07540 -1
2.02 COUNTERFLASHING: Provide reinforced membrane flashing at all vertical roof parapet conditions,
installed continuous to termination over the parapet blocking .and under the parapet coping. All
counterflashing products shall be provided in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's
recommendations as an integral part of the warranted roofing system (if any). Refer to the roofing
manufacturer's Flashing Specifications for applicable conditions.
2.03 PIPE AND OTHER MEMBRANE PENETRATIONS: Piping and other roofing membrane penetration
flashings shall be subject to the approval of the Roofing Manufacturer, as an integral part of the
warranted roofing system. The Contractor shall verify the status of any existing Roofing Warranty
and roofing specifications with the Landlord, with the assistance of the PETCO Project Manager, if
required. Products shall be equal to pre- manufactured pipe boots by Portals Plus Inc., Bensenville
IL (708- 766 - 5240).
2.04 HORIZONTAL PIPE MOUNTING PEDESTALS: The Contractor shall provide pre- manufactured
pipe mounting pedestals for rooftop horizontal gas piping as specified in Section 07720 - Roofing
Accessories. Unless specifically approved in roofing manufacturer - published documentation, wood
blocking is NOT an acceptable support system for horizontal gas piping.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation, subject to the roofing manufacturer's approval as an integral part
of the warranted roofing system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 GENERAL:
A. All installation practices shall be as specified in this section, according to the roofing
manufacturer's printed instructions, in strict accordance with the pertinent requirements of
government agencies having jurisdiction, and in a manner needed to secure the specified
warranty. •
B. Scheduling of Work: Any roofing work, including laying of insulation, commenced on any one
calendar day shall be completed entirely within that day. No phased or partial application of
the roofing system will be permitted. If any building roof area cannot be completed in a single
day, a roofing manufacturer - approved weather tight dam or cutoff shall be made to protect
that portion of the uncompleted work.
C. Verify that substrata are dry, smooth, clean, and free from sharp projections and depressions,
properly graded to outlets, and that metal fittings are in proper place prior to commencement.
D. Flashing of Roof Penetrations: All roof penetrations for supporting equipment, plumbing or
HVAC equipment shall be flashed and finished by the Roofing Subcontractor ONLY.
E. Confinement of Materials: Do not allow fluid or plastic materials to spill or migrate beyond the
surfaces of intended application or to flow into gutters or rainwater conductors.
F. Water Cut -Offs: Where insulation is installed, water cutoffs shall be provided to protect the
insulation at the end of each day's work or when rain or snow is imminent. Water cut -offs
shall be constructed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROOFING SYSTEM REPAIRS
07540 - 121611 07540 -2
G. Daily Cleanup: The Contractor shall provide daily removal and disposal from the roof surface
of all fasteners, scraps, containers, and other debris resulting from the roofing system
installation after the roofing membrane installation has commenced.
3.03 CORRECTIVE WORK: Deficient installation noted on-the PETCO Punchlist Inspection must be
corrected by the Roofing Subcontractor ONLY, and made ready for re- inspection by PETCO Project
Manager, no later than the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROOFING SYSTEM REPAIRS
07540 - 121611 07540 -3
SECTION 07600
SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. Provide sheet metal products and accessories where noted on drawings, as specified in this
Section, and as needed for a complete installation, including but not limited to the following:
1. Metal Roofing Panels.
2. Metal vented and non - vented Soffit Panel.
3. Miscellaneous sheet metal closures and accessory items.
4. Parapet Coping.
5. Rainwater Conductors.
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.04 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall include the Sheet Metal Manufacturer's
standard 20 year warranty on finish durability (for Kynar 500/ Hylar 5000 finish) and
workmanship, in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted per Section 01700 - Contract
Closeout.
B. Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS:
A. "Basis of Design ": Aluminum products by ATAS International Inc., Allentown PA (610/395-
8445).
1. Soffit Panels: ATAS Series WLS 120 Wind -lok Soffit Panels and WVS 120 (vented),
with perimeter trim and mouldings as detailed on the drawings.
2. Building Shell Coping: ATAS .040 ", embossed texture, with accessories as detailed on
the drawings.
3. Sheet Metal Colors:
a. Building Shell Coping: Color to be selected from product manufacturer's
standard colors.
b. PETCO Entrance Feature: Provide roofing panels and related coping trim with
custom color equal to PPG #UC45282XL Duranar "Exotic Red ", XL system with
#UC51132 Clear Topcoat, by PPG Industries Inc., Springdale PA.
B. Acceptable Alternative: Merchant & Evans Industries Inc., Burlington NJ (800/ 257 -6215)
C. Acceptable Alternative: Reynolds Metals Company, Eastman GA (800/ 841 - 7774).
PETCO South Tigard, OR SHEET METAL
07600- 121611 07600 -1
D. Acceptable Alternative: Product Substitution subject to approval per Section 01340 -
Submittals.
2.02 SHEET METAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Sheet Metal Coping: Pre - finished 3004 Aluminum Alloy H -12 to H -14, tempered per ASTM
B209; 12' -0" lengths with splice plates. Provide concealed anchors that resist wind uplift and
permit expansion and contraction with temperature changes. Coping Corners shall be 45
degree shop- mitered and heliarc welded. Field fabricated coping corners with sealant
applied at non - welded mitered meeting joints is NOT permitted.
B. Sheet Metal Accessories: Exposed Sheet Metal Accessories shall be the same material and
finish as the coping. All welds shall be ground and shop painted to match the field color.
Provide Expansion Joints at 20' to 30' intervals to prevent thermal movement distortion.
• Description Thickness/Texture
Coping Cap .040" /embossed texture
Cont.hold -down cleat .040"
Splice plates (concealed) .032"
Splice plates (exposed) .040" /embossed texture
Rainwater Conductors .040" /embossed texture
Flashing .040" /embossed texture
Closure (exposed) .040" /embossed texture
Drip edges .040 " /embossed texture
12" Roofing Panels .040" /embossed texture
12" Soffit Panels .032" /smooth
12" Soffit Panels /vented .032 " /smooth, perforated
Fasteners #14 w /neoprene washers
2.03 OTHER ACCESSORY COPING ITEMS:
A. Anchor cleats: Provide stainless steel or aluminum, designed to allow for expansion and
contraction of the adjacent construction.
B. Exposed fasteners: Aluminum or stainless steel, with separate washers with hot bonded
neoprene faces; stainless steel for wood connection.
C. Sealant or non - curing, non - skinning butyl, polyisobutylene tape: Provide between surfaces
during assembly with a minimum amount exposed on the completed installation.
D. Coping Underlayment: Provide Type 15 or 30 asphalt rag felt per Fed. Spec. HH- R -595B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are needed.
3.02 INSTALLATION: Attachments and joints shall allow for expansion /contraction from temperature
changes without distortion or elongation of fastener holes. Flashing shall be installed per AA,
NRCA, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal manuals.
3.03 RAINWATER CONDUCTORS DRAINAGE: Rainwater conductors shall tie to subsurface storm
drainage system or shall terminate at finish grade and discharge onto pre -cast concrete
splashblocks, as may be detailed on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR SHEET METAL
07600 - 121611 07600 -2
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide roof accessories where shown on the drawings, as specified in
this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation, using' means and
methods necessary to maintain the specified roofing manufacturer's warranty:
1. RTU (Rooftop Unit) and Exhaust Fan roof curbs.
2. RTU Retrofit Roof Curb Adapters.
3. Miscellaneous Sealant and Flashing Work.
4. Pipe Mounting Support Pedestals.
5. NOT USED
6. NOT USED
7. Roof Walkway Pads.
8. NOT USED
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: All supplementary roofing flashing and sealant work shall be provided per
the roofing manufacturer's recommendations, so as to maintain the specified roofing warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. ROOFTOP UNIT & OTHER MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ROOFCURBS:
1. HVAC Rooftop Units: The Contractor shall provide the Rooftop Unit (RTU) roof curbs.
Section 15500 describes roof curbs and security bars as part of the (new) RTU
package.
• 2. Exhaust Fans: The Contractor shall provide Exhaust Fan roofcurbs as required.
3. The Contractor shall provide treated wood blocking and shims as required to provide a
level top of roofcurb elevation to receive all rooftop mechanical equipment.
4. Refer to the mechanical drawings and Section 15500- HVAC Systems.
B. RTU RETROFIT ROOF CURB ADAPTERS:
1. Reuse existing roof curbs and provide custom adapter extensions for installation of
new rooftop equipment, equal to roof curb adapters by Roof Products Inc.,
Chattanooga TN (800- 262- 6669).
2. Contractor shall provide existing roof curb measurements and all pertinent data related
to the new rooftop equipment to the fabricator.
3. The Contractor shall provide Security Bars at Retrofit Roof Curb Adapters, per Section
05500.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 121611 07720 -1
C. MISCELLANEOUS SEALANT & FLASHING WORK: The Roofing Subcontractor, or others
under the supervision of the Roofing Subcontractor shall provide supplementary roofing
flashing and sealant work upon completion of the Building Signage installation using means
and methods necessary to maintain the specified roofing manufacturer's warranty.
D. PIPE MOUNTING SUPPORT PEDESTALS: Provide pre- manufactured pipe mounting
pedestals for rooftop horizontal gas piping equal to Pillow Block Pipestands with accessory
Pipe Straps, by Miro Industries Inc., Midvale UT (801- 566 - 3680).
1. Acceptable Alternative Product/ Manufacturer: RPS -Pipe mounting pedestals,
equipment rail and pipe strap accessories, by Roof Products & Systems Corporation,
Bensenville IL (708- 595 - 7320).
2. Unacceptable Alternative Product: Wood blocking is NOT an acceptable pipe support
system for horizontal gas piping.
3. The Contractor shall coordinate quantity and locations with the Plumbing
Subcontractor.
4. The Contractor may either secure or NOT secure pipe mounting pedestals to the roof
membrane, but in any event, it must be in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's
recommendations, so as to maintain the roofing manufacturer's warranty.
5. Submittal: No product submittal is required.
E. ROOF HATCH: NOT USED
F. ROOF HATCH SAFETY RAILING SYSTEM: NOT USED
G. ROOF WALKWAY PADS: Provide flexible, fully adhered homogeneous, non - laminated, skid -
resistant pads, equal to Firestone #3640, 30" x 30" x 0.3" rubber walkway pads with raised
tread pattern, by Firestone Building Products Company (800- 428 - 4442), or as recommended
by the roofing manufacturer.
1. Pads shall be fully adhered with minimum 2" spacing, maximum 6" spacing between
pads, for roof protection walkways adjacent to Roof Hatch; between HVAC Rooftop
Units (non - prototype); and adjacent to HVAC Rooftop Units.
2. Submittal: No product submittal is required.
H. TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS: NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are needed.
3.02 INSTALLATION: Install the work of this Section per the manufacturer's recommendations,
anchoring all items firmly into position.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 121611 07720 -2
SECTION 07920
SEALANTS & CAULKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and equipment for caulking and sealant
work, and make all joints wind and weathertight, at the following general locations:
1. All joints between door, storefront and miscellaneous frames and masonry.
2. Silicone Sealant at Tub Room wall inside corner joints.
3. Sawcut Scoring Joint between Chemically Stained Concrete Floor colors in the Retail
area.
4. All joints where a wind and weathertight joint is required, including but not limited to
exterior hose bibbs and other plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other utility
penetrations through the exterior wall assembly, and roof and roof parapet
penetrations.
5. Rodent Control: All holes, gaps and meeting joints at exterior wall and tenant
separation partitions greater than 1/4" in any dimension must be sealed so as to
prevent rodent infiltration.
6. All control joints at interior masonry and concrete.
7. All control joints at interior gypsum wallboard partitions.
8. All sawcut control joints at interior concrete slabs.
9. All joints where a neat appearance is required between dissimilar materials.
10. Fire safing and fire sealant where fire separation assemblies are required, including but
not limited to partitions at the underside of roof decking, and structural, plumbing,
mechanical and electrical penetrations through fire separation wall assemblies.
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.04 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturers' Warranties: The Contractor shall include the product manufacturers' standard
warranties in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted per Section 01700- Contract
Closeout.
B. Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: Do not retain material at the jobsite that has exceeded the
shelf life recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
PETCO South Tigard, OR SEALANTS & CAULKING
07920- 121611 07920 -1
A. Sealants: As manufactured by Tremco, Cleveland OH, or equivalent products manufactured
by Dow Corning, Pecora, or Sonneborn.
B. Typical Exterior Joints: "Tremco Dymeric" high performance epoxidized polyurethane
meeting TT- S- 00227E, Type II, Class A, 19- GP -24, ASTM C920 -86. Provide manufacturer
approved primer for joints contacting any anodized aluminum finish prior to installation of this
product.
C. Fa9ade and Building Abutment Joints, above grade: Where new construction abuts existing
adjacent construction (e. g. zero -lot -line conditions), provide precompressed, expandable
above -grade wall joints equal to Greyflex System, closed cell foam, color black, in dimension
size(s) as required for closure of field- verified voids, as manufactured by Emseal Joint
Systems Ltd., Westborough MA (508- 836 - 0280). Supplementary primary sealant as further
specified in this section shall be applied as a secondary closure to this system unless
otherwise approved by the PETCO Project Manager.
D. Facade and Building Abutment Joints, below grade: Where new construction abuts existing
adjacent construction (e.g. zero -lot -line conditions), provide precompressed, expandable
below -grade wall joints equal to Series 20H System of foam, epoxy adhesive and topcoat, in
dimension size(s) as required for closure �f field- verified voids, as manufactured by Emseal
Joint Systems Ltd., Westborough MA (508- 836- 0280).
E. Sealant at Facade and Building Abutment Joints, above grade: Provide sealant equal to
Dynatrol II, Type II two -part polyurethane sealant, as manufactured by Pecora Corporation,
Harleysville PA (800- 523 -6688) as a secondary closure to this joint system unless otherwise
approved by the PETCO Project Manager.
F. Typical Interior Joints: "Mono" one -part acrylic terpolymer sealant, meeting ASTM C834.
G. Interior Sawcut Scoring Joints at Retail Area: Provide Lithoseal Trafficalk -3G, sealant, (one)
Color as selected by PETCO, by L.M. Scofield Company, Douglasville, Georgia and Los
Angeles, California (800- 800 -9900) or the appropriate Division Office. (for chemically treated
concrete floor)
H. Joints in Metal Components: "Acoustical Sealant" non -drying synthetic rubber material for
non - porous surfaces or product as specifically recommended by the metal products
manufacturer.
I. Glazing Compound: Refer to Section 08800- Glazing.
J. Firestopping: Provide non -sag, one component sealant, meeting ASTM E814, ASTM 84,
IEEE 634 and listed as UL 1479. The following are acceptable products:
1. FIRECODE compound with THERMAFIBER Safing Insulation, by USG Corporation,
Chicago IL (312- 321 - 4221).
2. FYRE - Shield Sealant, by Tremco, Beachwood OH (800- 321 - 7906).
3. CAFCO TPS Firestop Putty, by Isolatek International, Stanhope NJ (201- 347 - 1200).
K. Sealant Colors:
1. When the sealant is NOT painted by a subsequent construction operation as indicated
on the drawings, the color for each sealant installation is to be selected to closely
PETCO South Tigard, OR SEALANTS & CAULKING
07920 - 121611 07920 -2
match the color of at least one of the adjacent surfaces. The PETCO Project Manager
will be the judge as to the acceptability of the Contractor's proposed color selection.
2. In concealed installations, use standard Color Gray or Black sealant.
3. Should as acceptable color not be available from an approved substitute manufacturer
not herein listed, except at additional charge, then the Contractor shall provide such
premium colors acceptable to the PETCO Project Manager at no additional cost to
PETCO.
2.02 PRIMERS: Use only those primers that have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed
and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
2.03 BACKUP MATERIALS: Use only those backup materials that are non - absorbent, non - staining, and
specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
2.04 MASKING TAPE: For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will
effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and which is
removable without damage to substrate.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation, as selected by the contractor subject to approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION: Prepare all adjacent surfaces to achieve acceptable surface for bond without
damage to adjacent finishes.
3.03 INSTALLATION: Install Sealants and Caulking in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR SEALANTS & CAULKING
07920 - 121611 07920 -3
SECTION 08100
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
•
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord's Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 -
Summary of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall purchase interior hollow metal doors and metal door frames from
a PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor, where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section,
and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 08410- Aluminum Entrance Doors & Storefront.
B. Section 08710- Finish Hardware; metal doors and frames shall be purchased from the same
Inventory Agreement supplier as the Metal Doors and Frames specified in this Section.
1.04 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE TEST PROTOCOLS FOR HIGH VELOCITY HURRICANE ZONES:
NOT USED
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Metal Doors and Frames Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data indicating
compliance with the standards specified in this Section.
B. Door and Frame Schedule: Submit door and frame schedule keyed to the Door Schedule in
the drawings, in detail adequate to verify compliance with the standards specified in this
Section.
C. NOT USED
1.06 WARRANTY: The Contractor shall include a copy of the Metal Door and Frame manufacturer's
standard product warranty in the Building Maintenance Manuals, submitted per Section 01700 -
Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES (INVENTORY AGREEMENT):
A. The Contractor shall purchase Interior and Exterior (if As - ls) Metal Doors and Frames from
Girtman & Associates in an Inventory Agreement, and shall install all doors and frames. The
Contractor shall coordinate delivery of Metal Doors and Frames with the following:
GIRTMAN & ASSOCIATES INC. / GIRTMAN TOTAL OPENINGS, LLC.
Contact: Donna Howard e-mail: dhoward @girtman.com
7115 Cockrill Bend Blvd., Nashville TN 37209
Tel. 615- 350 -6000 FAX 615 - 350 -6686
No product substitutions are permitted.
2.02 METAL DOOR REQUIREMENTS:
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 - 121611 08100 -1
•
A. Interior Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Interior Hollow Metal Doors shall be 1 -3/4 ", 18 gauge cold rolled steel manufactured
flush with visible edge seams, 1/8" bevel on hinge and lock edges, top and bottom
inverted 14 gauge cold rolled steel channels spot welded within the door, with
honeycomb core.
2. Doors shall be internally reinforced with 14 gauge steel reinforcement for closers.
3. Mortised hardware reinforcements shall be factory drilled and tapped.
4. Doors shall be phosphatized and receive one coat of baked on primer.
B. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Hollow Metal Doors shall be 1 -3/4 ", 16 gauge cold rolled steel manufactured
• flush with visible edge seams, 1/8" bevel on hinge and lock edges, top and bottom
inverted 14 gauge cold rolled steel channels spot welded within the door, sound
deadened with one pound density polystyrene laminated to inside panel faces.
Perimeter voids shall be honeycomb filled.
2. Doors shall be internally reinforced with 14 gauge steel reinforcement for closers.
3. Mortised hardware reinforcements shall be factory drilled and tapped.
4. Outswinging exterior metal doors shall be provided with top weather caps.
5. Doors shall be phosphatized and receive one coat of baked on primer.
2.03 METAL DOOR FRAME REQUIREMENTS:
A. Hollow Metal Frame Standards (Typical for all Interior and Exterior Doors):
1. Hollow metal frames shall be 16 gauge flush cold rolled steel, fully arc - welded, 2" faces
(4" head where applicable for masonry openings) reinforced with 8 gauge steel hinge
reinforcements, 16 gauge strike reinforcement, drilled for door silencers at the rate of
(3) per strike jamb and (2) per head of door pairs.
2. Exterior Door Frames and the Interior Door Frame at Pre -Sales shall be fully arc -
welded frames with welded joints ground smooth.
3. Interior Fire -Rated Door Frames shall be fully arc - welded frames with welded joints
ground smooth.
4. Interior Door Frames may be Knocked -down EXCEPT for the Interior Door Frame
scheduled at Pre - Sales.
5. Frames shall be furnished with a minimum of 6 wall anchors and (2) base anchors of
manufacturer's standard design for the intended wall construction.
6. Frames shall be fitted for strikes and full mortise hinges as specified in Section 08710 -
Finish Hardware.
7. Frames shall be phosphatized and receive one coat of baked on prime paint.
8. Exterior Hollow Metal Frames shall receive a bituminous rust - resistive coating on the
inside concealed the metal frames, in addition to the prime coat, or shall be
hot - dipped galvanized.
9. Exterior Door Frames shall bear the Product Notice of Acceptance -- current jurisdiction
approval and product acceptance, if required by the jurisdiction.
2.04 VISION LITE & LOUVER FRAME IN METAL DOOR:
A. Provide beveled, mitered and welded glass retainer vision lite frame and louver frame, in
sizes scheduled, by Air Louvers Inc., Pico Rivera CA (310- 948 - 3495).
1. Acceptable alternative: A -J Manufacturing Co. Inc., Kansas City MO (800 - 247 - 5746).
2. Other manufacturer as selected by the PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor.
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 - 121611 08100 -2
B. Louver Frame and Louver: Provide 20 gauge, fixed slat louvers with frame halves framing
• both sides of the door opening cut -out, with primer prepared for field painting, and sized
nominally as shown on the drawings (reference "Door Types" and "Door Schedule" on the
drawings).
C. Vision Lite Frame: NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR DOOR FRAMES: Exterior hollow metal door frames shall be solid
grouted.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FIRE -RATED DOORS AND FRAMES: Provide solid grout in hollow metal door
frames where required as a component of the fire rated wall assembly.
3.04 INSTALLATION: The Contractor shall prepare the masonry and other openings as found, and shall
install Hollow Metal Doors and Frames per the Manufacturer's Written Instructions and industry
standards.
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100 - 121611 08100 -3
SECTION 08300
SPECIAL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, the term
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide the Pre - Sales/ receiving exterior Door; and Double Acting
Traffic Impact Doors at the Pre -Sales room; and the Building Signage Access Door where shown
on the drawings.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 08100 -Metal Doors & Frames; hollow metal door frame for the Double
Acting Traffic Impact Doors at the Pre -Sales room.
•
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the construction
documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section 01340 - Submittals.
1.05 WARRANTY: The Contractor shall include copies of the manufacturers' standard product
warranties in the Building Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRE - SALES/ RECEIVING EXTERIOR DOOR: NOT USED
2.02 DOUBLE ACTING TRAFFIC IMPACT DOORS:
A. The Contractor shall purchase the Double Acting Traffic Impact Door from Girtman &
Associates in an Inventory Agreement, and shall install the doors and door frame. The
Contractor shall coordinate delivery of these doors and door frame with the following:
GIRTMAN & ASSOCIATES INC. / GIRTMAN TOTAL OPENINGS, LLC.
Contact: Donna Howard e-mail: dhoward @girtman.com
7115 Cockrill Bend Blvd., Nashville TN 37209
Tel. 615 - 350 -6000 FAX 615 - 350 -6686
B. Provide Model No. SCP -8 Double Acting Traffic Impact Doors by Eliason Easy Swing Door
Division, Kalamazoo MI (800- 828 - 3655). No product substitution is permitted. •
1. Door Construction: .032" high pressure decorative laminate on both sides; stainless
steel edge trim and top hardware cover; clear acrylic 9 "x30" vision panels set in black
rubber molding; "easy swing" zinc plated hinges; 18" height by 18 gauge stainless steel
armor plates on both sides.
2. Finish: Custom Color, Wilsonart Color Beige #1530 -60 matte, both sides of door.
2.03 BUILDING SIGNAGE ACCESS DOOR: -
A. Refer to building shell construction drawings.
A. Provide Acudor Series #SF -2000, nominal door size 24 "x24 ", prime coated steel, 16 gauge
door and frame, with piano hinge, by Acudor Products Inc., Cedar Grove NJ (201- 857 - 1800),
at the following locations and with the following additional features:
1. Soffit Access Door (Exterior): Provide with cylinder lock and key.
PETCO South Tigard, OR SPECIAL DOORS
08300 - 121611 08300 -
2. Ceiling Access Door (Interior): NOT USED
A. Acceptable alternative: Cesco Products (888- 422 -3726; www.cescoproducts.com).
B. Finish: The Contractor shall paint the Building Signage Access Door to match adjacent finish
surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. NOT USED
B. The Double Acting Traffic Impact Door at Pre -Sales shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions and as otherwise detailed on the drawings.
C. The Building Signage Access Door shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions and as otherwise detailed on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR SPECIAL DOORS
08300 - 121611 08300 -2
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS & STOREFRONT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, the term
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide exterior Aluminum Storefront; interior windows aluminum
channel glazing frames; interior aluminum swing doors; interior aluminum manual sliding door;
interior and exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Units with Transoms, and exterior and interior
aluminum door hardware where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as needed
for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 08710 - Finish Hardware for Aluminum Door door finish hardware that
shall be provided by the Contractor's selected hardware supplier. Some, but not all, Aluminum Door
Finish Hardware will be furnished by a PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor. The Contractor shall
install all door finish hardware except where specifically noted to be installed by PETCO.
1.04 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE TEST PROTOCOLS FOR HIGH VELOCITY HURRICANE ZONES:
NOT USED
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Exterior Storefront Shop Drawings and Exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Unit(s)
Product Data are NOT subject to (PETCO's) Architect's review.
B. Interior Storefront Shop Drawings/ Product Data: Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data
per Section 01340 - Submittals, showing the dimensions of work to be fabricated; type, size
and spacing of fasteners; material thickness, painted finish type and finish Colors; and the
interface of this work with adjacent trades.
1. Engineer's Certification: If specifically required by the local jurisdiction, aluminum
storefront shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional
engineer licensed to practice in the State of Oregon, as a certification that the
aluminum storefront has been engineered by either the manufacturer or the
manufacturer's engineer /agent to meet the more stringent of either the Building Code
or local wind load requirements for exterior aluminum storefront.
2. Interior Automatic Sliding Entrance Door/ Transom Unit(s) Product Data: The
Contractor shall submit Product Data per Section 01340 - Submittals, in sufficient detail,
showing the dimensions of work; type, size and spacing of fasteners; material
thickness, finish Colors; and the interface of this work with adjacent trades.
3. Interior Manual Sliding Aluminum Door Unit Product Data: The Contractor shall submit
Product Data per Section 01340 - Submittals, in sufficient detail, showing the
dimensions of work; material thickness, finish Color; and the interface of this work with
adjacent trades.
C. NOT USED
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. NOT USED
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
PETCO South Tigard, OR DOORS & STOREFRONT
08410 - 121611 08410 -1
B. Storefront Structural Engineering: The Contractor and storefront manufacturer shall be
responsible for providing an engineered storefront system which meets the most stringent of
either the pertinent Model Building Code or local wind load requirements for interior storefront
at the Vestibule which may be subject to exterior wind load requirements. The Contractor and
storefront manufacturer shall provide all integral vertical and horizontal structural
reinforcements as may be required, but may not be specifically shown on the drawings, as a
part of the manufacturer - engineered storefront system, to meet applicable model code and
local wind load requirements.
C. Interior Manual Operation Aluminum Doors with glass lites shall be provided with a 10"
bottom door rail.
D. Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Units shall be manufactured and installed per ANSI
A156.10 for power operated pedestrian doors.
E. The Contractor shall provide inspection and certification of the installed Automatic Sliding
Entrance Doors by an AAADM - certified inspector as further specified in this Section.
1.07 WARRANTY:
A. Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors/ ANSI 156.10 Compliance: The Contractor shall include a
copy of a completed "American Association of Door Manufacturer (AAADM) Inspection
Form ", as proof of the installed automatic door unit(s) compliance with ANSI 156.10
standards, in the Building Maintenance Manual submitted to PETCO per Section 01700 -
Contract Closeout. The Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Unit(s) shall be inspected and the
AAADM Inspection Form shall be signed by an AAADM- certified inspector before either
placing the automatic doors in operation, or prior to the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to
PETCO, whichever is earlier.
B. Aluminum Entrance Doors and Storefront Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall
provide the manufacturer's aluminum storefront and entrance door warranty to replace work
of this Section that fails due to defective materials or workmanship within three (3) years from
the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO.
C. Aluminum Storefront Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
D. Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Units Product Warranty: The Contractor shall provide the
manufacturer's standard Three Year product warranty.
E. Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Units Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT & MANUAL ALUMINUM SWING DOORS (EXTERIOR AND
INTERIOR):
A. Aluminum Storefront and Doors shall be equal to products by Kawneer Company Inc.,
Bloomsburg PA.
1. Unless otherwise accepted by the PETCO Project Manager, acceptable alternative
manufacturers are limited to the following:
a. Leed Himmel Industries Inc., Hamden CT (203- 248 - 2886).
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
PETCO South Tigard, OR DOORS & STOREFRONT
08410- 121611 08410 -2
b. Tubelite Architectural Systems, Reed City MI (616- 832 - 2211).
c. United States Aluminum Corporation, Waxahachie TX (214- 937 - 9651).
d. Vistawall Architectural Products, Terrell TX (972- 551 - 6100).
2. Interior Storefront: Typical Aluminum Section 4 -1/2" x 1 -3/4" to receive 1/4" nominal
single pane glass. Finish Type and Color shall be per the Color Schedule in this
Section.
3. Exterior Storefront: Typical Aluminum Section 4 -1/2" x 2" to receive 1" nominal
insulating glass with other aluminum extrusion profiles where shown on the drawings.
Finish Type and Color shall be per the Color Schedule in this Section.
B. Acceptable Aluminum Storefront and Doors:
Manufacturer Thermal Non - Thermal Entrance Doors
Kawneer 451T Trifab II 450 190 Series Narrow Stile
Leed Himmel Series 4500 -T Series 1500 Series AB Narrow Stile
Tubelite 14000 -T Series 4500 Series D -36 Narrow Stile
U.S. Aluminum Series IT451 Series 450 -S #250 Narrow Stile
Vistawall Series 3000 -S Series 2000 Series 212 Narrow Stile
•
C. Aluminum Manual Operation Entrance Doors:
1. Provide 10" bottom door rail.
•
2. Single Acting Door:
a. Door Stile Face Shape: Beveled.
b. Offset Pivot Hinges: Clear Anodized Finish.
c. Push/ Pull Hardware: 1" tubular horizontal Push Bar and vertical Pull Bar, Clear
Anodized Finish.
3. Pair of Single Acting Doors:
a. Door Stile Face Shape: Radiused.
b. Offset Pivot Hinges: Clear Anodized Finish.
c. Push/ Pull Hardware: 1" tubular horizontal Push Bar and vertical Pull Bar, Clear
Anodized Finish.
d. Flushbolts: Top and Bottom of inactive door leaf, Clear Anodized Finish.
4. Double Acting Door:
a. Door Stile Face Shape: Radiused.
b. Double Acting Hinges: Refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
c. Push/ Pull Hardware: 1" tubular horizontal Push Bar on both sides of double
acting doors, Clear Anodized Finish.
d. Bottom Pivot: Center acting.
2.02 INTERIOR ALUMINUM MANUAL SLIDING DOOR: NOT USED
2.03 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOOR UNITS:
A. The Contractor shall purchase and install Gyro Tech Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Units
with Transoms, from NABCO Entrances Inc. via an Inventory Agreement. The Contractor
shall coordinate delivery of Door Units with Transoms, to the jobsite, with:
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
PETCO South Tigard, OR DOORS & STOREFRONT
08410- 121611 08410 -3
NABCO ENTRANCES INC. •
Contact: Laura Eidler, National Accounts Coordinator
e -mail: leidler @nabcoentrances.com
Tel. 262- 682 -5794 FAX 262- 679 -3319
No product substitutions are permitted.
B. Finish:
1. The Interior Sliding Entrance Door Unit and Transom shall be Clear Anodized Finish.
2. Exterior Automatic The Sliding Entrance Door Unit and Transom's finish/ color shall be
Clear Anodized Finish shall match the building shell's exterior storefront finish/ color.
C. Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Units with Transoms:
Drawing Mark Stationary (0) Gyro Tech Unit
Stationary w/ Breakout (SO) Designation
Operating (SX)
• AU -1 (Exterior) O- SX -SX -O GT1175 Bi -Part "Whisper"
14' -0" unit Slider, fixed sidelites
AU -2 (Interior) O- SX -SX -O GT1175 Bi -Part "Whisper"
14' -0" unit Slider, fixed sidelites
•
1. Automatic Door Actuator: Provide Operator and Header, with Motion and Presence
Detectors.
2. Control Switch: Provide five - position control switch (i.e. off - exit - automatic - reduced
opening -hold open). Control Switch must be located on the "Vestibule" side for the
exterior automatic sliding entrance door unit.
3. Locking: Provide two -point locking latch bolt, mortise cylinder with interior -side thumb
turn, and 7 -pin interchangeable construction core (Vestibule -side for interior door units,
exterior side of exterior door unit). Refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware for balance
of door finish hardware to be provided by the Contractor.
4. Threshold: Provided by the automatic sliding entrance door manufacturer, one piece,
ADA- compliant, 1:2 maximum slope, surface mounted saddle threshold, located at the
door opening.
5. Glazing: The Contractor shall provide 1/4" non - insulated glazing for doors, sidelite and
transom units per Section 08800 - Glazing.
2.04 ALUMINUM BRAKE METAL: Provide .063" Brake Metal, with factory- finished color as scheduled in
this Section to match adjacent aluminum storefront, as detailed on the Drawings, and as required
for a complete installation.
• 2.05 SAFETY RAIL AT INTERIOR SIDE OF EXTERIOR STOREFRONT:
A. Provide Safety Rail system mounted to the interior face of exterior storefront, when the
exterior storefront's horizontal aluminum framing mullion is not located between 21" and 34"
height above the finish floor.
1. Rail: Provide equal to Kawneer #104 -060, 6" H. x 1.25" W.
2. The Safety Rail shall receive Wall Bumper trim as specified in Section 10300.
2.06 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT, SWING DOOR, SLIDING DOOR COLOR SCHEDULE:
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
PETCO South Tigard, OR DOORS & STOREFRONT
08410- 121611 08410 -4
Description (Location) Finish Type /Finish Color
Building Exterior (Exterior Storefront, Contractor shall verify with the Building Shell
Exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Door drawings; the exterior automatic sliding entrance
Unit with Transom) door unit finish / color shall match the building
shell's exterior storefront finish/ color.
Building Interior (Safety Rail, if req'd) To match the exterior storefront finish/ color
Building Interior (Vestibule) Clear Anodized
Building Interior (all other) Clear Anodized or Satin Anodized •
Brake Metal Color to match adjacent aluminum color, as
scheduled
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided; shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work; and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide a bituminous paint/ zinc chromate or similar separation material where aluminum is
in contact with steel or other dissimilar material.
B. Install brake metal closures, with concealed fasteners wherever possible, for complete
finished appearance. Vertical brake metal shall be continuous, without horizontal joints.
C. Manual Door Adjustment: 8.5 ft-lbs (exterior), 5.0 ft-lbs (interior) maximum opening force.
D. Miscellaneous Warning Signs: Provide applied safety decals as required for code compliance
for the Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors and as specified per Section 10300- PETCO-
Furnished & Contractor - Provided Items.
END OF SECTION
•
•
ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
PETCO South Tigard, OR DOORS & STOREFRONT
08410- 121611 08410 -5
•
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall purchase Door Finish Hardware from the PETCO Inventory Agreement
Vendor as shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as required for a
complete installation, except where finish hardware items may be specifically noted to be
provided by PETCO or others.
B. Some parts of the door finish hardware for aluminum entrance doors shall be furnished by
the aluminum door supplier, including typically:
1. Aluminum Door Hinges or Pivots.
2. Aluminum Door Pulls and Push Bars.
3. Aluminum Door flush bolts at pairs of doors.
4. Aluminum Door Closers and closer accessories (surface and overhead concealed)
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 08100- Metal Doors & Frames; interior metal doors & frames shall be purchased
from the same Inventory Agreement supplier as the Door Finish Hardware specified in this
Section. Exterior Metal Doors and Frames may also be purchased from this Inventory
Agreement supplier.
B. Section 08410- Aluminum Entrance Doors & Storefront; some door finish hardware may be
furnished by the aluminum door manufacturer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Finish Hardware Schedule/ List: Submit finish hardware schedule/ list.
B. Finish Hardware Product Data: Submit product data for all finish hardware items, with the
specified finish hardware clearly identified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOOR FINISH HARDWARE (INVENTORY AGREEMENT): The Contractor shall purchase Door
Finish Hardware from the PETCO Vendor via an Inventory Agreement, and shall install Door Finish
Hardware. The Contractor shall coordinate purchase and delivery of Door Finish Hardware with:
GIRTMAN & ASSOCIATES INC. / GIRTMAN TOTAL OPENINGS, LLC.
Contact: Donna Howard e-mail: dhoward @girtman.com
7115 Cockrill Bend Blvd., Nashville TN 37209
Tel. 615 - 350 -6000 FAX 615 - 350 -6686
No product substitutions or alternative suppliers are permitted.
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710- 121611 08710 -1
2.02 DOOR FINISH HARDWARE NOTES:
A. Except as may be specified otherwise, finishes shall be as follows:
Typical Finish Hardware Item US, BHMA, other Finish Description
Hinges (interior), Cylinder, Thumbturn, Deadlock, 626, US26D Satin Chromium Plated
Interchangeable Store Core, Leverset, Door
Push Plates, Door Pulls
Hinges (exterior), Kickplate, Armor Plate 32D Satin Stainless Steel
Silencer other Gray rubber
Threshold, Weatherstripping other Mill Finish Aluminum
B. Accessibility Compliance: Leversets and door thresholds shall be provided to meet
Americans with Disabilities Act standards.
2.03 DOOR HARDWARE, ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers (with Key Abbreviations Used in Finish Hardware Schedule):
1. AR Adams Rite Manufacturing Co., City of Industry CA (310- 699 - 0511).
2. BE Best Lock Corporation, Indianapolis IN (317- 849 - 2250).
3. HA Hager Hinge Co., St. Louis MO (800- 325 - 9995).
4. IV HB Ives, New Haven CT.
5. GS Girtman & Associates' Supplier.
6. KA Kaba Ilco Corp., Winston Salem, NC 27105 (800- 849 -8324)
7. LC LCN Closers, Princeton IL (800- 526 - 2400).
8. NO Norton Door Control, Charlotte NC (704- 283 - 2101).
9. PE Pemko, Ventura CA (805- 642 - 2600).
10. RD Rudolph Desco Company Inc., Englewood Cliffs NJ (www.desco - group.com).
11. RX Rixson Specialty Door Controls, Monroe NC (800- 457 -5670; www.rixson.com)
12. SC Schlage Lock Company, San Francisco CA (800- 847 - 1864).
13. TR Trimco /BBW, Los Angeles CA (323- 362 -4191; www.trimcobbw.com).
14. VD Von Duprin (www.vonduprin.com).
15. ZE Zero International Inc., Bronx NY (800- 635 - 5335).
2.04 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Refer to Drawing Sheet A3.1 "Door Schedule" for Hardware Set
Numbers.
•
A. HARDWARE SET NO. 1: AL Automatic Sliding Entrance Door (Vestibule to exterior)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Contractor* 1 AR MS +4002 *Armored Strike
Contractor* 1 AR MS +1890 *Hookbolt Latch/ Lock
Contractor* 1 AR 4036 *Temporary Cylinder
Contractor* 1 AR 4066 *Mortise Turn Knob Cylinder
(at Vestibule side)
Contractor* 1 See Section 08410 *Saddle Threshold 1/2" max height
(1:2 maximum slope)
Girtman 1 SC 80 -103 Mortise Cylinder with Interchangeable
Construction Core (at exterior side)
Girtman 1 SC 80 -035 Interchangeable Store Core
Contractor* 1 TR 7741 BC *Adhesive Sign (1" black letters on
contrasting background) "This Door To
Remain Unlocked When The Building is
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 121611 08710 -2
•
•
I Occupied"
Notes for this Hardware Set:
1. *Indicates door finish hardware that is NOT included in the Petco Inventory
Agreement Vendor (Girtman's) scope. This door finish hardware shall be furnished
by the aluminum door supplier or other Contractor - designated supplier.
2. See Paragraph 3.02 regarding Store Cores and Interchangeable Cores.
3. Adhesive Sign shall be mounted to the header above the automatic sliding
entrance door unit, or as may be otherwise directed by the jurisdiction.
B. HARDWARE SET NO. 2: AL Automatic Sliding Entrance Door (Retail to Vestibule)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Contractor* 1 AR MS1850S *Deadlock
Contractor* 1 AR 4036 *Temporary Cylinder
Contractor* 1 AR 4066 *Mortise Turn Knob Cylinder (at interior
side)
Contractor* 1 See Section 08410 *Saddle Threshold 1/2" max height
(1:2 maximum slope)
Girtman 1 SC 80 -103 Mortise Cylinder w/ Interchangeable
Construction Core (at Vestibule side)
Girtman 1 SC 80 -035 Interchangeable Store Core
Contractor* 1 TR 7741 BC *Adhesive Sign (1" black letters on
•
contrasting background) "This Door To
Remain Unlocked When The Building is
Occupied"
Notes for this Hardware Set:
1. *Indicates door finish hardware that is NOT included in the Petco Inventory
Agreement Vendor (Girtman's) scope. This door finish hardware shall be furnished
by the aluminum door supplier or other Contractor - designated supplier.
2. See Paragraph 3.02 regarding Store Cores and Interchangeable Cores.
3. Adhesive Sign shall be mounted to the header above the automatic sliding
entrance door unit, or as may be otherwise directed by the jurisdiction.
C. HARDWARE SET NO. 3: AL Entrance Door (Retail to Grooming Reception)
And HARDWARE SET NO. 3.1: Grooming Reception to Salon, and Grooming Reception to
Cage Room)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. J Model No. Description
Contractor* 2 See Section 08410 *Offset Pivot Hinges
Contractor* 2 See Section 08410 *Push/ Pull bars
Contractor* 1 MS 1850S *Deadlock
Contractor* 1 LC 1460 -DEL *Parallel Arm Closer w/ adjustable
delayed action and cover (at push side)
Contractor* 1 LC 1460 -18PA *Closer Drop Plate
Contractor* 1 LC 1460 -148 *Closer Soffit Plate
Contractor* 1 HA 520 -SN *Aluminum Saddle Threshold 1/2" x 5" w/
w/ neoprene gasket
Girtman 1 SC 80 -103 Mortise Cylinder w/ Interchangeable
Construction Core (at push side, for
Hardware Set 3 ONLY)
Girtman 1 SC 80 -035 Interchangeable Store Core (at Hardware
Set 3 ONLY)
Girtman 1 SC 7181TK1 x 1 -1/8" Thumbturn (at pull side) (at Hardware Set
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 121611 08710 -3
•
3 ONLY)
Contractor* 1 TR 7741 BC *Adhesive Sign (1" black letters on
contrasting background) "This Door To
Remain Unlocked When The Building is
Occupied" on Grooming Reception side
(at Hardware Set 3 ONLY)
Girtman 1 set HA 736S Silicone Weatherstripping (head and
jambs)
Notes for this Hardware Set:
1. *Indicates door finish hardware that is NOT included in the Petco Inventory
Agreement Vendor (Girtman's) scope. This door finish hardware shall be
furnished by the aluminum door supplier or other Contractor - designated supplier.
2. This door is designed to function as a Means of Egress.
3. See Paragraph 3.02 regarding Store Cores and Interchangeable Cores.
4. Adhesive Sign shall be mounted to the header above the door, or as may be
otherwise directed by the jurisdiction.
D. HARDWARE SET NO. 4 AL Entrance Door (interior, double acting, door between Grooming
Salon and Cage Room)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Contractor* 1 LC 6030 *Concealed Overhead Closer
Contractor* 1 See Section 08410 *Bottom Pivot
Contractor* 2 See Section 08410 *Push bars (one at each side of door)
Contractor* 1 HA 403S -A *Saddle Threshold 1/4" x 4"
Contractor* 2 - Mfr. Std. *Dummy Cylinder (provided at the
Contractor's option IF the door is pre -
drilled for a cylinder)
Note for this Hardware Set:
1. *Indicates door finish hardware that is NOT included in the Petco Inventory
Agreement Vendor (Girtman's) scope. This door finish hardware shall be furnished
by the aluminum door supplier or other Contractor - designated supplier.
E. HARDWARE SET NO. 5: NOT USED
F. HARDWARE SET NO. 6: HM Interior Door (Office)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 3 GS ECBB1100 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5" x 4.5"
Girtman 1 SC AL8OBD SAT Storeroom Lever Lock (F86) w/
Interchangeable Construction Core
Girtman 1 SC 80 -035 Interchangeable Store Core
Girtman 1 LC 4031 Closer w/ adjustable delayed action and
cover (at "Room" side)
Girtman 1 HA 194S Kickplate 10" x 34" (at non -swing door side)
Girtman 1 HA 403S -A Saddle Threshold 1/4" x 4"
Girtman 1 RD DS -6 Security Door Viewer
Girtman 1 HA 267S Door Stop (floor mounted)
Girtman 3 HA 307D Silencers
Note for this Hardware Set:
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 121611 08710 -4
1. See Paragraph 3.02 regarding Store Cores and Interchangeable Cores.
G. HARDWARE SET NO. 7: HM Interior Door (Hallway to Break Room)
And HARDWARE SET NO. 7.1: HM Interior Door (Hallway to Work Room)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. • Description
Girtman 3 GS ECBB1100 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5" x 4.5"
Girtman 1 KA 5021 B WL 26D Programmable Access Control Lockset
with cylinder (for HARDWARE SET No. 7
only)
Girtman 1 SC AL7OBD SAT Classroom Lever Lock (F84) w/
Interchangeable Construction Core
(for HARDWARE SET NO. 7.1 only)
Girtman 1 SC 80 -035 Interchangeable Store Core
Girtman 1 LC 4031 LD /PA Closer w/ adjustable delayed action and
cover (at "Room" side)
Girtman 1 HA 194S 10" x 34" Kickplate (at non -swing door side)
Girtman 1 HA 403S -A Saddle Threshold 1/4" x 4"
Girtman 1 HA 268F Cast Floor Stop and Holder
Girtman 3 HA 307D Silencers
Note for this Hardware Set:
1. See Paragraph 3.02 regarding Store Cores and Interchangeable Cores.
H. HARDWARE SET NO. 8 HM Exterior, Means of Egress Door (located at Retail from Retail to
exterior) (8.1 Hardware set #8 except on storefront door -no security door viewer)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 3 GS ECBB1101 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5 "x4.5 ", Stainless
BB1199 if >42 "x80" Steel w/ Non - Removable Pin
Girtman 1 VD 22E0 Rim Exit Device
Girtman 1 LC 4041 CUSH Closer w/ cover (at interior side)
Girtman 1 HA 520SN Aluminum Saddle Threshold w/ neoprene
gasket
Girtman 1 set HA 862S Weatherstripping
Girtman 1 HA 810SA Door Frame Top Rain Cap
Girtman 1 HA 782S V Door Sill Rain Cap
Girtman 1 RD DS -6 Security Door Viewer
Girtman 1 - - * 1" Red Letters on White Background,
Vinyl Adhesive Sign, text "EMERGENCY
EXIT ONLY —ALARM WILL SOUND"
Notes for this Hardware Set:
1. Vinyl Adhesive Sign to be mounted on center of door, at a height of 60" AFF to
center of sign.
2. This Door's Security Door Viewer to be mounted at a height of 42" AFF to center.
I. HARDWARE SET NO. 9: HM Interior Door (located at Mens and Womens Restrooms)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 3 GS ECBB1100 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5" x 4.5"
Girtman 1 SC AL40S- SAT -626 Privacy Lever Lock (F76)
Girtman 1 LC 4031 Closer w/ cover (at Restroom side)
Girtman 1 HA 194S Kickplate 10" x 34" (at Hallway side)
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710- 121611 08710 -5
Girtman 1 HA 403S -A Saddle Threshold 1/4" x 4"
Girtman 1 HA 268F Cast Floor Stop and Holder
Girtman 3 HA 307D Silencers
J. HARDWARE SET NO. 10: HM Interior Door (Wellness Room to Work Room)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 3 GS ECBB1100 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5" x 4.5"
Girtman 1 SC AL8OBD SAT Storeroom Lever Lock (F86)
w/ Interchangeable Construction Core
Girtman 1 SC 80 -035 Interchangeable Store Core
Girtman 1 LC 4031 H /PA Closer w/ adjustable delayed action
and cover (at "Room" side) Hold Open
Girtman 1 HA 403S -A Saddle Threshold 1/4" x 4"
Girtman 3 HA 307D Silencers
Note for this Hardware Set:
1. See Paragraph 3.02 regarding Store Cores and Interchangeable Cores.
K. HARDWARE SET NO. 11: NOT USED
L. HARDWARE SET NO. 12: Double Acting Doors (interior, located from Retail to Pre - Sales):
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 1 HA 676S Aluminum Plate 1/8" x 3" x 72
(1/8" single edge bevel, no flutes)
M. HARDWARE SET NO. 13: HM Exterior Door (located at Pre - Sales)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 3 GS ECBB1101 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5 "x4.5 ", Stainless
BB1199 if >42 "x80" Steel w/ Non - Removable Pin
Girtman 1 VD 22E0 Rim Exit Device
Girtman 1 LC 4041 CUSH Closer w/ cover (at Pre -Sales side)
Girtman 1 HA 194S Armorplate 30" x 34" (at Pre -Sales side)
Girtman 1 HA 520SN Aluminum Saddle Threshold 1/2 "x5" w/
neoprene gasket
Girtman 1 set HA 862S Weatherstripping, mill finish
(2 x 84 "; 1 x 36 ")
Girtman 1 HA 810SA Door Frame Top Rain Cap
Girtman 1 HA 782S V Door Sill Rain Cap
Girtman 1 RD DS -6 Security Door Viewer
Note for this Hardware Set:
1. This Door's Security Door Viewer to be mounted at a height of 60" AFF to center.
N. HARDWARE SET NO. 14: NOT USED
O. BIRD HABITAT DOOR HARDWARE: (if applicable)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 1 SC 80 -037 Interchangeable Store Core
Note for Bird Habitat Door Hardware:
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710- 121611 08710 -6
1. A Leverset with Interchangeable Construction Core is furnished with the Bird
• Habitat Kit, and shall be installed by the Contractor in conjunction with the balance
of the Bird Habitat Kit assembly.
•
P. TRASH ENCLOSURE GATE HARDWARE: NOT USED
HARDWARE SET NO. 11: (Pair of Exterior Doors, one active means of egress door leaf, one
inactive door leaf, no dividing mullion)
Furn. By Quan. Mfr. Model No. Description
Girtman 6 GS ECBB1101 Full Mortise Hinge 4.5 "x4.5 ", Stainless
Steel w/ Non - Removable Pin
Girtman 1 VD 22E0 Rim Exit Device (active door leaf)
Girtman 2 HA 275D Surface bolts 8" (inactive door leaf, 1
at top, to door frame head; and 1 at
bottom, to floor strike)
Girtman 1 PE 357SP w /S88 Security Astragal with thru -bolts
Girtman 1 HA 297D Coordinator
Girtman 1 LC 4041 CUSH Closer w/ cover (active door leaf)
Girtman 2 HA 194S Armorplate 12" x 34" (at interior side)
Girtman 1 HA 520SN Aluminum Saddle Threshold
1/2 "x5 "x72" w/ neoprene gasket
Girtman 1 set HA 862S Weatherstripping, mill finish
(2 x 84 "; 1 x 72 ")
Girtman 1 HA 810SA Door Frame Top Rain Cap x76"
Girtman 2 HA 770SAV Door Sill Rain Cap
Girtman 1 RD DS -6 Security Door Viewer
(active door leaf)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 RENOVATION WORK:
A. Where existing interior or exterior doors are scheduled for re -use, the Contractor may
refurbish existing door finish hardware to provide the same function, features and applicable
building code compliance as if the door finish hardware is provided new, except as may be
specifically noted in the Finish Hardware Schedule, or as otherwise directed by the PETCO
Project Manager.
B. All existing doors scheduled for reuse shall be fitted with new Latchsets, Leversets or Mortise
Cylinders with new Interchangeable Cores, and all retrofit installations shall be consistent
with the PETCO door finish hardware and keying criteria established in this Section.
3.02 GENERAL:
A. Door Closers: Adjust aluminum and hollow metal Door Closer operation, so that from a 90
•
degree open position, the time required to move the door to an open position of 12 degrees
(via the door's closing action) is 5 seconds minimum.
B. Store Cores: Where an Interchangeable Store Core is specified, the Contractor shall provide
the interchangeable construction core. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall
leave the interchangeable construction core in place. The Interchangeable Store Cores shall
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
0871 0 - 121611 08710 -7
be purchased by the Contractor from the PETCO Vendor, along with the balance of the finish
hardware specified in this Section, but the Interchangeable Store Cores will be furnished by
the PETCO Vendor directly to PETCO. The interchangeable Store Cores will be installed by
PETCO to replace the interchangeable construction cores. PETCO might, but is not obligated
to, return the interchangeable construction cores to the Contractor.
C. Door Rain Hood: Install with galvanized or stainless steel masonry expansion anchors;
provide sealant as a closure between edge of door rain hood and exterior building masonry.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 121611 08710 -8
•
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord's Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 -
Summary of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide glazing and glazing accessories, where shown on the drawings,
as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1. Glazing at Automatic Sliding Entrance Door/ Sidelite Units.
2. Glazing at Exterior Storefront and Swinging Aluminum Doors.
3. Glazing at Interior Windows and Interior Aluminum Door Lites.
4. NOT USED
5. NOT USED
6. Transparent Mirror at interior glazing, where shown on the drawings.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 08410- Aluminum Entrance Doors & Storefront for special exterior
glazing to be provided as part of a Florida Building Code - approved product.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction .documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.05 WARRANTY:
A. The Contractor shall include the Glazing Manufacturer's Two (2) Year Warranty against
defects on all glass products in the Building Maintenance Manuals per Section 01700 -
Contract Closeout.
B. Installer's Warranty: The Contractor shall provide of the glazing installer's warranty for all
work, for a term of 1 year after the Date of Substantial Completion, in the Building
Maintenance Manuals per Section 01700- Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VISION GLASS:
A. General: Provide the glass type and thickness shown on the drawings or specified in this
Section.
B. Tempered Glass: All tempered glass provided must comply with Fed. Spec. DD -G -1403 and
ANSI Z97.1 and bear the appropriate permanent labels EXCEPT where temporary labels are
specifically allowable by applicable code or allowable by the jurisdiction.
1. General: Provide the glass type and thickness shown on the drawings or specified in
this Section.
2. Provide 1/4 -inch thickness Tempered Glass.
3. Insulating Glass Units (Exterior Storefront): Type G, SIGMA No. 64 -7 -2 double pane
Clear Glass; outer pane 1/4 inch; inner pane 1/4 inch; and total unit thickness 1 inch.
PETCO South Tigard, OR GLAZING
08800 - 121611 08800 -1
Clear insulating units shall have a maximum shading coefficient of 0.80 or less.
Provide tempered insulated glazing where shown on the Drawings.
C. Wire Glass: Provide Type III, Class 1, Kind A, Form 1, with pattern M3 wire mesh, 1/4 inch
thickness. (fire rated door assemblies, if applicable)
2.02 EXTERIOR OPAQUE WINDOW FILM: NOT USED
2.02 SPANDREL GLASS (BUILDING EXTERIOR): NOT USED
2.03 TRANSPARENT MIRROR (CAGE ROOM DOORS):
A. Provide Transparent Mirror (One -Way Glass) at the Grooming Reception -to -Cage Room
door, and at the Grooming Salon -to -Cage Room door, equal to Pilkington Mirropane E.P.,
with reflective mirror coating facing towards the Grooming Salon side (at door to Grooming
Salon) and at the Grooming Reception side (at door to Cage Room).
1. Nominal Thickness 1/4 ".
2. Glass Substrate: Pilkington Optifloat Grey Tinted glass.
3. Visible Transmittance: 12 %.
4. Visible Reflectance: 60 %.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION: In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of the local
• jurisdiction, the Contractor shall comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Flat Glass
Marketing Association's "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual ", and "Glazing Manual ".
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR GLAZING
08800 - 121611 08800 -2
SECTION 09260
•
GYPSUM WALLBOARD & PARTITION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: Provide light gauge metal studs and accessories, and gypsum wallboard (cement
board where scheduled), accessories and gypsum wallboard finishing as indicated on the drawings,
as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 05400- Cold Formed Metal Framing.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide gypsum wallboard finish work consistent with the standards. as established by
Gypsum Association specification number GA- 214 -90 "Levels of Gypsum Board Finish ".
B. Ambient Temperature for Finishing: Gypsum wallboard finishing work shall be • provided
ONLY when the ambient controlled air temperature is no less than 50 degrees F and rising.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL STUDS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Metal Studs: Provide metal framing studs equal to products by Dietrich Metal Framing,
Pittsburgh PA (412- 281 -2805; www.dietrichmetalframing.com).
1. Acceptable Alternative: Marino -Ware, South Plainfield NJ (800- 627 -4661;
www.marinoware.com).
2. Acceptable Alternative: Unimast Incorporated, Schiller Park IL
(www.unimast.com).
B. Provide standard punched steel studs, dip galvanized, per Fed. Spec. QQ -S -698 and Fed.
Spec. QQ- S -775d, Class D, sized in accordance with the field conditions, partition type
scheduled and limiting heights for non - structural composite and non - composite tables
provided by the manufacturers and as summarized in the table in this Section.
1. Furring shall be 20 gauge, 7/8" hat sections.
2. Bottom Track: Provide dip galvanized steel bottom track, same gauge as the partition
framing.
3. Accessories: Provide all accessories such as tracks, clips, anchors, fastening devices,
sound attenuation pencil rods and resilient clips, and other required accessories.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PARTITION SYSTEM
09260 - 121611 09260 -1
•
Nonstructural Unbraced Partition Framing Limiting Heights (Composite and Non - Composite)
Deflection Limit 1/240; Uniform 5 PSF Lateral Load
Framing Type Manufacturer! See See See
SSMA Reference Note 1 Note 2 Note 3
2 -1/2" x 20 GA at 16 "OC Dietrich 250S125 -27 12' -1" No listing No listing
Marino -Ware 212DWS20 12' -1" 11' -7" 11' -7"
Unimast 212ST 13' -10" 13' -0" 13' -0"
2 -1/2" x 25 GA at 16 "OC Dietrich 250S125 -18 11' -3" No listing No listing
Marino -Ware 212DWS25 11' -3" 9' -6" 9' -6"
Unimast 212ST 12' -6" 11' -0" 11' -
3 -5/8" x 20 GA at 16 "OC Dietrich 362S125 -27 15' -8" No listing No listing
Marino -Ware 358DWS20 15' -8" 15' -0" 15' -0"
Unimast 358ST 17' -11" 17' -3" 17' -3"
3 -5/8" x 25 GA at 16 "OC Dietrich 362S125 -18 14' -4" No listing No listing
Marino -Ware 358DWS25 14' -4" 14' -6" 14' -6"
Unimast 358ST 16' -0" 14' -6" 14' -6"
6" x 20 GA at 16 "OC Dietrich 600S125 -27 23' -2" No listing No listing
Marino -Ware 6DWS20 23' -2" 23' -1" 23' -1"
Unimast 600ST 26' -1" 25' -6" 25' -6"
6" x 25 GA at 16 "OC Dietrich 600S125 -18 19' -9" No listing No listing
Marino -Ware 6DWS25 19' -9" n.a. n.a.
Unimast 600ST 20' -0" 20' -0" 20' -0"
"Note 1" Partition with Gypsum Wallboard on both sides ( "Composite ")
"Note 2" Partition with Gypsum Wallboard full height on one side, partial height
Gypsum Wallboard on the other side ( "Non- Composite ")
"Note 3" Furred Partition with Gypsum Wallboard on one side ( "Non- Composite ")
2.02 DEFLECTION TRACK METAL FRAMING:
A. Deflection Partition (single or double track system):
1. Secure jamb studs and /or king studs to the deflection runner while allowing for
deflection, by using 20 gauge slip clips on each side of jamb stud/ King stud legs, using
pre- manufactured clips equal to "Slip Clip" product, by Fire Trak Corp., Kimball MN
(800- 394 - 9875).
a. Acceptable alternative: Provide VertiClip SL slide clip, by The Steel Network,
Raleigh NC (919- 845 - 1025).
b. Acceptable alternative: Provide SliptrackSystems, slotted deflection track for
interior walls, by Dietrich Metal Framing, Pittsburgh PA (412- 281 -2805;
www.dietrichmetalfram ing.com ).
c. Acceptable alternative: Other product, subject to substitution - submittal review by
the Architect per Section 01340 requirements.
2. Provide spaced metal roof deck securing plates as shown on the drawings, when the
partition and Deep Leg Track run perpendicular to the metal deck flutes.
2.03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD:
A. Interior Gypsum Wallboard (Drawing Key Symbol "GYP." or standard abbreviation "GYP.
BD. "), where scheduled on the drawings):
1. Provide gypsum wallboard complying with ASTM C36 and Fed. Spec. SS- L -30D, in 48"
widths and in such lengths as will result in a minimum of joints.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PARTITION SYSTEM
09260- 121611 09260 -2
2. Regular Wallboard: Provide Type III, Grade R, Class 1, 5/8" thick.
• 3. Fire - Retardant Wallboard: Provide Type III, Grade X, Class 1, UL listed, 5/8" thick.
4. Acceptable product/ manufacturers:
a. Sheetrock products, by USG, Chicago IL (800- 950 -3839; www.usg.com).
b. Gyproc products, by Domtar Gypsum, Ann Arbor MI (800- 366- 8271).
c. G -P Gypsum products, by Georgia- Pacific, Atlanta GA (404- 652 - 4000).
d. Gold Bond Gypsum products, by National Gypsum Company, Charlotte NC
(704- 365- 7300).
e. Gypsum products by Temple- Inland, Diboll TX (409- 829 - 1220).
f. No other product manufacturers are permitted.
B. Interior Moisture - Resistant Gypsum Wallboard (Drawing Key Symbol "M.R. GYP." where
scheduled on the drawings):
1. Provide mold- and moisture - resistant gypsum wallboard at walls and ceiling, equal to
the following product/ manufacturers:
a. "Sheetrock Water- Resistant 5/8" Regular Gypsum Panels ", by United States
Gypsum Company, Chicago IL.
b. 5/8" XP Fire - Shield Wallboard, by National Gypsum Company, Charlotte NC.
C. Exterior Sheathing for EIFS substrate: Provide Dens -Glass Gold, Glass Mat Faced Exterior
Sheathing by G -P Gypsum Corporation, subject to acceptance by the EIFS manufacturer as
part of the warranted EIFS system. Paper -faced exterior gypsum sheathing is NOT an
acceptable product substitution.
2.04 CEMENT BOARD SYSTEM:
A. Interior Cement Board (Drawing Key Symbol "CEM. BD. ", where scheduled on the drawings):
1. Provide Dens - Shield, 1/2" tile backer, by Georgia- Pacific.
2. Acceptable Alternative: Provide Durock, 1/2" cement board, and related components,
including Durock corrosion resistant screws and Durock Interior Tape, by USG.
3. Acceptable Alternative: Provide HardiBacker 500, 1/2" thick, fiber - cement interior
ceramic tile underlayment, by James Hardie Building Products Inc., Mission Viejo CA
(800- 942 - 7343).
2.05 METAL TRIM:
A. Form from zinc coated steel not lighter than 26 gauge, complying with Fed. Spec. QQ -S -775,
Type I, Class D or E.
B. Casing Beads: Provide galvanized steel channel- shaped casing beads at exposed wallboard
edges, equal to USG Series No. 200, at locations including but not limited to horizontal edges
at top of partial height partitions, and vertical and horizontal edges where gypsum wallboard
abuts other materials.
C. Corner Beads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 7/8" wide and perforated for
nailing and joint treatment, equal to USG Dur -A -Bead corner bead.
D. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings:
1. Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 3/4" wide.
2. Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing, and exposed wing edge folded flat.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PARTITION SYSTEM
09260 - 121611 09260 -3
E. Control Joints: Provide staple - applied roll- formed zinc control joints equal to USG Control
Joint No. 093 where shown on the drawings. Provide flush caulk bead to fill 1/4" open slot
after protective tape is removed after adjacent wallboard finishing.
2.06 JOINT SYSTEM: Provide a jointing system, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as
a system to be used together and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum
wallboard approved for use on this work. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so
recommended by its manufacturer.
•
2.07 FASTENING DEVICES: •
A. Metal Framing Floor Tracks: For fastening wall framing floor tracks to concrete floors/ slab on
grade construction, provide powder- driven fasteners equal to HILT! X -DWI, 3/4" Dome Head
Nail, Smooth Shank 0.145" diameter Shot Pins spaced 32" on center maximum, meeting the
standards of ICBO Evaluation Report No. 2388 (ICBO Evaluation Service Inc., Whittier CA).
B. Gypsum Wallboard: For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on metal studs and metal
channels, use flat -head screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power- driven
tools, not less than 1" long, with self tapping threads and self drilling points.
C. Cement Board: For fastening Cement Board in place on metal studs and metal channels, use
corrosion resistant, wafer -head screws manufactured specifically for this product installation,
not less than 1" long, with self tapping threads and self drilling points.
2.08 FLOOR RUNNER GROUT: Provide commercial grout for leveling the floor runner member of steel
stud partitions as required.
2.09 OTHER METAL TRIM: The drawings do not represent locations and requirements for all metal
trims. The Contractor shall carefully review the drawings and the installation, and shall provide
metal trims as typically recommended.
2.10 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation of the work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION: Provide Metal Framing Installation tolerance of 1:200
horizontally and 1:360 vertically.
3.03 CEMENT BOARD INSTALLATION: Provide a polyethylene sheet, 6 mil minimum thickness, water
barrier membrane tape- secured to metal framing behind and prior to the cement board installation.
3.04 CONTROL JOINT SPACING:
Provide Control Joint Spacing in accordance with current Gypsum Association standards or as
follows for gypsum construction:
Construction & Location Maximum Single Maximum Single Area,
Dimension, Feet Square Feet
Interior Partition 30 ft -
Interior Ceiling, w/ perimeter relief 50 ft 2500 SF
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PARTITION SYSTEM
09260 - 121611 09260 -4
•
Interior Ceiling, w/o perimeter relief 30 ft 900 SF
Exterior Ceiling 30 ft 600 SF
3.05 GYPSUM WALLBOARD FINISHING COMPOUNDS: Provide a Gypsum Association Level 3
gypsum board finish. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and
two separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and
accessories. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
3.06 WALL TEXTURE: At the Contractor's option, and prior to painting per Section 09900- Painting, the
Contractor may elect to provide, at no additional cost to PETCO, an applied "Light Orange Peel"
texture per USG Bulletin SA -933 (from USG "Texture and Finish Products "). The Contractor shall
apply wall texture uniformly to all exposed wallboard -faced partitions, except that wall texture need
not be applied where a finished (painted) surface is not scheduled.
END OF SECTION
•
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PARTITION SYSTEM
09260 - 121611 09260 -5
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide Interior Ceramic Wall Tile and floor tile where shown on
the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
•
01340- Submittals.
1.03 WARRANTY: The Contractor shall include a copy of the installer's warranty for all work provided,
for a term of 1 year after the Date of Substantial Completion, in the Building Maintenance Manual
per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout requirements. (not applicable if Exhibit 8)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CERAMIC WALL TILE:
A. Wall Finish "WF -01" Refer to Section 09720.
B. Ceramic Wall Tile "WF -02" at Grooming Salon wainscot, field tile.
1. Provide products by Dal -Tile Corporation, Dallas TX. Contact Tamara Grandusky 415-
290 -9301, tamara.granduskyt�daltile.com. No product substitution is acceptable.
2. Drawing Key Symbol "WF -02 ": Provide "Colour Scheme ", Color #B904 Uptown Taupe
Solid, size 6" x 6" x 5/16" with 1/4" grout joints.
3. Bullnose Trim: Provide Dal -Tile #P -4669, 6" x 6" x 5/16" bullnose trim and outside
corner bullnose trim #PC -4669, Color #B904 Uptown Taupe Solid, where the field tile
ends without meeting a perpendicular finish surface.
C. Ceramic Wall Tile "WF -03" at Grooming Salon wainscot, accent tile:
1. Provide products by Dal -Tile Corporation, Dallas TX. Contact Tamara Grandusky
415 - 290 -8302, tamara.grandusky(c�daltile.com No product substitution is acceptable.
2. Drawing Key Symbol "WF -03 ": Provide "Colour Scheme ", Color #B907 Galaxy Solid,
size 6" x 6" x 5/16" with 1/4" grout joints.
D. Ceramic Wall Tile "WF -04" at Tub Room Wall Tile:
1. Provide "Semi - Gloss ", Color #100 White, size 6" x 6" x 5/16" or 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4" x 5/16"
with 1/16" joints, by Dal -Tile Corporation, Dallas TX. Contact Tamara Grandusky 415-
290 -8302, tamara.grandusky @daltile.com
2. Bullnose Trim: Provide Dal -Tile bullnose trim #S4669 and outside corner bullnose trim
#SCRL /4669 (size 6" x 6 ") or #S4449 and outside corner bullnose trim #SCRL /4449
(size 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4 ") at the tile -cased door opening(s).
3. Acceptable Field Tile Alternative: Provide Color #25 Ice White Bright, size 4 -1/4" x
PETCO South Tigard, OR CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 121611 09310 -1
•
4 -1/4" by American Olean (215- 822 - 7300). Provide corresponding bullnose trim and
outside corner bullnose trims at the tile -cased door opening(s).
2.02 WALL TILE SETTING MATERIALS:
A. Waterproofing/ Crack Isolation Membrane: Provide a one -part, trowelable, elastomeric
waterproofing, crack isolation membrane equal to RedGard Waterproofing and Crack
Prevention Membrane by Custom Building Products, Seal Beach, CA (800.282.8786)
B. Adhesive Mortar: Provide a one -part, latex- modified mortar equal to FlexBond, Ultra -
Premium Latex - Modified Thin Set Mortar, by Custom Building Products, Seal Beach, CA
(800.282.8786)
C. Wall Grout:
1. Grooming Room/ Grooming Reception Wainscot Wall Tile: Provide 1/4" grout joint
width, with Prism SureColor Tile Grout, www.custombuildingproducts.com. Color shall
be Oyster Gray #386. No product substitution is acceptable.
•
2. Tub Room Wall Tile: Provide 1/16" grout joint width, with Prism Sure Color Tile Grout,
by Custom Building Products, Seal Beach, CA (800.282.8786). Color shall be Bright
White #381.
3. Wall Grout Sealer: Provide wall grout sealer recommended by the tile grout
manufacturer, equal to Aqua Mix Grout Sealer, by Custom Building Products, Seal
Beach, CA (800.282.8786)
2.03 WALL TILE SUBSTRATE: Provide WonderBoard Cement Board, by Custom Building Products,
Seal Beach, CA (800.282.8786) as a wall substrate under ceramic wall tile at the Tub Room.
Provide "Dens- Shield" Moisture Resistant Gypsum Wallboard, by Georgia Pacific, Atlanta, GA
(800.225.6119) where scheduled in the drawings (Finish Schedule) and as specified in Section
09260 - Gypsum Wallboard & Partition System.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation.
2.02 FLOOR TILE (QUARRY TILE): NOT USED
2.03 WALL TILE SUBSTRATE: NOT USED
2.04 QUARRY TILE -TO- VCT FLOOR TRANSITION: NOT USED
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are needed.
3.02 TILE INSTALLATION:
PETCO South Tigard, OR CERAMIC TILE
09310- 121611 09310 -2
A. General: Comply with ANSI A108.1, ANSI A108.2, and the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation" of the Tile Council of America. Maintain minimum temperature limits and
installation practices recommended by the product manufacturers.
B. Environmental Conditions:
1. Tile shall be installed only when moisture - resistant gypsum wallboard tile, adhesive,
and air temperature are above 40 degrees F, and temperature must remain at this
temperature or higher for at least 24 hours after application of tile.
2. Steel framing to receive moisture - resistant gypsum wallboard shall be structurally
sound,-free from bow, and in compliance with local building code 'requirements.
C. Limits of Tile: Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disruption of
pattern or joint alignment.
D. Joint Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on walls are on the
same size. Layout tile work, and center the tile fields both directions on each wall area.
E. Cleaning: Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the work of this Section in
accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR CERAMIC TILE
09310- 121611 09310 -3
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, the term
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: Provide Acoustical Ceiling where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section,
and as needed for a complete and proper installation. If required by the local jurisdiction, provide
supplementary acoustic ceiling installation techniques due to the building location with a Seismic
Zone, in which seismic restraints are required.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Refer to Section 15255 - Seismic Restraints for specification of supplementary
acoustic ceiling installation techniques.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the construction
documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section 01340 - Submittals.
1.05 WARRANTY:
A. The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer's standard ceiling tile warranty for dimensional
stability against sagging, warping, shrinkage, and delamination of the face materials, in the
Building Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Installer's Warranty: The Contractor shall provide the installer's warranty for all work
provided, for a term of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion, in the Building
Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. Comply with the applicable provisions of the following:
1. ASTM C635 -Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings.
2. ASTM C636- Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay -In Panels.
3. ASTM E580- Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraints (if seismic
restraints are required by the local jurisdiction).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 "T" GRID SYSTEMS: Provide systems of supporting members, anchors, wall cornices, adapters for
light fixtures, and grilles, and accessories of every type required for a complete suspended "T" grid
system of the arrangement shown on the drawings, complying with pertinent requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID AND TILE:
A. Provide products by Armstrong Interiors. Contact Monty Gillespie (513- 309 -1495,
vlgillespie @armstrong.com), for Petco's national account pricing and to verify product
availability. No product substitution is acceptable.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ACOUSTICAL CEILING
09510 - 121611 09510 -1
B. Drawing Key Symbol "CF -03" (feature tile, used at Grooming Reception with field tile.CF -08
in same grid):
1. Grid: Armstrong Suprafine 9/16 ", Color White WH.
2. Ceiling Tile: Armstrong Cirrus Themes, Critters S500 Series, 24 "x24 "x3/4" beveled
tegular, Color White.
a. Refer to Drawing Sheet A2.4 for this feature ceiling tiles pattern. There are
different feature tile patterns needed to complete this ceiling's layout.
1. Drawing Key Symbol A: Critters S500 Series, S500.
2. Drawing Key Symbol B: Critters S500 Series, S501.
3. Drawing Key Symbol C: Critters S500 Series, S502.
4. Drawing Key Symbol D: Critters S500 Series, S503.
5. Drawing Key Symbol E: Critters S500 Series, S510.
6. Drawing Key Symbol F: Critters S500 Series, S512.
C. Drawing Key Symbol "CF -04 ": Designer Note: At Non - Prototypical Retail Area Ceiling,
provide for at least 4 feet from each side of a ceiling diffuser; modify Reflected Ceiling Plan
drawing notations for this requirement. "Ceramaguard #605 ", Nonperforated Square Edge
lay -in Ceiling Panels, 24" x 48" x 5/8" (1.4 lbs./ SF), with scrub -able factory- applied plastic
finish, Color White WH.
D. Drawing Key Symbol "CF -06 ":
1. Grid: Armstrong Prelude 15/16 ", Color White WH.
2. Ceiling Tile: Armstrong "Cortege Colortone #769 -WH ", Square Edge lay -in Ceiling
Panels, 24" x 48" x 5/8" (0.6 lbs./ SF), Color White.
E. Drawing Key Symbol "CF -08" (field tile):
1. Grid: Armstrong Suprafine 9/16 ", Color White WH (same grid as CF -03).
2. Ceiling Tile: Armstrong Cirrus Themes, Plain Panel S299, 24 "x24 "x3/4" beveled
tegular, Color White.
•
2.03 CEILING ACCESSORIES:
A. Eggcrate Diffuser at Vestibule: Provide 24" x 48" panel (cut to fit), 1/2" x 1/2" eggcrate
pattern, Color White, by Outwater Plastics Industries Inc., Woodridge NJ (973/ 472 - 3580).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. The Contractor shall provide suspended acoustical ceiling per ASTM C636, ASTM E580 and
pertinent UL design requirements, or per governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Lateral Bracing: Secure lateral bracing to structural members, and at right angles to the
direction of the partition and at four ways in the large ceiling areas.
PETCO South Tigard, OR ACOUSTICAL CEILING
09510 - 121611 09510 -2
C. The Contractor shall provide hold -down clips on ceiling panels within 20 feet of exterior
doors, at Restrooms and the Vestibule, and /or when required by governmental agencies
having jurisdiction.
3.03 CLEANUP: In addition to cleanup requirements specified in other sections, the Contractor shall
completely remove fingerprints and traces of soil from the surfaces of the suspended ceiling tile grid
and acoustical materials, using only cleaning materials recommended for the cleaning purposes by
the manufacturer of the material being cleaned.
END OF SECTION
•
PETCO South Tigard. OR ACOUSTICAL CEILING
09510 - 121611 09510 -3
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide Vinyl Composition Tile, Vinyl Base and related accessory
items where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and
proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 01710- Construction & Final Cleaning, reference for final floor cleaning and waxing.
B. Section 03310- Concrete Floor Preparation.
C. Section 07190- Moisture Mitigation Systems.
D. Section 09660- Resilient Sheet Flooring.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: The Contractor shall provide Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Product
Manager per Section 01340 requirements. This submittal is for the PETCO Project Manager's
records only. No other product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittal
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Flooring Layout:
1. The Contractor shall request a Floor Layout CAD file (prepared in AutoCAD format)
from the Petco Project Manager and the Petco Tenant Improvement Architect, via
e -mail:
jeff.johnson @petco.com
shenriquez @sblm.com
•
The Contractor shall hire and pay for a qualified surveyor to lay out the Retail Area
flooring pattern on site, using the Floor Layout CAD file as the basis for the layout.
The Petco Tenant Improvement Architect should provide the requested CAD file within
two working days of the Contractor's request. The Contractor may provide the
surveyor's e-mail address as an additional recipient of the CAD file.
2. The Architect will provide the most current Flooring Layout information available at the
time of the Contractor's request for the Flooring Layout CAD file. Should a subsequent
Construction Bulletin be issued that impacts the flooring layout, it is the Contractor's
responsibility to request a revised, updated CAD file from the Architect.
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 121611 09650 -1
•
B. Concrete Floor Testing:
1. Moisture Emission Level Test: The Contractor shall provide testing to confirm moisture
vapor emission levels, in accordance with ASTM F 1869.98 "Standard Test Method for
Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride ". This testing must be provided in an enclosed, temperature
controlled building shell approximately 30 days prior to the resilient flooring installation.
a. Maximum Acceptable Moisture Emission Level: Moisture Vapor shall not exceed
5.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
b. Note that the specified "acceptable" emission level for this flooring product may
be different than for other flooring products scheduled.
•
2. Alkali Test: The Contractor shall provide testing for alkalinity before the installation of
resilient flooring, to confirm pH between 5 to 9.
3. Bond Test: The Contractor shall provide a Bond Test as recommended by the flooring
manufacturers, to confirm the compatibility of resilient flooring adhesives to the
concrete floor after removal of old adhesives, curing agents, breaker compounds, dust
inhibitors, oil, grease, paint and other special surface treatments and conditions.
4. Concrete Slab Vapor Control Treatment shall be provided if the Maximum Acceptable
Moisture Emission Level exceeds the limit specified, or if the Alkalinity pH as tested is
above 9.
C. Resilient Flooring Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F 710 -98 "Standard Practice
for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Flooring ". If required due to existing conditions,
Moisture and pH Mitigation shall be provided per Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
D. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile adjacent to the Aquarium Area must be completely installed
prior to the installation of Epoxy Flooring.
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. Moisture Mitigation: If provided, then the Contractor shall provide the Moisture Mitigation: f
System manufacturer's product warranty in the Building Maintenance Manual per Section
01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Flooring: The Contractor shall provide the flooring manufacturer's product warranty in the
Building Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
C. Flooring Adhesive: The Contractor shall provide the flooring adhesive manufacturer's product
warranty in the Building Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
D. Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE:
A. No substitutions to the products specified in this section are acceptable.
B. Where Armstrong Interiors products are specified, contact Lisa Cavataio, Account Manager /
Retail National Accounts (773- 868 -0270; Ivcavataio @armstrong.com) for Petco's national
account pricing and to verify product availability. No product substitution is permitted.
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 121611 09650 -2
C. Where Amtico products are specified, contact Bob Clyburn, National Accounts Manager
(bob.clyburn @amtico.com; Ph. 949 - 201 -5045; for Petco's national pricing and to verify
product availability No product substitution is permitted.
D. Drawing Key Symbol "FC -01A"
1. Provide Armstrong Standard Excelon Imperial Texture, 12" x 12" x 1/8" vinyl
composition tile.
a. Color Buttercream Yellow #51800.
2. Installation pattern: Parquet pattern, with grain direction alternating in adjacent tile
units.
3. Provide final Cleaning and Waxing per Section 01710 - Construction & Final Cleaning.
D Drawing Key Symbol "FC -02A"
1. Provide Armstrong Standard Excelon Imperial Texture, 12" x 12" x 1/8" vinyl
composition tile.
a. Color Curried Caramel #51942.
2. Installation pattern: Parquet pattern, with grain direction alternating in adjacent tile
•
units.
3. Provide final Cleaning and Waxing per Section 01710 - Construction & Final Cleaning.
E. Drawing Key Symbol "FC -03A"
1. Provide Armstrong Standard Excelon Imperial Texture, 12" x 12" x 1/8" vinyl
composition tile
a. Color Camel Beige #51805.
2. Installation pattern: Parquet pattern, with grain direction alternating in adjacent tile
units.
3. Provide final Cleaning and Waxing per Section 01710 - Construction & Final Cleaning.
F. Vinyl Composition Tile (Drawing Key Symbol "FC -07A" :
1. Provide Amtico Spacia, 18" x 18" x 1/8" vinyl composition tile, available from Amtico
International, Atlanta GA.
a. Color: Spacia #S- ST2554 Concrete Putty.
2. Installation pattern: Parquet pattern, with grain direction alternating in adjacent tile units.
3. This product DOES NOT receive final Waxing per Section 01710 - Construction & Final
Cleaning. Provide general "final construction cleaning" only.
G. Flooring Adhesives:
1. Normal Traffic Areas: Provide waterproof and stabilized type adhesive, such as
Armstrong full- spread adhesives S -89, S -515, S -700 or S -750, or as otherwise
recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
2. Wet Areas: Provide Mapei Ultra/ Bond G 19 two -part epoxy adhesive at all VCT -3
located within a minimum of 10 feet of the store's water - filled Aquarium fixtures. For
areas farther than 10 feet from the store's water - filled Aquarium fixtures, the installer
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 121611 09650 -3
may provide the same waterproof and stabilized flooring adhesive as provided for VCT-
1 type adhesive, or as may be alternatively recommended by the flooring
manufacturer.
3. If a Moisture Mitigation product is provided due to existing concrete floor moisture and
pH levels, as specified in Section 07190- Moisture Mitigation Systems, then provide a
compatible flooring adhesive.
2.02 VINYL WALL BASE:
A. Provide products by Johnsonite. Contact Laurie Baatz (800- 899 -8916;
lbaatz@johnsonite.com). No substitution is acceptable.
B. Drawing Key Symbol "WB -01 ":
1. Provide Johnsonite Traditional 1/8" Vinyl coved toe 4" wall base, Color Fawn #80.
2. Wall Base Adhesive: Provide waterproof and stabilized type adhesive as
recommended by the vinyl base manufacturer.
2.03 MOISTURE MITIGATION: If either the measured Moisture Emission Level or the pH Level are
above the flooring adhesive manufacturer's limits, then the Contractor shall provide concrete slab
moisture mitigation treatment per Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide non - staining type Concrete Slab Primer as required and as
recommended by the flooring manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor shall examine the subfloor prior to installation to determine that surfaces are
smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive
bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.
B. The Contractor shall inspect the subfloor prior to installation to determine that surfaces are
free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive
removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. The Contractor
shall visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or
mildew. If there are visible indications of mold and mildew, the source of the problem must
be located and corrected.
C. The Contractor shall verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature,
and relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the product manufacturer. If the
measured Moisture Emission Level and pH Level are above the flooring adhesive
manufacturer's limits, then the Contractor shall provide concrete slab moisture mitigation
treatment per Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
D. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation until any unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions
existing at the time of installation.
3.02 PREPARATION:
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 121611 09650 -4
A. Subfloor: Verify that substrate is smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and with no more
than 1/8" in 10' -0" variation from level. Fill and level cold joints, cracks or depressions with a
flooring manufacturer - accepted cementitious patching compound.
B. Priming: Apply concrete slab primer if so recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer,
and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Broom clean or vacuum the surfaces to be covered. Install materials only after
finishing operations, including painting, have been completed, and after permanent heating
system is operating.
B. For installation of resilient flooring directly over a Moisture Mitigation system, the contractor
shall use a 100% solids adhesive, and/ or contact type adhesives with long working times
that can be applied to substrates with a pH up to 10. The method of use is to apply the
contact type adhesives to the substrate and allow the materials water to flash off prior to the
flooring installation. Test proper adhesion of adhesive to moisture mitigation product prior to
the installation of the entire flooring system.
C. Installing Vinyl Composition Tile:
1. Lay tile units from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so that units at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust as
necessary to avoid cut widths less than 3" wide at room perimeter.
2. Match 'tile units for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in the same sequence
as manufactured and packaged.
3. Pattern: Varies, refer to the specific tile scheduled and described in this Section.
D. Installing Transitions: Install transitions where vinyl tile abuts an exposed concrete floor,
where shown on the drawings, or in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The Vinyl Transition MUST be installed in its final location prior to the epoxy flooring
installation. It is intended that the Vinyl Transition top surface be taped off by the Contractor,
and used as a finishing screed for the subsequently installed epoxy flooring.
E. Installing Vinyl Base: Install Vinyl Base where shown on the drawings, and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.04 CLEANING:
A. Vinyl Composition Tile and Transitions: Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from
exposed surfaces, using a neutral cleaner recommended by the manufacturer. Apply cleaner
and wax products; then buff in accordance with Section 01710 - Construction & Final Cleaning
requirements, immediately prior to the Date of Tenant Space turnover to PETCO. Not all vinyl
flooring is to be waxed; refer to the specific flooring specification in this Section.
B. Vinyl Base: Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using a
neutral cleaner recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
• PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT FLOORING
09650- 121611 09650 -5
SECTION 09660
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide heat welded Resilient Sheet Flooring with Integral Base,
and related accessory items where shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 01710- Construction & Final Cleaning, reference for final floor cleaning and waxing.
B. Section 03310- Concrete Floor Preparation.
C. Section 07190- Moisture Mitigation Systems.
D. Section 09650- Resilient Flooring. Reference this Section for flooring layout procedure,
based on obtaining a flooring layout CADfile from Petco's Tenant Improvement Architect.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: The Contractor shall provide Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Product
Manager per Section 01340 requirements. This submittal is for the PETCO Project Manager's
records only. No other product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Concrete Floor Testing:
1. Moisture Emission Level Test: The Contractor shall provide testing to confirm moisture
vapor emission levels, in accordance with ASTM F 1869.98 "Standard Test Method for
Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride ". This testing must be provided in an enclosed, temperature
controlled building shell approximately 30 days prior to the resilient flooring installation.
a. Maximum Acceptable Moisture Emission Level: Moisture Vapor shall not exceed
5.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
b. Note that the specified "acceptable" emission level for this flooring product may
be different than for other flooring products scheduled.
2. Alkali Test: The Contractor shall provide testing for alkalinity before the installation of
resilient flooring, to confirm acceptable pH between 5 and 9.
3. Bond Test: The Contractor shall provide a Bond Test as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer, to confirm the compatibility of resilient flooring adhesives to the concrete
floor after removal of old adhesives, curing agents, breaker compounds, dust inhibitors,
oil, grease, paint and other special surface treatments and conditions.
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09660 - 121611 09660 -1
4. Concrete Slab Vapor Control Treatment shall be provided if the Maximum Acceptable
Moisture Emission Level exceeds the limit specified, or if the Alkalinity pH as tested is
above 9.
B. Resilient Flooring Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F 710 -98 "Standard Practice
for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Flooring ". If required due to existing conditions,
Moisture and pH Mitigation shall be provided per Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. Moisture Mitigation: If provided, then the Contractor shall provide the Moisture Mitigation:
System manufacturer's product warranty in the Building Maintenance Manual per Section
01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Flooring: The Contractor shall provide the flooring manufacturer's product warranty in the
Building Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
C. Flooring Adhesive: The Contractor shall provide the flooring adhesive manufacturer's product
warranty in the Building Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
D. Installer's Warranty: NOT USED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VINYL SHEET FLOORING:
A. Where Armstrong Interiors products are specified, contact Lisa Cavataio, Account Manager /
Retail National Accounts (773- 868 -0270; Ivcavataio @armstrong.com) for Petco's national
account pricing and to verify product availability. No substitution is acceptable.
B. Drawing Key Symbol "FC -03C"
1. Provide Armstrong Timberline, Color Light Oak #37003, Vinyl Sheet Flooring with
backing.
2. Weld Rod: Provide Armstrong weld rod intended for heat welding of seams.
C. Drawing Key Symbol "FC -06A"
1. Provide Armstrong Connection Corlon, Color #88704 Stone Harbor, Vinyl Sheet
Flooring with backing.
2. Weld Rod: Provide Armstrong weld rod intended for heat welding of seams.
D. Adhesive:
1. Provide Armstrong adhesive #3599.
2. If a Moisture Mitigation product is provided due to existing concrete floor moisture and
pH levels, as specified in Section 07190- Moisture Mitigation Systems, then the
Contractor shall provide a compatible flooring adhesive.
2.02 INTEGRAL WALL BASE (Drawing Key Symbol "WB -06 "): Provide integral flash cove wall base by
extending sheet flooring six (6) inches up the wall using adhesive, and accessories recommended
and approved by the flooring manufacturer.
2.03 ACCESSORIES:
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09660- 121611 09660 -2
A. Top Edge Trim Cap: Provide extruded aluminum cap molding equal to #ALUO214 -S, Color
Clear (satin), 11/16" concealed, 1/4" leg, 7/32" projection from face of wall, sized to receive
3/32" product, 12 foot length, by Outwater Plastics Industries Inc., Bagota NJ (800 -835-
4400, 888 - 688 -9283; www.outwater.com).
B. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, quarry tile,
ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide cement -based underlayment; or cement -based
• patch and skim coat.
C. For sealing joints between the top of integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as
masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Provide a fillet support strip for integral cove base with a minimum radius of 1 in. (2.54 cm)
of wood or plastic.
E. Provide door thresholds as scheduled on the drawings and specified in Section 08710 -
Finish Hardware.
2.04 MOISTURE MITIGATION: If either the measured Moisture Emission Level or the pH Level are
above the flooring adhesive manufacturer's limits, then the Contractor shall provide concrete slab
moisture mitigation treatment per Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor shall examine the subfloor prior to installation to determine that surfaces are
smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive
bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.
B. The Contractor shall inspect the subfloor prior to installation to determine that surfaces are
free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive
removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. The Contractor
shall visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or
mildew.
C. The Contractor shall verify that moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature,
and relative humidity are within the limits recommended by the product manufacturer.
D. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation until any unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions
existing at the time of installation.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling
low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with underlayment, patch and skim
coat as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
B. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives
as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09660- 121611 09660 -3
not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound
manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents.
C. Provide subfloor Calcium Chloride Tests (and Bond Tests) to determine if surfaces are dry;
free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to
receive flooring.
D. Vacuum or broom -clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of
flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF VINYL SHEET FLOORING:
A. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest flooring manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
B. For installation of resilient flooring directly over a Moisture Mitigation product, the contractor
shall use a 100% solids adhesive, and/ or contact type adhesives with long working times
that can be applied to substrates with a pH up to 10. The method of use is to apply the
contact type adhesives to the substrate and allow the materials water to flash off prior to the
flooring installation. Test proper adhesion of adhesive to moisture mitigation product prior to
the installation of the entire flooring system.
C. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor -set cabinets and equipment. Extend
flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings.
D. If required, install flooring on pan -type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and
pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor
around covers and to covers.
• E. Scribe, cut, and fit or flash cove to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes,
outlets, and built -in furniture and cabinets.
F. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll
with a 100 -pound roller in the field areas. Hand -roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams
to assure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer.
G. Lay flooring to provide a minimum number of seams. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and
strips. Match edges for color shading and pattern at the seams in compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching,
open times, and working times.
I. Prepare heat - welded seams with special routing tool supplied for this purpose, and heat weld •
with vinyl welding rods in seams. Use methods and sequence of work in conformance with
written instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush and free from voids,
recesses, and raised areas.
•
J. Provide integral flash cove wall base where scheduled on the drawings, including cove fillet
support strip and Top Edge Trim Cap. Construct flash cove base in accordance with the
flooring manufacturer's instructions. Heat -weld seams with special routing tool supplied for
this purpose, and heat weld with vinyl welding rods in seams.
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09660 - 121611 09660 -4
•
•
3.04 INSTALLATION OF VINYL SHEET FLOORING ACCESSORIES:
A. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or
other similar irregular substrates.
B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended -
by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise
be exposed.
C. Top Edge Trim Cap:
1. Secure Top Edge Trim Cap to wall, with mechanical fasteners at 6 inches on center.
2. Provide concave - tooled white silicone sealant bead at top of Top Edge Trim Cap
against FRP Wall Panel finish.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY SHEET FLOORING: NOT USED
3.06 CLEANING & PROTECTION:
A. The Contractor shall protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer
against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings.
B. The Contractor shall provide cleaning in accordance with Section 01710- Construction &
Final Cleaning requirements.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
09660 - 121611 09660 -5
SECTION 09670
EPDXY FINISH ON CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall provide the Epoxy Finish on Concrete, including integral Epoxy
Cove Base with Top Edge Trim Cap, where scheduled, as specified in this Section, and as needed
for a complete installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 07190- Moisture Mitigation Systems.
B. Section 09650- Resilient Flooring.
1. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile and Transition adjacent to the Aquarium Area must be
completely installed prior to the installation of the Epoxy Flooring.
2. Reference this Section for flooring layout procedure, based on obtaining a flooring
layout CADfile from Petco's Tenant Improvement Architect.
C. Section 09660- Resilient Sheet Flooring. A similar Top Edge Trim Cap is also detailed and
specified for use with Resilient Sheet Flooring.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: The Contractor shall provide Concrete Floor Testing results to the PETCO Product
Manager per Section 01340 requirements. This submittal is for the PETCO Project Manager's
records only. No other product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Concrete Floor Testing:
1. Moisture Emission Level Test: The Contractor shall provide testing to confirm moisture
vapor emission levels, in accordance with ASTM F 1869.98 "Standard Test Method for
Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride ". This testing must be provided in an enclosed, temperature
controlled building shell approximately 30 days prior to the epoxy flooring installation.
a. Maximum Acceptable Moisture Emission Level: Moisture Vapor shall not exceed
3.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 -hour period.
b. Note that the specified "acceptable" emission level for this flooring product is
different than for other flooring products scheduled.
2. Alkali Test: The Contractor shall provide testing for alkalinity before the installation of
epoxy flooring, to confirm pH between 5 and 9.
B. If required due to existing conditions, Moisture and pH Mitigation shall be provided per
Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR
s EPDXY FINISH ON CONCRETE
09670 - 121611 09670 -1
•
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer's standard written
warranty, in the Building Maintenance Manual submitted per Section 01700 - Contract
Closeout.
B. Building Maintenance Manual: Provide Product Manufacturer's written maintenance
information in the Building Maintenance Manual submitted per Section 01700 - Contract
Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EPDXY FINISH SYSTEM:
A. Provide products by The Sherwin- Williams Company, General Polymers Brand, Cincinnati
OH. Contact Melinda Stein (800- 543 -7694 x3422; melinda.j.stein @sherwin.com). No
substitution is acceptable.
B. Drawing Key Symbol "FC -04A ": The Contractor shall provide "Ceramic Carpet #400" Epoxy
Decorative. Floor Finish product.
C. Drawing Key Symbol "WB -04 ": The Contractor shall provide "Ceramic Carpet #400" integral
Epoxy Cove Base, 6 inches high with radiused cove.
D. Application: Primer, 3579 Standard Primer; Surfacer, 1/8" nominal thickness. Ceramic Carpet
#400; Grout and Seal Coats, one and two coats of 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy.
E. Color shall be Ceramic Carpet 319 Sandpoint.
2.02 TOP EDGE TRIM, EPDXY SCREED FLOOR TRIM:
A. Where applicable, provide edge trims equal to Schluter Systems Inc., Plattsburgh NY (800-
472- 4588).
B. Top Edge Trim: Provide Schluter Model A30, Color Clear Anodized or Mill Finish (natural
aluminum), sized to receive 1/8" flooring, in nominal 8 -foot lengths, at epoxy wall base, at top
edge of finish, prior to the epoxy flooring application.
C. Epoxy Screed Floor Trim (straight- edge): Provide Schluter - Scheine -AE, clear anodized
aluminum finish, at the open perimeter edge of the floor epoxy prior to the epoxy flooring
application.
D. Epoxy Screed Floor Trim (curved edge): Provide Schluter - Scheine -AE -R, clear anodized
aluminum finish with a special perforated anchoring leg to allow the profile to be radiused, at
the open perimeter edge of the floor epoxy prior to epoxy flooring application.
2.03 MECHANICAL ABRADING EQUIPMENT: The Epoxy Finish installer shall provide dry, dustless
surface "shot- blast" mechanical abrading and integral vacuuming of the concrete floor surface.
Mechanical abrading materials and methods shall be in compliance with pertinent regulations of the
local jurisdiction. Chemical Stripping or other treatment of the concrete floor surface is NOT
permitted.
2.04 MOISTURE MITIGATION: If the measured Moisture Emission Level and pH Level are above the
flooring adhesive manufacturer's limits, then the Contractor shall provide concrete slab moisture
mitigation treatment per Section 07190 - Moisture Mitigation Systems.
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR EPDXY FINISH ON CONCRETE
09670 - 121611 09670 -2
•
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will
be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work,
and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Prior to application of the Epoxy Finish, the area must be "dried -in ", well ventilated, and finish
lighting in place, and permanently heated with the temperature between 65 to 85 degrees F.
C. The Contractor shall furnish either temporary or permanent phase 208V power (or other
power source as may be required) for use by the Epoxy Finish Installer.
D. Concrete must be free of curing compounds, sealers, old adhesives and all incompatible
substances.
3.02 EPDXY FINISH INSTALLATION:
A. Preparation of Concrete Substrate: All preparation of concrete substrate shall be per ASTM
D -4259 (Sec. 6 Mechanical Abrading, Sec. 8 Abrasive Blast) and/ or ASTM D4260 (Chemical
Preparation). Preparation of concrete substrate shall be in accordance with product
manufacturer's written instructions. Remove all existing loose coatings if present and /or any
sealer, bond breakers, oils and greases to expose a clean substrate followed by mechanical
abrading with dustless equipment. Substrate shall be sound and profiled meeting ICRI
standard guidelines 03732 for coating of concrete with sealers, coatings, and polymer
overlays. This profile is SCP -3 CSP3 -5 (Concrete Surface Profile).
B. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile and Transition adjacent to the Aquarium Area must be
completely installed prior to installation of Epoxy Flooring. It is intended that the Vinyl
Transition top surface be CAREFULLY and thoroughly taped off by the Contractor or the
epoxy flooring installer, and used as a finishing screed for the epoxy flooring.
C. Application of Epoxy Resinous Coating System shall be per product manufacturer's written
instructions for each of the respective products.
D. Coating Sequence: The Coating Sequence shall utilize 3579 Standard primer and Ceramic
Carpet #400 Decorative Broadcast (1/8" floor system):
1. Prepare the surface by mechanical profile.
2. Apply 3579 Standard Primer at a uniform rate of 250 sf./ gal. Allow to cure.
3. Apply 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze at a uniform rate of 140 -145 sf. gal.
4. Broadcast 319 Sandpoint quartz at a uniform rate of approximately 1/2 lb. per sq. ft.
5. Cure (cure time may vary depending on hardener selection, from 2 to16 hours).
6. Sweep up excess broadcast quartz.
7. Apply 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze at a uniform rate of approximately 65 to 7080 sf. per
gal. This application serves as a base coat for the second broadcast.
8. Broadcast 319 Sandpoint Quartz at a uniform rate of approximately 1/2 lb. per foot.
9. Sweep up excess broadcast.
10. Apply Grout coat of 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy evenly with no puddles at 100
sf. per gal.
11. Apply a Seal Coat of 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy evenly with no puddles at 200
sf./ gal.
12. Apply PAce -Cote 4844 in place of 3744 High Performance CR Epoxy in TUB and
CAGE rooms.
PETCO South Tigard, OR EPDXY FINISH ON CONCRETE
09670-121611 09670 -3
13. Floor Transition: Provide a smooth flush epoxy transition from the installed Epoxy
Finish to adjacent VCT by taping off the VCT edge. Remove the tape and clean the
adhesive residue from the adjacent VCT after epoxy work is complete in this area.
E. Cracks and Joints: Correct surface voids with Aggregate and 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Correct surface cracks, crazing,
control joints with EPO -FLEX HD Epoxy or 3580 Crack & Joint Filler per the manufacturer's
written instructions.
F. Integral Epoxy Cove Base: Provide integral Epoxy Cove Base, 6 inches high, radius cove,
installed with Epoxy Cove Base 3561V materials in all areas scheduled to receive epoxy
flooring unless specifically noted otherwise. Cove radius shall be not less than 3/4 ", and shall
be applied directly to a sound wall surface. The same quartz color shall be used to match the
floor and sealed to achieve a smooth surface.
G. Top Edge Trim Cap:
1. Secure Top Edge Trim Cap to wall, through FRP Wall Panel finish, with mechanical
fasteners at 6 inches on center.
2. Provide concave - tooled white silicone sealant bead at top of Top Edge Trim Cap
against FRP Wall Panel finish.
H. Integral Epoxy Cove Base: After installation of the Top Edge Trim Cap, provide integral
Epoxy Cove Base, 6 inches high, radiused cove, installed with Epoxy Cove Base 3561V
materials in all areas scheduled to receive epoxy flooring unless specifically noted otherwise.
Cove radius shall be not less than 3/4 ", and shall be applied directly to a sound wall surface.
The same quartz color shall be used to match the floor and sealed to achieve a smooth
surface.
•
3.03 Finish resulting from any work provided by the Contractor's employees, or any subcontractor or
subcontractor's employees, shall be repaired and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to PETCO.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR EPDXY FINISH ON CONCRETE
09670 - 121611 09670 -4
SECTION 09720
SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section, the term
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 SUMMARY: Provide Special Wall Surfaces where shown on the drawings, as specified in this
Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the construction
documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section 01340 - Submittals.
1.04 WARRANTY: The Contractor shall provide the manufacturers' standard product warranties in the
Building Maintenance Manuals per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FRP/ PRE - FINISHED INTERIOR WALL PANELS AND TRIM MOLDINGS:
•
A. FRP panels and trim moldings shall be purchased by the Contractor from this PETCO
Inventory Agreement Vendor, and installed by the Contractor:
CRANE COMPOSITES
Contact: Wade Warford (e -mail wwarford @cranecomposites.com)
2017 N. Pacey Road, Phoenix AZ 85037
Tel. 425 - 260 -3495
Website: www.cranecomposites.com
No product substitutions are permitted.
B. Drawing Key Symbol "WF -01 ": The Contractor shall provide Glasbord -P ", Color #66 Silver,
pebble embossed, Class C fire rated PIF per ASTM A -84. No product substitutions are
permitted.
1. WF -01 Vinyl Trim Moldings: Provide Inside and Outside Corner, Exposed Edge and
Panel Joint Trims in Color #66 Silver.
C. Adhesive: Provide adhesive manufactured for FRP work, equal to Titebond Solvent -Free
Fast Grab FRP Adhesive.
2.02 DOGGIE DAY CAMP WAINSCOT WALL COVERING: NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation work constitutes acceptance of the substrate surface.
3.02 INSTALLATION: Install all Special Wall Surfaces according to the manufacturers' standard written
instructions, using adhesives, fasteners and trim moldings manufactured for the intended purpose, •
and per the manufacturer's recommendations. Exposed mechanical fasteners are NOT permitted.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR SPECIAL WALL SURFACES
09720 - 121611 09720 -1
•
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: The Contractor shall paint exposed exterior and interior finished wall and ceiling
surfaces, and equipment including, but not necessarily limited to, exposed plumbing piping and
insulation, HVAC ductwork, and electrical conduit and junction boxes, with primer and paint
materials listed on the Painting Schedule in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper
installation.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 03310- Concrete Floor Preparation..
B. Section 09260- Gypsum Wallboard & Partition System.
1.04 WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is NOT required on surfaces in concealed areas and
inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and duct shafts.
B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, and similar finished
materials will not require painting under this Section except as otherwise specified.
C. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve
operators; linkages; sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
paint over required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, or nameplates.
1.05 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the construction
documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section 01340 - Submittals.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Paint Coordination:
•
1. The Contractor shall provide a prime coat that is compatible with the finish coat(s).
Prime coat may be tinted towards the finish color as specified in this Section.
2. The Contractor shall review other sections of the Project Manual as required so as to
verify that the proper prime coat is used and to ensure compatibility of the total coating
system with the substrate.
3. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect, in writing, if there are anticipated
problems in using the specified coating system.
4. The Contractor shall provide barrier coat(s) over non - compatible primers, or remove
the primer and re -prime as may be required.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: The Contractor shall store paint materials at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45° F and a maximum of 90° F, in a well ventilated area, unless required
otherwise by the manufacturer's printed recommendations. The Contractor shall take precautionary
measures to prevent fire hazards and minimize the potential for spontaneous combustion.
PETCO South Tigard, OR PAINTING
09900 - 121611 09900 -1
1.08 WARRANTY: NOT USED
1.09 EXTRA PAINT STOCK: Upon completion of painting work, the Contractor shall deliver to the
jobsite, for secured storage at a location designated by the PETCO Project Manager, an extra stock
of one (1) gallon of each color, type and sheen of paint used in the work, with each container tightly
sealed and clearly labeled with contents and the location where used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINT MATERIALS:
A. Except as specifically noted, all paint products shall be purchased by the Contractor from
Sherwin- Williams Company. Contact Stacy Stachler (216- 341 -6444;
stacy.stachler @sherwin.com). No substitutions are acceptable.
B. Exterior stain on concrete masonry shall be by OKON Inc., Lakewood Co (800- 237 - 0565). No
manufacturer substitutions are permitted.
C. General:
1. All paint coatings shall conform to all state and local regulations including VOCNOS
rules in effect at the time of paint application. If water -based paints are required by the
local jurisdiction, then the Contractor shall provide water -based paints approved by the
manufacturer for the intended use. All paint products shall be formulated without lead
or mercury.
2. Primer, finish coat, and thinner materials shall be from a single manufacturer's unified
system of painted finishes. Use only manufacturer - recommended equipment for paint
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS - GENERAL:
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will
be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work,
•
and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Temperature: The Contractor shall NOT apply solvent- thinned paints when the temperature
of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are below 50 degrees F or
above 100 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
C. Weather Conditions: The Contractor shall NOT apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or
when the relative humidity exceeds 85% RH, and shall not apply paint to damp or wet
surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed recommendations. Paint
applications may be provided during inclement weather only when within the temperature and
humidity parameters specified by the paint manufacturer.
3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS - CONCRETE FLOOR:
A. In addition to the Surface Conditions - General above, the Contractor shall verify that the
surface is clean, dry, sound and offer sufficient profile to achieve adequate adhesion.
B. Minimum substrate cure is 28 days at 75° F.
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR PAINTING
09900 - 121611 09900 -2
C. Remove all form release agents, curing compounds, salts, efflorescence, laitance and other
foreign matter by sandblasting, shot - blasting, mechanical scarification, or suitable chemical
means.
D. Provide skim coating of prepared concrete floor surface in Work Room and Wellness Room,
per Section 03310 - Concrete Floor Preparation.
E. Do not use hydrocarbon solvent for cleaning. Refer to ASTM D4260. Rinse thoroughly to
achieve a final pH between 8.0 and 11.0. Allow to dry thoroughly prior to coating.
F. Concrete Floor Testing:
1. Moisture Emission Level Test: The Contractor shall provide testing to confirm moisture
vapor emission levels, in accordance with ASTM F 1869.98 "Standard Test Method for
Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride ". This testing must be provided in an enclosed, temperature
controlled building shell or tenant space.
a. Maximum Acceptable Moisture Emission Level: Moisture Vapor shall not exceed
3.0 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
b. Note that the specified acceptable emission level for this floor coating product
may be different than for other finish flooring products scheduled.
2. Concrete Slab Vapor Control Treatment shall be provided if the Maximum Acceptable
Moisture Emission Level exceeds the limit specified, or if the Alkalinity pH as tested is
above 9. •
3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: Mix and prepare paint per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Store paints in tightly covered containers when materials are not in use. Maintain containers used in
storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and
residue.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. Provide surface preparation and cleaning procedures per the paint manufacturers' printed
recommendations.
B. Remove items that are already in place and that are not intended to receive the scheduled
paint finish; or provide surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation cleaning and
painting procedures.
C. Preparation of Exposed Shell Interior Face (at Retail Area, if applicable):
1. If an exposed interior shell construction, without applied furring and gypsum wallboard,
is scheduled for this project's Retail Area, and such exposed construction is acceptable
to the PETCO Project Manager, then the Contractor shall provide an interior face of
finish quality that is acceptable to the PETCO Project Manager, via the PETCO Project
Manager's field inspection.
a. Exposed concrete unit masonry, if applicable, shall be uniform in appearance,
with visible voids patched with mortar, flush with the adjacent concrete unit face.
Mortar joints shall be formed concave suitable for exposed surfaces. Untooled
flush cut mortar joints are not acceptable. Remove excess mortar, mortar
smears, dirt and masonry.
b. Exposed concrete wall panels, if applicable, shall be uniform in appearance, with
visible voids larger than 1/2" in any direction patched with a non - shrink,
PETCO South Tigard, OR PAINTING
09900 - 121611 09900 -3 •
cementitious patching product, and tooled flush with the adjacent concrete wall
panel face. Remove excess concrete projections.
c. Alternative exposed construction shall be finished similar to above descriptions,
and with similar finish quality.
D. Preparation of Metal and Wood Surfaces:
1. Clean metal and wood surfaces free of dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign substances.
2. Galvanized metal surfaces: Use solvent for initial cleaning and treat the surface
thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch solution; remove solution before proceeding.
3. Smooth finished wood surfaces exposed to view. Use varying degrees of coarseness
in sandpaper to produce a uniformly smooth and unmarred wood surface.
4. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint.
E. Preparation of existing exposed metal, structural or plate steel:
1. Clean metal surfaces free of grease and oil, and clean in accordance with Steel
Structures Painting Council publication SSPC- SPA -63 "Solvent Cleaning ", followed by
removal of all loose, scaling paint by hand scraping or with power tools.
2. Rusted surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC- SP2 -63 "Hand Tool
Cleaning" or SSPC -SP3 -633 "Power Tool Cleaning ".
3. Where heavy rust, corrosion or deteriorated coatings exist, the surface should be
abrasive blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC- SP6 -63 "Commercial Blast Cleaning ".
The abrasive - blasted surface must be blown off with compressed air to remove blast
product traces, and must be painted within 24 hours with rust inhibitive primer.
4. Weathered, unpainted galvanized iron surfaces must be wire - brushed or power
washed to remove "white rust" deposits prior to application of galvanizing primer.
3.05 PAINT APPLICATION:
A. Primer and Painting:
1. Touchup shop - applied prime coat(s) which may have been damaged, and touchup
bare metal or other substrate areas prior to start of the application of finished coat(s).
2. Tinting: Paint Primer coat shall be tinted towards the color of successive finish coats.
3. The "number of coats" indicated on the Painting Schedule is the minimum number of
coats required. Additional coats required for complete coverage shall be applied at no
additional cost to PETCO.
4. Visible defects: Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided
eye from a distance of five feet from the surface.
B. Brush Paint Application: Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surfaces in an even
film, working to the specified thickness. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
runs, sag, and other visible surface imperfections are not acceptable.
C. Spray Paint Application:
1. Except as otherwise specifically accepted by the PETCO Project Manager, spray
application should be limited to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand
brushwork would be inferior.
2. Where spray application is provided, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of
an equivalent brush coat. Do NOT double -back the spray paint, in an attempt to build
up a two -coat film thickness in one pass.
D. Remove, refinish, or repaint any work that is not in compliance with the specified
requirements.
PETCO South Tigard, OR PAINTING
09900 - 121611 09900 -4
E. Miscellaneous Surfaces and Procedures:
1. Exposed Mechanical and Electrical items:
a. Paint access doors, pipes, conduit, junction boxes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents
and similar items which are not factory pre- finished/ pre - painted, to match the
paint color of the adjacent wall or ceiling surface, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings or as otherwise directed by the PETCO Project Manager.
b. Clean metal with solvent, prime and apply two coats of alkyd enamel.
c. Do NOT paint factory pre- finished surfaces, except as otherwise specified.
2. Exposed Piping Insulation: Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation that has been
sized or primed under other sections; apply two coats on such surfaces when
unprepared. Match color of adjacent surfaces. Remove band before painting, and
reinstall band after painting.
3. Hardware: Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces.
4. Exposed Vents: Apply two coats of heat - resistant paint.
3.06 EXTERIOR SURFACES PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A. Concrete Masonry (exterior, painted): NOT USED
B. Concrete Masonry (exterior, stained): NOT USED
C. Ferrous and Galvanized Metal (exterior HM Doors and similar metal surfaces, where
applicable):
First Coat Sherwin- Williams ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer B66 -310
Second AND Third Coats Sherwin- Williams Prolndustrial 0 VOC Acrylic Gloss B66 -600
Paint Type/ Sheen Acrylic Latex/ Gloss
D. Concrete & Asphalt Safety Markings (exterior): NOT USED
3.07 INTERIOR SURFACES PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A. Interior Exposed Construction (e.g., columns, roof structural steel, exposed piping and
ductwork below 12' -0" height):
First Coat Sherwin- Williams ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer B66 -310
Second AND Third Coats Sherwin- Williams Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall Eg -shel #B42W2
Paint Type/ Sheen Latex/ Eggshell
•
B. Interior Exposed Construction (metal roof deck, roof structural steel, exposed piping and
ductwork above 12' -0" height):
First Coat (if Steel &
Rusty Galvanized,
with acrylic primer) Sherwin- Williams ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer #B66 -310 '
First Coat (if Steel,
with acrylic primer) Sherwin- Williams ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer #B66 -310
Second AND Third Coats Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall #B42W1, with tinting EnviroToner
Colorant color added to match #SW -6158 "Sawdust" (with
Third coat IF required for complete coverage)
Paint Type/ Sheen Acrylic/ Flat
PETCO South Tigard, OR PAINTING
09900- 121611 09900 -5
C. Interior Doors and Door Frames:
First Coat S -W ProCryl Acrylic Metal Primer #B66 -310
Second AND Third Coats S -W Prolndustrial 0 VOC Acrylic Semigloss B66 -650
Paint Type/ Sheen Latex/ Semi -gloss
D. Wood:
First Coat S -W Multipurpose Latex Primer #B51 W8020
Second AND Third Coats S -W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss #B31W651
Paint Type/ Sheen Latex/ Semi -gloss
E. Gypsum Wallboard:
First Coat S -W ProGreen 200 Latex Wall Primer #B28W600
Second AND Third Coats* S -W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg -Shel #B20W651
Paint Type/ Sheen Latex/ Eggshell
F. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Wallboard (e.g. Tub Room ceiling, Work Room, Restroom walls):
First Coat S -W ProGreen 200 Latex Wall Primer #B28W600
Second AND Third Coats S -W Prolndustrial 0 VOC Acrylic Semigloss B66 -650
Paint Type/ Sheen Latex/ Semi -Gloss
G. Water Resistant Finish on Gypsum Wallboard (e.g. Retail Wall behind Aquariums)
First Coat Premium Wall & Wood Primer #B28W8111
Second AND Third Coats Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy K46 Series
Paint Type/ Sheen Epoxy/ Semi -Gloss
3.08 PAINT COLORS: The following custom colors shall be provided as scheduled on the drawings:
A. Drawing Key "PT -01 EG ": Color #SW -6136 "Harmonic Tan ", eggshell.
B. Drawing Key "PT -01 SG ": Color #SW -6136 "Harmonic Tan ", semi - gloss.
C. Drawing Key "PT -01 EP ": Color #SW -6136 "Harmonic Tan ", epoxy.
C. Drawing Key "PT -02 DF ": Color #SW -6158 "Sawdust ", dryfall flat.
D. Drawing Key "PT -03 EG ": Color #SW -6127 "Ivoire ", eggshell.
E. Drawing Key "PT -09 EG ": Color #SW -6129 "Restrained Gold ", eggshell.
F. Drawing Key "PT -09 SG ": Color #SW -6129 "Restrained Gold ", semi - gloss.
G. Drawing Key "PT -10 SG ": Color #SW -6072 "Versatile Gray ", semi - gloss.
H. Drawing Key "Safety Yellow ": Sherwin- Williams Color #SW -4084 "Safety Yellow ".
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR PAINTING
09900 - 121611 09900 -6
SECTION 09910
CONCRETE SEALER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY: Provide Concrete Sealer on interior concrete floors where scheduled on the drawings,
as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the construction
documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section 01340 - Submittals.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: The Contractor shall store materials in a dry, enclosed
area protected from moisture exposure, and shall maintain the storage area's temperature in a
range allowed by the manufacturer.
1.05 WARRANTY: Provide the Manufacturer's Standard Product Warranty in the Building Maintenance
Manuals submitted per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE SEALER/ HARDENER (Drawing Key "FC- 08A "):
A. The Contractor shall provide "Seal Hard" Concrete Sealer, VOC compliant Densifier and
Chemical Hardener, by L &M Construction Chemicals Inc., Omaha NE (800- 362 -3331;
www.lmcc.com), where scheduled on the drawings.
B. Acceptable Alternative: Provide "Day -Chem Sure Hard J -17 ", VOC compliant hardener,
dustproofer and sealer, by Dayton Superior Chemical Division, Kansas City KS (877-416 -
3439;www.daytonsuperior.com ).
C. Acceptable Alternative: Provide Euco Diamond Hard, water -based VOC compliant liquid
densifier and sealer, by the Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland OH (800- 321 -7628;
www.euclidchemical.com).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: Surfaces shall be clean and free of all contaminants, film- forming curing
compounds or sealers. The Contractor shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the work of this Section, and shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected. Concrete must be cured for a minimum of three (3) days prior to the application of
Concrete Sealer.
3.02 APPLICATION:
A. Preparation of existing concrete: Free the surface from all contaminants that would inhibit
penetration of the product into the concrete surface, in a manner specifically approved by the
product manufacturer. Sweep all areas to be treated, using a fine bristle broom, to remove all
surface debris.
B. The Contractor must keep the area receiving the Concrete Sealer not accessible to other
trades during the floor preparation and product installation, and for a period of time as
recommended by the product manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONCRETE SEALER
09910 - 121611 09910 -1
•
SECTION 10300
PETCO- FURNISHED & CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCE: The Division of Responsibilities is described in this Section and on an abbreviated
list on Drawing Sheet A0.2. There are additional, miscellaneous Contractor - Provided Items listed in
this Section that are NOT listed on Drawing Sheet A0.2.
1.02 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY:
A. Where referenced in this Section, "Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord's
Contractor'.. Refer to Section 01010- Summary of Work for additional "Division of
Responsibilities Terminology" information.
B. "Contractor ": The Contractor shall furnish and install PETCO Inventory Agreement products
and assemblies; shall install some PETCO National Account products and assemblies; and
shall coordinate provisions for these and PETCO Vendor - provided products and assemblies;
all as described in the drawings, in this section, and other Project Manual Sections.
C. "PETCO Vendor ": Where referenced in this Section, "PETCO Vendor" refers to a different
entity from "Contractor ". The PETCO Vendor will provide tenant - specific work in contract
agreement with PETCO. The PETCO Vendor may be either a product supplier only, that
delivers products or assemblies to the project site, or may furnish and install the specific
products and assemblies.
D. "PETCO Employee ": Some PETCO- Furnished Items will be installed by PETCO's
Employees.
1.03 PETCO NATIONAL ACCOUNT AND INVENTORY AGREEMENTS:
A. National Account (Purchased by PETCO): PETCO has secured National Accounts with some
construction product Vendors. PETCO direct purchases these national account products with
some variation of the following division of responsibilities between . PETCO and the
Contractor:
•
1. Furnished and installed by the PETCO Vendor.
2. Furnished by the PETCO Vendor, and installed by the Contractor.
3. Partially furnished and /or installed by the PETCO Vendor, and partially furnished
and /or installed by the Contractor.
4. The Contractor must coordinate with the PETCO Project Manager regarding provisions
and scheduling for delivery of products, labor and materials provided by PETCO under
National Account agreements with specified product and assembly suppliers, for those
items that the Contractor must either install (only), or furnish AND install.
B. Inventory Agreement (Purchased by the Contractor): As further defined in this Section and in
other Project Manual Sections, PETCO has secured Inventory Agreements with some
construction product manufacturer/ suppliers.
1. Unless specifically approved in advance, and approved in writing, by the PETCO
Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide these Inventory Agreement
construction products, with no substitutions permitted.
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300- 121611 10300 -1
2. The cost for PETCO Inventory Agreement products, to be purchased by the
Contractor, has generally been pre - established with the manufacturer/ supplier.
1.04 LIST OF PETCO- FURNISHED AND CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS:
A. PETCO- Furnished and Contractor - Provided Items and Division of Responsibilities are also
described in abbreviated form on the Architectural Drawings (Drawing Sheet A0.2). The
Contractor is responsible for satisfying labor, materials, and equipment requirements for each
respective item as may be further detailed in this or other Project Manual Sections.
A0.2 Item Description Reference Drawings,
Mark Section(s)
1. Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors A2.1, A3.1, A7.1, 08410
2. Banner Anchors (at Front Elevation) A4.1, 05500
3. Bird Habitat Kit
4. Cabinets, Countertops, Coat Rack, Shelves A2.1 A7.1, A9.1, 06200, 08710
5. Cart Corral (Exterior) A2.1, A7.1, 10300
6. Cash Register Point of Sale (POS) System A2.3, E -dwgs, 16000
7. Computer Equipment A2.3, 10300
8. Employee Time Clock 10300
9. Energy Management System 16000
10. Entrance Floor Mat A2.1, A3.1, A7.1, 10300
11. Fire Alarm & Security System E2.3, 16000
12. Fire Extinguishers A2.3, 10300
13. Grooming Reception Counter and accessory wall A2.3, A7.1, 10300
with Swinging Doors
14. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Door Finish A3.1, 08710
Hardware
15. HVAC Rooftop Units (RTUS) A2.4, M -dwgs, 15500
16. Interior PETCO Store Graphics 10300
17. Light Fixtures and Lamps E -dwgs, 16000
18. Loading Dock Equipment (part of building shell) A2.1, A6.1, 10300
19. _Shopping Carts A2.3, A7.1, 10300
20. Sound & Communication System E2.4, 16000
21. Store Safe A2.3, A7.1, 10300
22. Telephone System 10300, 16000
23. Toilet Room (and other room) Accessories A7.1, A9.1, 10300
24. Wall Bumpers A7.1, A9.1, 10300
25. Wall Cornerguards A7.1, A9.1, 10300
26. Window Shades A2.1, 10300
27. Wire Shelving A7.1, 10300
28. Store Fixtures/ Equipment: AQUARIUM AREA A2.3, A7.1, P -dwgs, E -dwgs,
and WORK ROOM 10300
AQ1 Freezer
AQ2 Plant Tank
AQ3 Bagging Station
AQ4 -AQ11 Aquatics Tanks
AQ12 Feeder Warehouse
AQ13 Prep Sink
AQ20
29. Store Equipment: BREAK ROOM A2.3, A7.1, 10300
BR1 Vending Machine
BR2 Refrigerator
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -2
BR3 Lockers
BR5 Table
30. Store Fixtures: RETAIL AREA Check Lanes A2.3, E -dwgs, 10300, 16000
CL1, CL2, CL3 Check Lane and Power Pole
CL4 Store Safe
31. General Furnishings OFFICE A2.3, 10300
Fl File Cabinet
F2 Desk
F3 Chair
F4 Folding Table
F5 Computer Table
F6 Book Case
F7 Fax Machine
32. Store Fixtures: RETAIL AREA Gondola A2.3, 10300
G1 -G7 Gondola
33. Store Furnishings/ Equipment: GROOMING A2.1, A2.3, A7.1, A9.1, P -dwgs,
SALON M -dwgs, E -dwgs, 10300
GR1 Grooming Table
GR2 Shop Vacuum
GR3 Animal Kennel with Dryer
GR4 Animal Kennel
GR5 Grooming Hose
GR6 Washer and Dryer
GR7 Shampoo Dispenser
GR8 Fixed Grooming Tub
34. Store Fixtures: RETAIL AREA Reptile Habitats A2.3, M -dwgs, E -dwgs, 10300
RTL1 Reptile Habitat
RTL2 Reptile Petter
35. Store Fixtures: RETAIL AREA Small Animal A2.3, M -dwgs, E -dwgs, 10300
Habitats
SA3 Ferret Petter
SAM1 Small Animal Habitat
36. Store Fixtures/ Furnishings/ Equipment: RETAIL A2.3, 10300
AREA
SF1 21 HL Pet Bar
SF2 12 HL Pet Bar
SF3 End Cap Pet Bar
SF4 Vending Machine
SF5 Quick Tag
SF6 Kid's Ride
SF7 Avanti Cards
SF8 Kiosk
SF9 Gift Fixture
SF10 Litter Bin
SF11 Apparel Fixture
SF12 Dump Bin
SF13 Pallet
SF14 Half - Pallets
SF15 H- Fixture
SF16 Cat Furniture
W3, W4, W13, W14, W15 Wall Fixture Units
•
1.05 ADDITIONAL CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS NOT LISTED ON DRAWING SHEET A0.2:
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -3
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following items where shown on the drawings.
Some items may be available for purchase by the Contractor through a PETCO Inventory
Agreement with the supplier/ vendor, as further described in this Section:
1. Accessibility Signage.
2. NOT USED
3. Emergency Personal Eyewash Station.
4. NOT USED
5. NOT USED
6. Miscellaneous Warning Signs.
7. Plan Holder at Telephone Board.
8. NOT USED
9. Rapid Access Key Vault (Knox Box).
10. Stainless Steel Column Coverings.
11. NOT USED
12. NOT USED
13. NOT USED
14. NOT USED
15. NOT USED
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULE OF PETCO- FURNISHED AND CONTRACTOR - FURNISHED ITEMS:
A. Where other Sections are referenced, those Sections should also be referred to for additional
descriptions of the divisions of responsibilities for the respective item.
1. Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors:
Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
2. Banner Anchors:
Banner Anchors shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor at the building
exterior where shown on the drawings.
3. Bird Habitat Kit (aka "Bird Room ") (National Account):
a. The Bird Habitat Kit shall be purchased by PETCO; delivered to the jobsite by
this PETCO National Account Vendor; and offloaded, assembled and installed by
the Contractor. The Contractor should contact this Vendor and request "PETCO
Bird Habitat Specifications" for a complete description of this scope of work:
NORTH AMERICAN PET PRODUCTS INC. (NAP)
Corona CA
Contact: Christine Buck ( christineb @northamericanpet.com)
951 - 279 -9888 x205
b. The Contractor shall provide materials and assembly/ installation labor as shown
on the drawings, and as described in the "PETCO Bird Habitat Assembly
Instructions" furnished by this PETCO Vendor with the Bird Habitat Kit:
1) The Bird Habitat Kit includes pre - finished aluminum extrusions; a single -
acting aluminum door with door finish hardware; finished insert panels;
and component connectors and screws.
2) In addition to the Bird Habitat Kit assembly and installation, the Contractor
shall provide the labor and materials as shown and scheduled on the
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300- 121611 10300 -4
drawings, and as specified in other Project Manual Sections, including but
not necessarily limited to the following:
a) Floor anchor epoxy product.
b) Installation of door finish hardware, except for door finish hardware
that is furnished pre - installed.
c) Installation of the finished insert panels that are furnished with the
Bird Habitat Kit.
d) Finish flooring.
e) Fire suppression provisions.
f) HVAC Mechanical provisions.
g) Electrical Lighting, Power and other provisions under the electrical
scope of work.
h) Fasteners used to secure the Contractor - provided components to
the Bird Habitat Kit components.
c. Protection of the Installed Bird Habitat: The Contractor is responsible for
protection of the stored, assembled and installed Bird Habitat from damage of
any kind during the course of construction, and shall take all means necessary to
ensure that on the Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO, the Bird Habitat is
delivered to PETCO in "like new" condition.
d. The Contractor is responsible for inspection of the Bird Habitat Kit at the time of
delivery, and photographically documenting, and promptly notifying the PETCO
Project Manager of any damage to the Bird Habitat Kit "as delivered ".
4. Cabinets, Countertops, Coat Rack, Shelves:
Cabinets, Countertops, Coat Rack and Shelves shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.
5. Cart Corral (Exterior):
a Exterior Cart Corral (Inventory Agreement): The Parking Lot Cart Corral shall be
purchased by the Contractor from this PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor, and
installed by the Contractor:
NATIONAL CART COMPANY INC.
3125 Boschertown Road, St. Charles MO 63301
Tel. 800 - 455 -3802; FAX 636- 723 -4477; website: www.nationalcart.com
1) No product substitutions or alternative product suppliers are permitted. No
submittals are required for these products. Lead Time for order processing
and fabrication is 2 weeks; allow for additional shipping time.
2) The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) Series 360, Model #CC-
360-14-GP Cart Corral with custom PETCO signage on file with the
company. This model is furnished with galvanized steel base plates for
securement.
3) Installation: The Parking Lot Cart Corral shall be installed by the
Contractor in PETCO's customer parking lot, where designated by the
PETCO Project Manager (and may be subject to Landlord's approval).
Securing fasteners shall be provided by the Contractor.
b. Cart Corral (Interior): NOT USED
c. Interior Cart Bumper: The Interior Cart Bumper shall be purchased by the
Contractor from this PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor, and installed by the
Contractor where shown on the drawings:
• PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300- 121611 10300 -5
MCCUE CORPORATION
•
Contact: Inside Sales
35 Congress Street, Salem MA 01790
Tel. 800 - 800 -8503; FAX 508 - 741 -2542; website: www.mccuecorp.com
No product substitution or alternative product supplier is permitted. No
submittal is required for this product. This Inventory Agreement Vendor is
also the source for Wall Bumpers, specified elsewhere in this Section.
1) The Floor- Anchored Cart Bumper shall be Cart Stop Model RE, Part No.
CSR, Color 604 Light Caramel. Provide field- cut -to -size rail with lengths as
shown on the drawings. If the cart bumper shown on the drawings is an L-
shaped or U- shaped bumper configuration, then provide Roller Corner
CSRC2 at each corner.
2) The Cart Bumper should be purchased over -sized (2 foot increments) and
field cut to the specified lengths.
3) Install the floor- secured Interior Cart Bumper in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions, with Contractor - furnished anchoring
cement and inserted into pre - drilled concrete slab holes.
6. Cash Register Point of Sale (POS) System (National Account):
The Point of Sale System will be furnished and installed by a PETCO Vendor. The
Contractor shall furnish and install supplementary electrical work.
7. Computer Equipment (National Account):
Computer Equipment will be furnished to the jobsite and installed by a PETCO Vendor.
•
8. Employee Time Clock (National Account):
The Employee Time Clock will be furnished to the jobsite and installed by a PETCO
Vendor. The Contractor shall furnish and install the junction box, conduit and pullstring,
and power supply.
9. Energy Management System (National Account):
Partial Work will be provided by a PETCO Vendor. The Contractor shall provide
supplementary electrical work.
10. Entrance Floor Mat: NOT USED
11. Fire Alarm & Security System (National Account):
Partial Work will be provided by a PETCO Vendor. The Contractor shall provide
supplementary electrical work.
12. Fire Extinguishers:
a. The Contractor shall furnish and install Fire Extinguishers where shown on the
drawings, or as may be additionally required by the jurisdiction's fire marshal.
Fire Extinguishers shall be equal to Model No. MP6, Multi- Purpose Dry
Chemical, UL Rating 3A- 40B:C, nominal capacity 6 pounds dry chemical, with
bracket Model No. 862, by Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis MN
(800- 527 - 7367).
b. Wall/ Column Bracket: Provide (non - standard) bracket Model No. 862, by
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
c. Installation: Unless otherwise designated by the jurisdiction fire marshal, the
Contractor shall install Fire Extinguishers at a uniform height of no more than 48"
from floor to top of the fire extinguisher handle.
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -6
13. Grooming Reception Counter, Accessory Low Wall and Swinging Doors (National
Account):
a) The Grooming Reception Counter, Accessory Low Wall and Swinging Doors will
be delivered to the jobsite by a PETCO Vendor.
b) The Contractor shall offload the Grooming Reception Counter, Accessory Wall
and Swinging Doors, and shall assemble and install the Grooming Reception
Counter, Accessory Wall and Swinging Doors.
14. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Door Finish Hardware:
Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Door Finish Hardware will be purchased by the
Contractor from a PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor. Except for the installation of
store cores, all Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Door Finish Hardware shall be
installed by the Contractor.
15. HVAC Rooftop Units (Inventory Agreement):
The Contactor shall furnish and install HVAC Rooftop Units and structural provisions.
16. Interior PETCO Store Graphics (National Account):
Interior Surface- Mounted Wall Graphics and Bracket - Mounted Graphics will be
furnished and installed by one or more PETCO Vendors.
17. Light Fixtures and Lamps (Inventory Agreement):
The Contractor shall furnish and install Light Fixtures and Lamps.
18. Loading Dock Equipment: NOT USED •
19. Shopping Carts (National Account):
Shopping Carts will be furnished to the jobsite and installed by one or more PETCO
Vendors.
20. Sound & Communication System (National Account):
The Sound & Communication System will be furnished and installed by a PETCO
Vendor. The Contractor shall furnish and install the junction boxes, conduit and pull -
string, and power supply.
21. Store Safe (National Account):
The Store Safe will be furnished to the jobsite, and offloaded and installed by one or
more PETCO Vendors.
22. Telephone System (National Account):
The Telephone System will be provided by a PETCO Vendor. The Contractor shall
furnish and install the telephone backboard, junction boxes, conduit and pull string, and
power supply.
23. Toilet Room (and other room) Accessories:
a. Partial NATIONAL ACCOUNT: The Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of
Accessories with the PETCO Project Manager, and shall install PETCO's
Vendor - Furnished Accessories as furnished from PETCO's distribution
warehouse. No product substitution or alternative product supplier is permitted.
b. Contractor - Provided Items: The Contractor shall install the following PETCO
Vendor - furnished items, and shall furnish all Wall Anchor Fasteners required for
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300- 121611 10300 -7
•
the installation of these PETCO Vendor - furnished Accessories (products by Fort
James Corporation):
1) Toilet Paper Dispenser: 9" Twin Jumbo Bath Tissue Dispenser.
2) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: SafeGard White Plastic, 500 Sheet Capacity.
.3) Soap Dispenser.
c. Other Rooms Accessories: Lever Action Hardwound Roll Paper Towel Dispenser
shall be furnished by the PETCO Vendor for the following rooms. The Contractor
shall install the Paper Towel Dispenser where indicated on the drawings OR as
otherwise directed by the PETCO Project Manager:
1) Womens Restroom.
2) Mens Restroom.
3) Pre - Sales.
4) Work Room.
d. The Contractor shall provide all other Toilet Room Accessories indicated and
scheduled, equal to Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc., North Hollywood CA
(818- 764- 1000).
1) Alternative: American Specialties Inc. (ASI), Yonkers NY (914- 476 - 9000).
2) Alternative: Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls WI (414- 251 - 6000).
e. Provide Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish and surface mounted Washroom
Accessories at the locations shown on the drawings:
Restroom Items Bobrick ASI Bradley
Mirror 24" x 36" B -165/ 2436 0620B 781
Side Wall Grab Bar B -6806 x 48" 3200 x 48" 812 x 48"
Side Wall Vertical Grab Bar B -6806 x 18" 3200 x 18" 812 x 18"
Rear Wall Grab Bar B -6806 x 36" 3200 x 36" 812 x 36"
Hand Bag / Man Bag Hook B -2116 7382 931
Coat Hook B -2116 7382 931
Mounted to back of door
Sanitary Napkin Disp. B -270 0852 4722 -15
Vertical Wall- Mounted KB101 -00 No equivalent No equivalent
Baby Changing Station Cream "vertical" unit "vertical" unit
Horizontal Wall- Mounted KB100 -0 • 9012 9612
Baby Changing Station Cream Ivory
(Acceptable Alternative)
Mop Holder B -223 8215 -3 9953
'At Janitor Closet, locate above
Floor Sink
Grooming Room Items Bobrick ASI Bradley
Mirrors 24" x 72" Not available 0600/ 2472 BDY 781/ 2472
24. Wall Bumpers (Inventory Agreement):
a. INVENTORY AGREEMENT: Wall Bumpers shall be purchased from this PETCO
Inventory Agreement Vendor and installed by the Contractor:
MCCUE CORPORATION
Contact: Inside Sales •
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -8
35 Congress Street, Salem MA 01790
Tel. 800 - 800 -8503; FAX 508 - 741 -2542; website: www.mccuecorp.com
No product substitution or alternative product supplier is permitted. No submittal
is required for this product. This Inventory Agreement Vendor is also the source
for the Interior Cart Bumper, specified elsewhere in this Section.
b. Provide Greenguard 3 Half -Round 3" rigid wall bumpers, and (where applicable)
Outside Corners and End Caps at interior walls and storefront, where shown or
described on the drawings.
c. Color: Provide Color #604 Light Caramel at all locations.
d. All corner transitions shall be installed with #GGC -35 -604 Outside Corners; all
end terminations shall be installed with #GGE -35 -604 Snap -On End Cap. The
drawings do not necessarily indicate all locations for all outside corner or end
termination items. The Contractor is responsible for determining quantities and
locations based on actual field conditions.
e. Install Wall Bumper Rails in a single horizontal row at the height noted above the
finish floor with screws and #GGB -35 -400 predrilled PVC rail retainer.
25. Wall Cornerguards:
a. The Contractor shall provide Wall Cornerguards equal to Model No. CG -18 -4 (90
degree), Model No. CG -19 -4 (135 degree), Color No. 132 Clear Lexan wall
cornerguards, by Outwater Plastics Industries Inc., Woodridge NJ (973 -472-
3580).
1) Acceptable Alternative: Provide Model No. 421290 (90 degree), Model No.
4212135 (135 degree), Color Clear Polycarbonate, by Institutional
Products Corporation, Muskego WI (800- 543 - 1729).
b. Standard features: Size 2 -1/2" x 2 -1/2" wing, 90 degree or 135 degree, where
applicable; thickness: 0.10" minimum, 44" length, mounted to 48" height above
floor, with bottom located at top of wall base.
c. Means of Attachment: Panhead self- tapping screws in pre - drilled holes; adhesive
mounting is NOT permitted.
d. Locations: Provide Wall Cornerguards at all outside exposed corners of interior
gypsum wallboard partitions.
26. Window Shades:
a. The Contractor shall furnish and install MechoShade Clutch Operated, Manual
Interior Roll- Screen Solar Shade, with wall mount brackets, by MechoShade
Systems Inc., Long Island City NY. Contact: Jerry Feldman; Office 732 - 339 -0751
Ext 6033; Cell # 732 - 991 -1395.
1) Fabric: EuroVeil 5300 dense basket weave, 5% openness factor.
2) Fabric Color: #5304 Sand.
3) Fascia Color: Clear Aluminum.
4) Accessories as listed below and as required for a complete installation.
b. Acceptable Alternative: Provide Hunter Douglas Clutch Operated, Manual
Interior Roller Shade, with wall mount brackets, by Hunter Douglas Contract, Los
Angeles CA (800- 727 -8953; 888 - 243 - 0144).
•
1) Fabric: Phifer Shearweave 4000 fabric, 5% openness factor.
2) Fabric Color: #Q12 Pebblestone.
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -9
3) Fascia Color: Clear Aluminum, or to be selected by PETCO Project
Manager from the manufacturer's standard colors (Contractor to provide
samples).
4) Accessories as listed below and as required for a complete installation.
c. Acceptable Alternative: Provide Lutron Standard Clutch Manual Interior Roller
Shade, with wall mount brackets, by Lutron Shading Solutions, Ashland VA (800-
446- 1503).
1) Fabric: Phifer Shearweave 4000 fabric, 5% openness factor.
2) Fabric Color: #Q12 Pebblestone.
3) Fascia Color: Clear Aluminum, or to be selected by PETCO Project
Manager from the manufacturer's standard colors (Contractor to provide
samples).
4) Accessories as listed below and as required for a complete installation.
d. Standard Accessories: Window Shades shall be provided complete with:
1) Reverse -side Fascias, where the rolled shade and housing is visible
through the storefront.
2) Fascia End Caps at open ends of shade housings.
3) Child -safe chain retainer at each chain.
e. Field Measurements: The Window Shade shall be surface mounted to the
interior side (and face) of the aluminum framing.
f. Installation: The Contractor shall install the Window Shades per the
manufacturer's instructions.
g. Warranty: Provide the manufacturer's Standard Warranty in the Building
Maintenance Manual per Section 01700 requirements.
27. Wire Shelving: Wellness Room, Cage Room, Tub Room, Janitor Closet:
Wire Shelving with integral wall brackets will be furnished by a PETCO Vendor. The
Contractor shall offload wire shelving; shall furnish concealed wall strapping and wall
anchors; and shall install the wire shelving.
28. Store Fixtures/ Equipment: Aquarium Area and Work Room
a. NATIONAL ACCOUNT: Aquarium Area equipment will be furnished and installed
by this PETCO Vendor, with supplementary work provided by the Contractor.
NORTH AMERICAN PET
Contact: Randy Buck (RandyBuck @northamericanpet.com)
450 North Sheridan Street Corona, CA 92880
Tel. (951) 415 -8354
b. AQ1 Freezer: The Freezer will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded and installed
by a PETCO Vendor.
c. AQ2 Plant Tank, AQ4 and AQ8 Aquatics Tanks, and AQ12 Feeder Warehouse:
1) This equipment will be furnished and installed by a PETCO Vendor.
2) The Contractor shall provide final plumbing and electrical connections.
d. AQ3 Bagging Station:
1) The Bagging Station will be furnished to the jobsite in several pre -
assembled units by a PETCO Vendor.
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -10
2) The Contractor shall offload, assemble and install the Bagging Station, and
provide final plumbing and electrical connections.
e. AQ13 Prep Sink (Sink with drain board in Work Room):
The Prep Sink shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
f. AQ7, AQ12:'
1) This equipment will be furnished and installed by the PETCO Vendor.
2) The Contractor shall provide Power Pole, final plumbing and electrical
• connections.
29. Store Fixtures: Break Room (National Account, except where noted)
a. BR2 Refrigerator
The Refrigerator will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded and installed by a
PETCO Vendor.
b. BR3 Lockers
Employee Lockers will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded and installed by a
PETCO Vendor.
c. BR5 Table
The Table will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded and installed by a PETCO
Vendor.
30. Store Fixtures: Retail Area Check Lanes (National Account):
• a. CL1, CL2 and CL3 Check Lane (Cash Wrap) Fixture, Power Pole
1) The Check Lane Fixtures and Power Poles will be furnished to the jobsite
by a PETCO Vendor.
2) The Contractor shall offload, assemble and install the Check Lane Fixtures
and Power Poles, shall provide the junction boxes and electrical provisions
at all Power Pole locations; shall provide supplementary conduit to the
point of connection at the junction box, and shall provide final electrical
connections.
31. General Furnishings/ Equipment (National Account):
a. Fl through F7 General Furnishings and Office Equipment will be furnished to the
jobsite, offloaded, assembled and installed by a PETCO Vendor.
32. Store Fixtures: Retail Area Gondola (National Account):
a. G1 through G7 Gondola Fixture Units will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded,
assembled and installed by a PETCO Vendor and PETCO Employees.
b. The Contractor shall provide electrical power supply to the roof deck (ceiling)
mounted junction box located above Gondola Fixture Units requiring power
provisions; shall provide conduit and wiring from the Gondola Fixture Units to the
roof deck (ceiling) mounted junction boxes; and shall provide final electrical
connections.
33. Store Fixtures/ Furnishings/ Equipment: Grooming Room (various National Accounts)
a. GR1 Grooming Table will be furnished to the jobsite by a PETCO Vendor.
1) The Contractor shall offload the Grooming Table.
2) A PETCO Vendor will assemble and install the Grooming Table.
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -11
b. GR3 Animal Kennel with Dryer, and GR4 Animal Kennel will be furnished to the
jobsite and installed by a PETCO Vendor
c. GR2 Shop Vacuum, GR5 Grooming Hose, and GR7 Shampoo Dispenser will be
furnished to the jobsite, offloaded, assembled and installed by a PETCO Vendor.
d. GR6 Washer and Dryer will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded and installed by
a PETCO Vendor.
1) The Contractor shall provide all plumbing, mechanical and electrical
provisions, including washer hose fitting connections, dryer vent transition
and dryer vent piping through roof, and roof flashing, where shown or
specified on the drawings.
34. Store Fixtures: Retail Area Reptile Habitats (National Account)
a. RTL1 Reptile Habitat, RTL1 Reptile Petter will be furnished to the jobsite,
offloaded and installed by a PETCO Vendor.
b. The Contractor shall provide final electrical connections.
35. Store Fixtures: Retail Area Small Animal Habitats (National Account)
a. SAM1 Small Animal Habitat, SA3 Ferret Petter (National Account) will be
furnished to the jobsite, offloaded and installed by a PETCO Vendor.
b. Power Drop: The Contractor shall provide junction box and power at the roof
• deck (ceiling) where shown on the electrical drawings, and shall provide final
electrical connections.
c. Mechanical Air Distribution: The Contractor shall provide air distribution in close
coordination with the assembly work provided by the PETCO Vendor (installer).
36. Store Fixtures/ Furnishing/ Equipment: Retail Area
a. SF1 through SF10 (National Account) will be furnished to the jobsite, offloaded, .
assembled and installed by a PETCO Vendor and PETCO Employees.
b. W3, W4, W13, W14, W15 Wall Fixture Units will be furnished to the jobsite,
offloaded, assembled and installed by a PETCO Vendor and PETCO
Employees.
2.02 ADDITIONAL CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS:
A. Accessibility Signage: Provide accessibility signage equal to Brighter Image Braille Stock
Signs by Allstate Sign & Plaque Corp., Nassau County NY (800- 240 -6039;
www.allstatesign.com).
1. Interior Room Wall Signs:
a. Accessible Mens Restroom: Allstate X -5671, size 6" x 9 ".
b. Accessible Womens Restroom: Allstate X -5688, size 6" x 9 ".
c. Accessible Break Room: Allstate X- Custom, size 6" x 9 ", Copy: "Break Room ".
d. Provide all Interior Room Signs Provide signage with White letters or symbols,
on Blue sign color equal to Federal Standard 595 -B, Color No. 15090.
e. Sign Installation: Provide one sign at the side of each door for the rooms listed
above, using double -faced adhesive back tape, and locate at a height of 60"
above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign, adjacent to the latch side of
the door, and 12" from the outside edge of the door frame to the centerline of the
sign (adjust this dimension plus/ minus if field conditions limit placement).
2. Interior Toilet Room Door Signs: NOT USED
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -12
3. Interior Side of all Exit Doors: NOT USED
4. Exterior Side of all Customer Entrance Doors: NOT USED
5. Interior Room Doors that exit to a Hallway that has a visual Exit Sign: NOT USED
6. Parking Area "Tow Away" Signage: NOT USED
B. Chain Link Fencing: NOT USED
C. Emergency Personal Eyewash Station (located at the Tub Room):
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install an Emergency Personal Eyewash Station
where shown on the drawings, consisting of a single, safety - sealed 32 -ounce bottle of
isotonic saline wash and a wall- mounted safety station (bottle holder).
2. Provide equal to Model No. 1KW78, product by North Company, available from W.W.
Grainger Inc. (www.grainger.com).
3. Alternative: Model No. S19 -821, Opti -Aid Eye Wash Bottle and Bottle Holder by
Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls WI (800- 272 - 3539).
4. Installation: Secure the wall- mounted safety station with wall anchors suitable for
cement board substrate (wall anchors and screws are NOT furnished with the product).
D. Hurricane Shutters: NOT USED
•
E. Manhole Cover and Frames, Gratings and Inlets: NOT USED
F. Miscellaneous Warning Signs: The Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous
warning signs equal to products by Seton Identification Products, Branford CT (800 -243-
6624) in the Locations where noted:
Sign Description Model/ Size Location
Fire Extinguisher 13895 Wall above each Fire Extinguisher
4 "x 12"
Caution 28824 Each Automatic Sliding Entrance Door Leaf,
Automatic Door 6 -1/2" Dia. center of door, 60" AFF to center
G. Plan Holder at Telephone Board:
1. Provide a Plan Holder for a set of Contractor - provided Petco Tenant Space drawings.
Drawings shall be provided as specified in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.
2. Provide a 4" diameter x 32" long Schedule 40 PVC pipe, with a cemented end cap at
one end, and a flexible end cap / end cover at the other (open) end.
3. Secure the Plan Holder pipe horizontally at the bottom of the Telephone Board, with
three metal pipe clamps. Refer to the Electrical Drawings for the location of the Plan
Holder pipe on the Telephone Board.
4. Provide ten feet of 1/16" diameter stranded aircraft cable, with one end of the aircraft
cable attached to the bound roll of Petco Tenant Space drawings at the binding edge,
via a Contractor - provided punched metal grommet, and aircraft cable ferrule clinch
connectors. Secure the other end of the aircraft cable to the inside of the Plan Holder
pipe to the cemented end cap, via drilled holes and aircraft cable ferrule clinch
connectors.
H. Pre -cast Concrete Parking Bumpers: NOT USED
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300- 121611 10300 -13
I. Rapid Access Key Vault (a.k.a. Knox Box; furnished and installed by the Contractor, if
required by the fire marshal or the local jurisdiction):
1. The Contractor shall provide a recessed, rapid entry key storage box for emergency
building access where shown on the drawings, or as may be otherwise designated by
the fire marshal or the local jurisdiction. The Rapid Access Key Vault product shall be
as approved or recommended by the local jurisdiction, and might be equal to one of the
following products, subject to the Contractor's confirmation with the fire marshal or
other local authority:
a. Model No. 3200 -R Heavy Duty Knox Box, with Model No. RMK recessed
masonry mounting kit, by The Knox Company, Irvine CA (800- 552 - 5669).
b. Model No. LB1 Fail -Safe Key -Lock Box with tamper switch, by Fail -Safe,
Maitland FL (800- 946 - 8832).
2. The Contractor shall coordinate a timely processing and transmitting the Key for the
Rapid Access Key Vault, between PETCO and the fire marshal or other local authority,
so as to not impact the issuance of occupancy permits.
J. Stainless Steel Column Coverings (Retail Area):
1. Provide 42" height, 16 gauge, Type 304, directional brushed finish, shop- formed
Stainless Steel Column Coverings equal to products fabricated by Acudor Products
Inc., Fairfield NJ (800- 722 -0501; 973 - 575 -5120; e-mail: info @acudor.com).
2. Provide Column Coverings at all exposed, freestanding structural columns, and all
gypsum wallboard- wrapped freestanding columns in the Tenant Space. The top edge
of the Column Covering must be polished or finished so as to provide a rounded or
eased edge; an unfinished, square•edge cut is not acceptable.
3. Secure Column Coverings with construction adhesive and pop rivet fasteners as
detailed on the drawings.
K. Tactile / Detectable Warning Surface Tile: NOT USED
L. Cast -in -place Tactile / Detectable Warning Tiles: NOT USED
M. Surface Applied Tactile / Detectable Warning Surface Tile. NOT USED
N. Toilet Partitions: NOT USED
O. Trench Drain at Loading Dock: NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 "FINAL LAYOUT" STORE FIXTURE PLAN: A "Final Layout" Store Fixture Plan MAY be issued by
PETCO for Final Layout purposes, and MAY be made available for field reference. Information
contained on the "Final Layout" Store Fixture Plan may vary slightly from the Store Fixture Plan
shown on the drawings. In the event of conflict, the information shown on the "Final Layout" Store
Fixture Plan supersedes, unless otherwise directed by the PETCO Project Manager.
3.02 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work described in this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and
proper completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION: The Contractor shall coordinate the interface of the items of this Section with all
affected trades so as to ensure proper and adequate provisions in the work of those trades under
their respective scopes of work. Except where installation is scheduled to be by others, the
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300 - 121611 10300 -14
Contractor shall install the items where shown on the drawings, in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations and the requirements of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, securing all components firmly into position, level and plumb.
END OF SECTION
PETCO- FURNISHED &
PETCO South Tigard, OR CONTRACTOR- PROVIDED ITEMS
10300- 121611 10300 -15
SECTION 10400
EXTERIOR BUILDING & PYLON SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010- Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. PETCO's Vendor will provide the complete prefabricated exterior building and pylon signage
as specified in this Section, and as indicated on the drawings, with supplementary work
provided by the Contractor.
B. Related Work by Contractor:
1. The Contractor shall provide all final electrical connections and materials as required
and called for on the drawings.
2. The Contractor shall provide supplementary roofing flashing and sealant work as
required upon completion of the building signage installation.
3. Exterior Building Signage: The Contractor shall install all (lashings and sealants as
required and called for on the drawings.
4. Pylon Signage: The Contractor shall provide signage footings, foundations and anchor
bolts, as required and called for on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide
underground electrical provisions.
•
1.03 SUBMITTAL: No submittal is required for the work of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PETCO SIGNAGE NATIONAL ACCOUNT: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of
Exterior Building Signage and Pylon Signage with the following PETCO National Account Vendor:
SIGNTECH
Contact: Christine Mello (619- 527 -6100 x134; christine @signtechusa.com)
4444 Federal Blvd., San Diego CA 92012
No product substitution or alternative product supplier is permitted.
2.02 EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE: Typical exterior building signage consist of "PETCO" internally
illuminated channel letters; and "PETCO" logo" graphic box sign cabinet.
2.03 PYLON SIGNAGE: Typical pylon signage consists of silk- screened flex -face or rigid vinyl, internally
illuminated with fluorescent lighting, on aluminum sign cabinet and single support pole.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS: The Contractor shall provide other materials not specifically described but
required for a complete and proper installation of the exterior building and pylon signage system.
EXTERIOR BUILDING
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PYLON SIGNAGE
10400 - 121611 10400 -1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will
be provided; shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of this work;
and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Exterior walls to receive signage shall be completely finished as scheduled.
3.02 ERECTION:
A. Exterior building signage and pylon signage shall be installed by PETCO's Vendor, in
accordance with the sign fabrication drawings, and related Architectural and Structural
drawings.
B. Neither PETCO's Vendor nor the Contractor shall field cut ANY structural members or
signage members.
C. All exterior wall penetrations shown on drawings shall be located and verified by full -size
installation templates furnished by PETCO's Vendor.
D. The Contractor shall provide all interior and rooftop sealant work to close all wall and parapet
openings created by the signage installer for the purpose of the building signage installation.
Wall penetrations shall be sealed, patched, and painted by the Contractor after the work is
completed by PETCO's Vendor.
E. The Contractor shall provide materials and final electrical connections from the point of the
rough wiring and stub -out at the interior face of the exterior wall.
END OF SECTION
•
EXTERIOR BUILDING
PETCO South Tigard, OR & PYLON SIGNAGE
10400 - 121611 10400 -2
SECTION 15255
SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Project Manual
Section, "Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 -
Summary of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. Unless otherwise noted, all plumbing, fire suppression, mechanical and electrical equipment
shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and
mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected
in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonable uniform deflections.
B. All isolators and isolation materials shall be selected and certified using published or factory
certified data. Any variance or noncompliance with these specification requirements shall be
corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner.
C. The Contractor shall provide Seismic Restraints in accordance with applicable seismic code
requirements. The Contractor and subcontractors impacted by this requirement must
determine the applicable local requirements which apply to this project type (Mercantile/
Retail Use or as otherwise designated on the drawings cover sheet at "Code Data ").
1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A. Seismic restraints may not be required for the following in order to meet seismic code
requirements:
1. Gas piping less than 1" I.D. and other piping less than 2 -1/2" I.D.
2. Piping in boiler and mechanical rooms less than 1 -1/4" I.D.
3. All rectangular ducts less than 6 sq.ft. in cross sectional area.
4. All round ducts less than 28" in diameter.
5. All clevis piping suspended by individual hangers 12" in length or less from the top of
the pipe support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
1.04 RELATED WORK: Section 09510- Acoustical Ceiling; Section 15300- Fire Suppression System;
Section 15400- Plumbing Systems; Section 15500- HVAC Systems.
1.05 SUBMITTAL: No product submittal is required for the work of this Section IF provided per the
construction documents. Any Request for Product Substitution must be submitted per Section
01340- Submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER /MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. All vibration isolation mounts shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Acceptable
suppliers are Mason Industries Inc., Peabody Noise Control Inc., Vibration Mountings &
Controls Inc. or Amber/ Booth Company.
1. Manufacturer/ supplier shall determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes
and locations. Provide piping, equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as
required. Provide installation instructions and drawings.
Petco South Tigard, OR (PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs) SEISMIC F
15255- 121611 15255 -1
2. Manufacturer/ supplier shall provide calculations as may be required to determine
restraint loads resulting from seismic forces required by applicable provisions of the
seismic code. Seismic calculations shall be certified by a licensed engineer,
experienced in the design of restraints for flexibly mounted equipment.
2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES:
A. General:
1. All metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out -of -doors shall be cold -dip
galvanized, cadmium plated or neoprene coated after fabrication. Galvanizing shall
meet ASTM Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard No. 144.
2. Labor saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial
lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation
and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. However,
accessories must not degrade the vibration isolation system.
B. Type FSN (Housed Floor Spring and Neoprene):
1. Spring isolators shall be housed single spring mounts for seismic and restrained
service. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the
spring at the design load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal
to 50% of the actual deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ration of
horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately one. All mounts shall have
leveling bolts.
2. The spring element in the isolator shall either be set in a neoprene cup and have a
steel washer to distribute the load evenly over the neoprene or each isolator shall be
mounted on a type DNP isolator. If the DNP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing
plate of sufficient size to load the pad uniformly in the range of 40 to 50 psi shall be
provided. If the spring isolator is supplied with a neoprene friction pad, a stainless
steel, aluminum or galvanized steel plate shall be used between the friction pad and
the type DNP isolator. The type DNP isolator, separator plate and friction pad shall be
permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the bearing plate.
3. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building structure and a type DNP isolator is used
under the bearing plate, neoprene grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in the •
base plate. The hold down bolt assembly shall include washers to distribute load
evenly to the grommet. Bolts and washers are to be galvanized.
4. Type FSN isolators shall be equal to Mason Model "SSLFH" with the appropriate
neoprene pad (if used) selected from type DNP or approved equal.
C. Type FN (Floor Neoprene): Neoprene isolators shall be neoprene -in -shear type with steel
reinforced top and base with a minimum static deflection of 0.35 ". All metal surfaces shall be
covered with neoprene. The top and bottom surfaces shall be ribbed. Bolt holes shall be
provided in the base and the top shall have a threaded fastener. The mounts shall include
leveling bolts that may be rigidly connected to the equipment. Type FN isolators shall be
equal to Mason Model "ND ".
D. Type DNP (Neoprene Pad): neoprene pad isolators shall be of 3/4" thick waffled neoprene in
2" square modules separated by a thin web. Provide load distribution plate as required. Type
DNP isolators shall be equal to Mason Model "Super W ".
E. Type HS (Hanger Spring): Vibration isolation hangers shall consist of a freestanding laterally
stable steel spring set into a neoprene cup, contained within a steel housing. The neoprene
cup shall be manufactured with a grommet (or other means) to prevent the hanger rod from
contacting the hanger housing. A steel washer shall be provided in the neoprene cup to
evenly distribute load onto the neoprene. Spring diameter and hanger housing lower hole
Petco South Tigard, OR (PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs) SEISMIC
15255 - 121611 15255 -2
sizes shall, be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 °arc before
contacting the housing. Spring elements shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal
to 50% of the actual deflection. Type HS isolators shall be equal to Mason Type 30.
F. Type HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene or Glass Fiber): Vibration isolation hangers shall
consist of a freestanding, laterally stable steel spring and a neoprene or a glass fiber element
in series, contained within a steel housing. A neoprene neck bushing (or other means) shall
be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger housing. Spring diameters and
hanger housing lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing
through a 30° arc before contacting the housing. Spring elements shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the actual deflection. The neoprene element shall be
designed to have a 0.3" minimum static deflection. Type HSN isolators shall be equal to
Mason Type 30N.
G. Type HN (Hanger neoprene or Glass Fiber): Vibration isolation hangers shall consist of a
neoprene -in -shear or glass fiber element contained in a steel housing. A neoprene neck
bushing (or other means) shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger
housing to prevent the rod from contacting the hanger housing. The diameter of the hold in
the housing shall be sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before
contacting the hanger housing. Type HN isolators shall be equal to Mason Model "HD ".
2.03 EQUIPMENT BASES:
A. Type BC (Base- Curb):
1. Type BC vibration isolation curb bases shall be equal to Mason Model "CMAB ", curb
type isolation bases. Spring isolators shall be selected and positioned along the curb to
achieve the minimum static deflection called for in the schedule; the static deflection
shall be constant around the entire periphery of the base. Springs shall be
freestanding, laterally stable with a diameter of not less than 0.8 times the compressed
height, and have additional travel to solid that is at least 50% of the actual deflection.
Resilient neoprene snubbers shall be provided at the corners of the base to limit
movement of equipment under wind load to 1/4 ".
2. The isolation curb base shall be made weathertight by sealing all around the periphery
with closed cell neoprene or flexible vinyl. A closed cell sponge gasket or field caulking
shall be used between the equipment unit and isolation curb for a weathertight seal.
B. Type BSF (Base -Steel Frame): Type BSF bases shall be equal to Mason Model "WFSL ".
Steel base frames shall consist of structural steel sections sized, spaced and connected to
form a rigid base which will not twist, rack, deform or deflect in any manner which will
negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts.
The thickness of steel frame bases shall be at least 1/10 the longest dimension of the base
but not more than 12 ".
C. Type BK (Inertia Pad): Type BK bases shall be equal to Mason Model "K ". Type BK shall
consist of rectangular structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations. The
base depth need not exceed 12" unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer
for mass or rigidity. In general, bases shall be a minimum of 1/12` of the longest dimension
of the base, but not less than 6 ". Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement
consisting of 1 /2" rebars or angles welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a layer
1 -1/2" above the bottom, or additional steel as is required by the structural conditions. Forms
shall be furnished with steel members to hold anchor -bolt sleeves when the anchor bolts fall
in concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to
maintain a 1 inch clearance below the base.
Petco South Tigard, OR (PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs) SEISMIC F
15255 - 121611 15255 -3
2.04 SEISMIC RESTRAINING TYPES:
A. General: Restraints shall be capable of safely accepting 0.5 G external forces without failure,
or 1.0 G for life safety equipment. Restraints shall maintain equipment, piping and ducts in a
captive position. Restraints shall not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit
objectionable vibration or noise. Restraints shall be provided on all equipment as scheduled
on drawings or as may be otherwise required by the local jurisdiction.
B. Spring Seismic Restraint, Type I: Provide equal to Mason Model "SSLFH ". Restraints shall
comply with general characteristics of spring isolators have minimum O. D. to O. H. of 0.8 to
1 and minimum runout of 50% to solid. Restraints shall incorporate snubbing restraint in all
directions. Restraints shall be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during
equipment erection. Cast or aluminum housings, unless ductile iron, are not acceptable.
System to be field bolted or welded to deck with 1.0 G acceleration capability.
C. Seismic Restraint, Type II: Provide equal to Mason Model Z -10 -11 and Z -1225. Each corner
or side shall incorporate a seismic restraint having a minimum 5/8: thick resilient pad limit
stops working in all directions. Restraints shall be made of plate, structural members or
square metal tubing concentric within a welded assembly incorporating resilient pads. Angle
bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with 1.0 G
acceleration capability.
D. Seismic Restraint, Type III: provide equal to Mason Model SCB. Metal cable type with
approved and fastening devices to equipment and structure. System to be field bolted to deck
or overhead structural members using two -sided beam clamps to steel or appropriately
designed insert for concrete. All parts of system including cables and clamps, (excluding
fastenings) are to be single vendor furnished to assure seismic compliance.
E. Seismic Restraint, Type IV: Provide equal to Mason Model BR, RBA. Double deflection
neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing minimum 0.30 static deflection.
System to be field bolted or welded to deck with 1.0 G acceleration capacity.
F. Seismic Restraint, Type V: Non - isolated equipment to be field bolted or welded (powder
shots not accepted) to resist seismic forces unless under 100% shear force is required.
2.05 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS:
•
A. Type K:
1. Flexible EPDM connectors shall be used on all equipment as indicated on the
Drawings and as on the equipment schedule. Connectors shall be manufactured of
multiple plys of friction nylon tire cord with an EPDM cover and liner. No steel wire or
rings shall be used as internal pressure reinforcement. Straight connectors shall have
two spheres with a centered molded -in external ductile iron ring to maintain the two .
spherical shapes. Two -inch and smaller sizes may have threaded ends. Floating
flanges shall have a recess to lock the bead wire in the raised EPDM flanges. Tapered
twin sphere connectors as described above shall be used where line size changes are
required in straight piping runs.
2. Twin sphere connectors shall have a minimum rating of 250 psi at 179 °F. and 165 psi
at 250 °F. Elbows and reducing twin spheres shall have a minimum pressure rating of
220 psi at 170 °F and 145 psi at 250° F. Neoprene materials shall be limited to 220° F.
Certified safety factors shall be a nominal 4 to 1 with minimum acceptable test results
of 3.6 to 1. Tests shall cover burst, flange leakage, extension without control rods and
flange retention at 50% OF BURST PRESSURE WITHOUT CONTROL RODS.
Petco South Tigard, OR (PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs) SEISMIC
15255- 121611 15255 -4
3. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants showing minimum
reduction of 20DB in vibration accelerations and 10DB in sound pressure levels at
typical blade passage frequencies.
4. Twin sphere, reducing twin sphere and reducing elbows shall be Superflex MFTNC or
MFTFU, MFTCR and MFLRR; standard radius equal elbows Mason -Flex MFNEC;
control rods Type ACR, as manufactured by Mason Industries Inc.
• 2.06 PIPE ANCHORS: Type PA: Provide an all directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a
telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of
heavy duty neoprene material. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to
prevent vertical travel in either direction. All directional anchors shall be equal to Mason type 'ADA'.
2.07 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE:
ISOLATOR MIN. STATIC BASE
UNIT TYPE DEFL. (IN) TYPE REMARKS
Air Handling Unit
Fan on Floor & Grade FSN 1 5" --
In -Line Return & Exhaust Fans
Fan Coils Hung from Structure HSN 1 5" --
Air Handling Unit Fans
Hung from Structure HSN 1.5" - --
Pumps on Grade FSN 0.75" BSF
Pumps on Suspended Floors FSN 1.5" BSF
Curb Mounted Exhaust Internal Neoprene
Fans <1 HP — -- -- Grommets
Curb Mounted Exhaust
Fans >1 HP — 1.0" BC
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION: Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as expansion tanks shall be
vibration isolated from the building structure by Type NH isolators unless their position in the piping
system requires higher degrees of isolation.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT:
A. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Isolation Mounts:
1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the
supported equipment.
2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are
parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical
constraints.
3. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad
and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the pad.
• 4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or
joints; not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate support
members as necessary. •
5. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the
hanger rod assembly but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the
hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees without contacting any object.
6. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze which is isolated from the
building. Isolator deflections must be the largest determined by the provisions for pipe
isolation. Do not mix isolated and non - isolated pipes on the same trapeze.
Petco South Tigard, OR (PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs) SEISMIC F
15255- 121611 15255 -5
7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported by other pipes or equipment.
8. Resiliently isolated pipes shall not contact any rigid building structure or equipment.
9. The installed and operating heights of vibration isolated equipment mounted on Unit
FSNTL isolators shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during operation.
10. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so the isolated equipment is level and in
proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.
11. Vertical pipe risers shall be supported by or suspended from Type HSN hangers and -
piping anchored or guided with type PA anchors.
12. Plumbing water piping in mechanical rooms shall be suspended from Type HSN
hangers.
3.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR NON - ISOLATED EQUIPMENT:
A. Plumbing:
1. All ceiling suspended piping not excluded by diameter or distance requirement from
support, and ceiling mounted equipment: Seismic Restraint Type III.
2. All floor mounted equipment, including but not limited to tanks, domestic water heaters,
etc: Seismic Restraint Type V.
•
B. Mechanical Equipment:
1. All ceiling suspended piping and ductwork not excluded by diameter or distance
requirement from support: Seismic Restraint Type III.
2. All ceiling mounted equipment including, but not limited to, fans, AHU's, tanks, stacks,
VAV boxes, and unit heaters: Seismic Restraint Type III.
3. All floor mounted equipment: Seismic Restraint Type V.
END OF SECTION
Petco South Tigard, OR (PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs) SEISMIC
15255- 121611 15255 -6
SECTION 15300
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
•
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Project Manual
Section, "Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 -
Summary of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
• 1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide a Fire Suppression System where shown on the drawings, as
specified in this section, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but
not necessarily limited to:
1. Applications and fees for all plumbing permits, services, and inspections.
2. Obtain Flow Test data.
3. Shop drawings.
4. Sprinkler piping systems complete with valves, fittings, and specialties.
5. Sprinklers.
6. Alarm check valve.
7. Backflow prevention device (as may be required by the local jurisdiction).
8. Detector check valve (as may be required by the local jurisdiction).
9. Draining and testing piping.
10. • Fire department connection.
11. Valve supervisory switches.
12. Water flow detecting alarm.
13. Access door for valves, etc., as required.
14. Concrete pads and pits as required.
15. All necessary hangers, inserts, and incidentals as required for a complete system.
16. Seismic Restraints (as may be required by the local jurisdiction).
17. Testing and adjusting of the Fire Suppression System.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Refer to Section 09900- Painting for description of paint work related to exposed overhead
Fire Suppression System piping. All exposed overhead Fire Suppression System piping and
supports shall be dry-fall painted to match adjacent painted exposed surfaces.
B. Refer to Section 15255- Seismic Restraints.
1.04 SUBMITTAL: Submit Fire Suppression Shop Drawings; Hydraulic Calculations; and Fire
Suppression Product Data per Section 01340- Submittals requirements, in adequate detail to
demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire Suppression System Layout:
1. The Contractor may request a Reflected Ceiling Plan CAD file (prepared in AutoCAD
format) from the Petco Project Manager and the Petco Tenant Improvement Architect,
via e-mail:
•
Abena St. Luce
ast.luce @sblm.com
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
15300 - 121611 15300 -1
•
The Petco Tenant Improvement Architect should provide the requested CAD file within
•
two working days of the Contractor's request.
2. The Architect will provide the most current Reflected Ceiling Plan information available
at the time of the Contractor's request for the Reflected Ceiling Plan CAD file. Should a
subsequent Construction Bulletin be issued that impacts the fire suppression system
layout, it is Contractor's responsibility to request a revised, updated CAD file from
the Architect.
B. Codes and Regulations:
1. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be licensed with applicable state and local
jurisdictions, and evidence of the ability of this contractor to provide work of this scope
shall be provided to the PETCO Project Manager upon request.
2. The Contractor shall apply for, pay for and obtain all necessary permits and fees
required by any applicable state and local jurisdictions, including all connection
charges and fees.
3. The following specifications are minimum requirements and shall govern, except that
applicable building codes, Underwriter Laboratory requirements and /or drawings shall
govern when the requirements are in excess hereof.
4. All work shall be in accordance with the "Standards of the National Fire Protection
Association for Installation of Sprinkler and Systems ", NFPA 13 (latest edition), as
referenced in the design criteria shown on the prototype fire suppression system
drawings, the local fire marshal, and any other authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Make all necessary arrangements, give all notices and obtain all permits required by
the utilities companies for connection to water main and for installation of detector
check valves, backflow preventers, vaults, etc., in order to provide a complete system.
6. Prepare all necessary shop drawings and complete hydraulic calculations required for
this sprinkler system installation. Drawings and calculations shall be reviewed and
approved by the local fire department, the State Insurance Governing Board, and all
other authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire suppression system piping with visible rust, labels or surface dirt shall be cleaned prior to
painting in accordance with Section 09900- Painting surface preparation requirements. Piping
with visible rust, labels or surface dirt which are not otherwise painted, such as semi -
concealed piping, shall be cleaned free of rust, labels and surface dirt.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The Contractor shall provide all required materials, new and in conformance with the
requirements of the local jurisdiction.
B. Piping and fittings:
1. Piping: Provide Schedule 40 black steel ASTM A135 for all threaded piping. Schedule
10 lightwall piping (Grooved Piping Only) ASTM A135 is •permitted for sizes 8" and
smaller, only where allowed by NFPA 13, and only where not subject to physical
damage during activity within a retail store. In no case will wall thickness less than
Schedule 10 be allowed.
2. Fittings: Provide forged steel screwed, cast iron screwed, or mechanical grooved
couplings with composition sealing gasket and steel fastening hardware.
C. Valves: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) approved by 175 PSI design.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
15300 - 121611 15300 -2
•
1. Control Valves: Provide rising system (OS &Y) iron body, bronze mounted. Milwaukee
No. F -4 or approved equal.
2. Drain Valves: Provide angle or globe pattern type, screwed with brass bodies and
trimmings and iron wheeled handles.
3. Check Valves: Provide iron body with bronze swing disc and hinge for 175 psi water
working pressure. Viking Model "D ".
4. Waterflow: Provide Potter VSR Water Flow Switch with two sets of contacts.
5. Ball Drip: Note that check valve in Fire Department Siamese Connection shall be
tapped for 3/4" ball drip. Siamese connection line shall be tapped for 3/4" ball drip and
shall be furnished with Star automatic ball drip valve.
D. Sprinkler Heads: Provide Viking automatic spray sprinklers upright or pendant with orifice as
required and of the required temperature rating as manufactured by the Viking Corporation,
Hastings, Michigan or approved equal. Stock of extra sprinklers (6 of each type used),
wrench and locking cabinet shall be provided. Sprinkler heads occurring in areas that have
finished ceilings shall be recessed type with white escutcheons (provide quick response
where required). Sprinkler heads in toilet areas and areas with surface mounted lighting
fixtures on ceiling shall be pendent type with extended chrome escutcheons (provide quick
response where required) Finish on pendent heads shall be chrome. Sprinkler heads shall be
UL listed and FM approved. Provide high temperature sprinklers in areas where required
such as unit heaters etc.
E. Detector Check: Provide a detector check in the sprinkler system water main. Detector check
shall be Viking Model "E" complete with by -pass, shutoff valve, magnetic line disc meter and
swing check valve, where required by the administrative authority.
F. Provide water flow detectors in the sprinkler system mains where shown. Detectors shall be
installed in the mains at the point of entry into the building. Detectors shall be Potter Model
"VSR -D ", vane type, and shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal
piping. Detectors shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that
changes the direction of water flow. Detectors shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any •
flow of water that equals or exceeds the discharge from one sprinkler head. Detector switch
mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an
adjustable range of 0 to 60 seconds. Switches shall have a minimum rated capacity of 7 amp,
125 volts, AC 0.25 amp, 24 volts DC and shall be actuated by a polyethylene vane extending
into the waterway of the piping. Detectors shall be weatherproof, dust tight construction, and
shall be provided with a 3/4" conduit entrance. Detectors shall be finished with a tamperproof
bolt that requires the use of a special wrench for removal. Detectors shall be Underwriters
Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. Flow detectors will be wired into the
building fire alarm system by the security alarm contractor.
G. Provide supervisory switches for all sprinkler system OS &Y gate valves. Supervisory
switches shall be Potter Model OSYSU -2, or approved equal. Switches shall be mounted
such that they do not interfere with the normal operation of the valve and shall be adjusted to
operate within two revolutions of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than
one -fifth of the distance from its normal position. The switch mechanism shall be contained in
a weatherproof die cast aluminum housing that shall provide a 3/4" tapped conduit entrance
and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. Switch housings shall be
finished in red baked enamel. The switch mechanism shall have a minimum rated capacity of
7 amp, 125 volt AC — 02.25 amp, 25 DC. The entire installed assembly shall be tamperproof
and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is
removed from its mounting. Gate valve switches shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed
and Factory Mutual approved. Valve supervisory switches will be wired into the Building Fire
Alarm System by the security alarm contractor.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
15300- 121611 15300 -3
•
H. Test the sprinkler system as required by and in the presence of representatives of agencies
having jurisdiction. Conduct, duration and other details of tests not covered by agencies'
requirements shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide instruments, equipment, pay
expenses incurred in making tests; obtain approvals and certificates. Where evidence of
stoppage appears in piping or equipment, disconnect, clean, repair, reconnect obstructed
parts; bear cost of cutting and patching adjoining work necessitated by such cleaning,
repairing.
•
I. An indicating control valve must be located within 2 feet of the water entry into the building. A
means for draining all trapped piping must be provided as required by NFPA 13.
J. Double Check Valve Backflow Preventer shall be furnished and installed in the location
where required by administrative authority. The backflow preventer shall be such as Ames
3000SS, complete with OS &Y gate valves each side of backflow preventer. The upstream
OS &Y gate valve shall be tapped for 3/4" corporation stop furnished with backflow preventer.
K. Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer shall be furnished and installed in the
location as required by the administrative authority. The reduced pressure back flow
preventer shall be such as Watts Model 909, complete with OS &Y gate valves and supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Sprinkler system shall conform to all requirements of the local ordinances and governing
bodies or agencies. System shall be installed in accordance with approved drawings.
B. Excavating, trench work and backfilling required for the installation of the work shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of governing authorities.
C. Piping shall be run concealed in all finished areas and shall be sleeved and sealed at all wall,
ceiling and floor penetrations. Care shall be taken to support mains from adequate structural
members.
D. Piping run in exposed construction areas shall be run at the bottom chord of the roof joists for
laterals and against walls for drops and rises.
E. Sprinkler Heads: Sprinkler heads shall be located to clear all lights and air conditioning
devices and equipment and shall be spaced so as to provide a symmetrical ceiling pattern in
finished ceiling areas. The drawings indicate sprinkler head locations. This pattern is a
straight -line arrangement in both direction of the room and shall be followed unless local
jurisdiction, code or rule supersedes.
F. Do all cutting, chipping, digging and drilling under the supervision of the Contractor as may
be necessary for the proper installation of the work specified or shown. Make certain all
chases, shafts and openings are properly located.
G. Any and all electrical work, conduits, wires, devices, equipment and connections of alarms,
etc. required in conjunction with the above systems shall be furnished under other parts of
these specifications.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
15300 - 121611 15300 -4
3.03 VALVE SEALS, SIGNS, TAGS & CHARTS: Provide copper wire and approved seals for manually
operated shut -off valves required to be sealed in "OPEN" position. Provide identification signs of
standard design and fasten securely at designated locations as per NFPA13. Tags shall be
fastened to all control valves.
3.04 EQUIPMENT AND EXTRA HEADS: This work includes furnishing and installing a plastic cabinet
(with cover) on the wall near the A.S.R. and 48" above the floor containing six extra sprinkler heads
of each type used along with a proper wrench.
3.05 FINAL CLEANING:
A. Piping shall be cleaned free of visible rust, labels or surface dirt.
B. After the sprinkler installation has been completed, tested, and approved, the Contractor
shall remove all oil and grease from piping, heads, and other visible parts of the fire
suppression system and shall leave the system in a neat, clean, and workmanlike manner.
C. Exposed Fire Suppression System piping shall be painted per Section 09900- Painting.
D. After inspection of this work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises and legally
dispose of all Fire Suppression System waste material and construction debris.
END OF SECTION
•
•
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
15300- 121611 15300 -5
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to, Section 01010 - Summary
• of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide Plumbing Systems as shown on the drawings and as specified
in this Section including, but not necessarily limited to:
1. Applications and fees required for plumbing permits, utility services, and interim and
final inspections.
2. Coordination with utility companies for utility services.
3. Temporary water provisions as required for construction purposes.
4. Excavation and backfill, concrete pads and pits for plumbing systems work.
5. Domestic hot and cold water piping systems, including backflow preventers. By
definition, the word "piping" in this Section means completely assembled pipe, fittings,
nipples and valves.
6. Drain, waste and vent systems.
7. Gas piping system and final gas connections to HVAC equipment.
8. Plumbing fixtures, fittings, valves, access panels and accessory items.
9. Sterilization of the potable water system.
10. Cathodic and dielectric protection.
11. Seismic Restraints (as may be required by the local jurisdiction).
12. Cutting and patching, testing, adjusting and balancing.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 07720 -Roof Accessories; rooftop gas piping mounting pedestals.
B. Section 15255 - Seismic Restraints
C. Work by Others: Parts of the building Plumbing Systems in the Aquarium Area will be
provided by PETCO Vendor(s) in contract agreements directly with PETCO, with
supplementary work by the Contractor. Refer to Section 10300- PETCO- Furnished &
Contractor - Provided Items.
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Prepare submittals and any Request for Product Substitutions per Section 01340 -
Submittals. The Contractor shall provide the following:
A. Floor Drains and Hair Interceptor Product Data.
B. Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings Product Data.
C. Piping Materials Product Data.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. All materials, apparatus, equipment and installation shall comply with the most stringent
standards between applicable building and plumbing codes and ordinances, State Industrial
Accident Commission, Underwriters' Laboratory and National Board of Fire Underwriters.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -1
B. Drawings and Coordination:
1. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions governing the plumbing work in the building.
Because of the scale of the plumbing drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings, and accessories that may be required to meet all conditions. The Contractor
shall examine adjoining work, on which plumbing work is dependent for proper
operation, and must report any work that must be corrected.
2. If the proposed equipment requires structural, mechanical or electrical space
conditions than those shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall allow for the cost of
such modifications in the contract sum. No waiver of responsibility for defective work
shall be accepted due to failure to record and accommodate unfavorable conditions.
C. Roof Penetration: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all roof penetrations so that
the roof warranty is NOT altered, modified, or voided.
1.06 WARRANTY /CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall include a copy of the manufacturer's product
warranties in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted to PETCO per Section 01700 -
Contract Closeout.
B. Building Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall include Plumbing Systems instructional
and maintenance information per Section 01700- Contract Closeout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOMESTIC AND FILTERED WATER SYSTEM:
A. Copper Water Lines: Provide Type "L" hard drawn, meeting ASTM B88 -7, for all water pipe
above concrete or ground. Provide Type "K" hard drawn, meeting ASTM B88 -7, for water
pipe set in or under concrete or in the ground. Wrap lines below concrete floors with 5 mils
polyethylene tape, and insulate with Armaflex insulation. No fittings shall be under the slab.
B. Fittings: Provide wrought copper meeting ANSI B16.18 and ANSI B16.22.
C. Identification: Type "K" Copper (Color Green), and Type "L" Copper (Color Blue).
2.02. GAS PIPING SYSTEM (WHERE APPLICABLE):
A. Provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe meeting ASTM Al20 and ASTM A53 with extra -heavy
malleable iron banded thread fittings. Unions shall be ground iron to bronze seat. Plug valves
to be Rockwell- Nordstrom No. 142. Provide extra -heavy black malleable iron banded fittings,
with screwed or weld pattern for pipes 3" and smaller, welded for 4" and larger. Factory spiral
wrapped in two directions, using Scotch Wrap 10 mil tape with one inch overlap for all
underground piping. Provide drip legs on all mains and risers and at equipment connections,
and gas cocks at all equipment connections.
B. Rooftop Piping Supports: Refer to Section 07720 -Roof Accessories. Wood blocking with pipe
clamps is NOT an acceptable means of supporting horizontal gas piping located on the roof.
2.03 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM: -
A. Waste & Vent Lines:
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -2
•
•
1. Cast Iron - Aboveground: Provide cast iron, standard weight, no -hub soil and vent pipe,
coated inside and out, meeting CISPI 301 -69T, for all soil and waste lines above
ground and for all vent lines with inside diameter 2 inches and larger.
2. Cast Iron -Under Building: Service weight cast iron pipe with bell and spigot joints and
fittings. Underground pipe may be installed with "Tyseal" gaskets.
a. Where allowable by the applicable plumbing code, plastic DWV piping may be used
under slab and where concealed by walls. No PVC piping shall be installed in
exposed areas or in areas that may be considered a plenum. PVC -DWV plastic pipe
for sanitary drainage and vent and storm drainage systems shall meet ASTM D1784,
ASTM D2665, and Fed. Spec. L- P -320a Pipe and Fittings, Plastic (Polyvinyl Chloride,
PVC Drain, Waste and Vent). Pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall be equal to
products by Celanese Piping Systems.
2.04 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM (WHERE APPLICABLE):
A. Storm drainage system piping above ground, including offsets in walls and furred spaces,
shall be standard weight cast iron hub and spigot, or no -hub with stainless steel coupling and
neoprene rubber seals. Above ground storm drainage piping shall be fully insulated.
B. Where allowable by local and national codes, plastic DWV piping may be used under slab by
walls. No PVC piping shall be installed in exposed areas or in areas that may be considered
a plenum. PVC -DWV plastic pipe for sanitary drainage and vent and storm drainage systems
shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1784, ASTM D2665, and Federal Specification L -P-
320a. Pipe and Fittings, Plastic (Polyvinyl Chloride, PVC Drain, Waste and Vent). Pipe,
fittings, and solvent cement shall be equal to products by Celanese Piping Systems.
C. Provide dome strainer for all roof drains, including those existing to remain.
2.05 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS:
A. Rooftop Piping Supports: Refer to Section 07720 -Roof Accessories. Wood blocking with pipe
clamps is NOT an acceptable means of supporting horizontal gas piping located on the roof.
B. Pipe Hanger Maximum Spacing:
1. Steel Pipe: 1 -1/4" and smaller, 8' -0" OC; 1 -1/2" and larger, 10' -0" OC.
2. Copper Tubing: 1 -1/4" and smaller, 6' -0" OC; 1 -1/2" and larger, 10' -0" OC.
3. Plastic Pipe (Where Allowed): 1 -1/2" and smaller; 3' -0" OC; 2" and larger, 4' -0" OC.
C. Isolaters: Install Trisolator #500 isolators around all uninsulated copper lines at hangers.
!Install dielectric fitting between all ferrous and non - ferrous piping with a 12" section of red
brass pipe.
D. Hanger Size: Size hangers on insulated lines to fit around outside diameter of insulation with
allowance for sheet metal shield. Pipe shield shall be sized as 1/3 the circumference of the
insulation with length of not less than 3 times the diameter of the insulation (maximum 24 ").
Acceptable manufacturers: Grinnell, Grabler, Fee & Mason, Elcen.
E. Overhead Supported: Each horizontal pipe shall be supported on adjustable wrought iron
clevis hangers equal to Grinnell, Figure 260, except that groups of pipes shall be supported
on trapeze hangers made up of steel rods and steel channels or angles. Pipe shall be "U"
bolted to trapeze and trapeze spaced for the smallest pipe in the group.
D. Wall Supported: Horizontal piping on walls shall be supported by cast iron bracket equal to
Grinnell Figure 213, with Figure 260 Clevis type hanger attached.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -3
E. Vertical Piping: Support at floor level with supports equal to Grinnell Figure 261.
•
F. Inserts: Inserts in concrete shall be equal to Grinnell Figure 281.
2.06 VALVES & ACCESSORIES:
A. Provide Valves to control hot and cold water branches to each group of fixtures, and to
individual fixtures and equipment. Where used with chrome plated pipe, valves shall be
chrome plated.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milwaukee, Crane Jenkens, Walworth, Kennedy,
Stockham, Nibco- Scott.
2. Gate Valves: Milwaukee #1145, 125# bronze body, solder type gate valve with non -
rising stem for all lines up to 4 inches in diameter.
3. Check Valves: Milwaukee #1508, 125# bronze body, solder type check valve with
horizontal bronze disc for all valves up to 2 inches in diameter. Milwaukee #2974, 125#
iron body, bronze trimmed, flanged horizontal check valve for all valves larger than 2 ".
4. Balancing Valve: Milwaukee #1350, 125# bronze body, solder joint balancing valve.
5. Plug Valves: Rockwell- Nordstrom #142 (2" lines and smaller) and #143 (2 -1/2" and
larger); with lubricated plug valve for natural gas service.
6. Globe Valves: Milwaukee #1502, 125# bronze body, solder joints, with bronze disc
. when up to 2" in diameter.
7. Ball Valves: Nibco -Scott #T595, or #S595, 150# bronze body, chrome plated ball,
telfon seats.
8. Gas Valves: Rockwell- Nordstrom #143 with #555 lubricant for natural gas service.
B. Valve Boxes: Mueller #H- 10360, Size 564 S, screw type, 5 -1/4" shaft with "WATER" cast in
lid.
C. Trap Primers: Provide automatic trap primer on cold water supply at nearest fixture and run
drain to trap seal being protected. Provide Access Panel where concealed in walls.
D. Backflow Preventer: Provide reduced pressure principle Backflow Preventer on domestic
water lateral to the building if required by the local jurisdiction. Backflow Preventer shall be
equal to Watts #909.
E. Air Cushions and Shock Absorbers: Provide full size vertical air cushion not less than 12
inches long and 1 inch pipe size, shock absorbers at each hot and cold water connection to a
fixture or faucet, equal to Zurn #A -1700 size 400, Josam #14800 or Wade #W -20.
F. Vacuum Breakers: Provide on faucets, hydrants, and other water discharge points with
threaded hose connector, where shown on drawings or required by applicable Code, equal to
Watts #8 -A. Vaccum Breakers for general piping application shall be equal to Watts #288A.
2.07 TRAPS:
A. All fixtures and floor drains are to be separately trapped as near to the fixture or floor drain as
possible. Traps shall be self - cleaning, water - sealed, and shall have a scouring action. Traps
shall be set true with respect to water seal and shall be protected from freezing. All
underground traps, except "P" traps into which floor drains with removable strainers
discharge, shall be provided with accessible cleanouts. Traps which are not part of plumbing
fixtures shall be of the same material and size as pipes or branches into which they
discharge. All traps shall be installed with provision for cleaning.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -4
B. Traps exposed above the floor shall be chrome plated adjustable brass, with chrome plated
approved cleanout plugs, cast set screw wall escutcheon and casing.
2.08 CLEANOUTS:
A. Where indicated on the drawings and as required by the local jurisdiction. Make all cleanouts
accessible by one of the following means:
1. Within 6 inches from ceiling access panel.
2. Extending to floor or grade above.
3. Locate in wall with removable plate.
B. Cleanouts CANNOT be located in areas where Epoxy Flooring is scheduled.
C. Size: Same as pipe on which installed.
D. Installation: Covers set flush with finished wall, floor or grade, to be securely anchored by
means of integral lugs or bolts. Where surfacing materials such as resilient flooring is used,
install the clean out with top so that finished surface is smooth and flush.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, Wade, Jay R. Smith.
F. Floor Cleanouts and Access Covers: Figure 4020 with Duco coated cast iron body and frame
with "Leckeromated" plug and heavy duty adjustable scoriated secured nickel bronze top.
G. Cleanout to Grade with Countersunk Plug: Figure 4283 with Duco- coated cast iron body with
bronze taper thread countersunk plug. Installed in 24" - x 24" concrete pad, tapered for
drainage.
H. Wall Cleanouts: Figure 4710 stainless steel chrome plated bronze deep cover with center
screw.
2.09 FLOOR DRAINS: Floor drains shall be by Jay R. Smith, Zurn, Josam or Wade, as scheduled.
2.10 VENTS THROUGH ROOF: Offset vents through roof as required to maintain a minimum distance
of 10 feet away from outside air intakes.
2.11 PIPING INSULATION:
•
A. Provide piping insulation for domestic hot, tempered, filtered and cold water lines,
condensate and rainwater conductor piping, continuous through wall and ceiling openings
and sleeves. No insulation shall be installed on any piping before the building is adequately
closed in.
B. Materials and Installation: No pipe insulation shall be applied until piping has been pressure
tested and approved. All insulation shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Insulation Products by Johns Manville, Phillip Carey or
Armstrong will be acceptable if equal to those specified. All insulation on indoor work shall
have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 255 not
exceeding Flame Spread 25, Fuel Contributed 50, Smoke Developed 50. Accessories, such
as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, and cloth for fitting, shall have the same component
ratings as listed above. Insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed
0.25 BTU /inch of thickness per square foot per 1 degree F. at a mean temperature of 75
degrees F.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -5
C. Hot, Cold, Filtered, Tempered Water Piping: Insulate with 1" thick fiberglass pipe insulated
with foil -kraft laminate vapor barrier fastened with pressure sensitive tape and stapled. All
fittings, valves and flanges shall be covered with PVC fitting cover, taped and tacked
fastened.
D. Rainwater Conductor Insulation: Provide insulation where rainwater conductors run inside the
building.
E. Condensate Line Insulation: Provide insulation where condensate lines run inside the
building.
F. Scald Guard at Handicap Accessible Lavatories: Provide "Handi Lay- Guard" Kit No. 101,
Color White, by Truebro Inc., Ellington CT (203/ 875 -2868) at each handicap accessible
lavatory.
2.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. Provide Plumbing Fixtures per Plumbing Fixture Schedule, complete with trim and caulk.
1. Vitreous fixtures shall be Class "A" vitreous. All surfaces that contact walls, floors, or
surfaces of other fixtures shall be ground free of defects affecting the final fittings of the
fixture. Warped, imperfect fixtures are NOT acceptable.
2. All Plumbing Fixtures supported from walls shall be provided with manufactured fixture
carriers, or with 6" high x 3/8" thick x (length required) steel plates, welded to structural
framing and tapped for plumbing fixture bolts.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
2.13 ACCESS PANELS:
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish Access Panel for the Contractor's installation in
finished work, for concealed valves, cleanouts, and other parts of the Plumbing Systems that
require access for maintenance and repair.
•
B. Access Panels shall be properly sized for servicing terms requiring access, minimum size 18"
x 18 ", 13 GA primed flush steel door and trim, concealed hinges and screwdriver operated
via stainless steel cam lock. Access Panels are not required at suspended acoustical
ceilings.
C. Access Panel locations shall be verified with the PETCO Project Manager prior to installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PLUMBING SYSTEM LAYOUT: Layout the plumbing system per the drawings, determining proper
elevations for all components of the system and using only the minimum number of bends to
produce a properly operating system. Follow the general layout shown on the drawings in all cases
except where other work may interfere. Layout pipe runs to fall within the partition, wall or roof
cavities, with no additional furring other than as specifically shown on the drawings. Coordinate
floor and wall cleanout locations with the drawings and the PETCO Project Manager. Cleanouts
CANNOT be located in areas where Epoxy Flooring is scheduled.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400 - 121611 15400 -6
3.03 DEMOLITION & PATCHING: No structural member shall be cut without the written consent of the
Structural Engineer of Record. All finish surfaces requiring demolition and patching for Plumbing
Systems work shall be restored to match the adjacent finish.
3.04 TRENCHING & BACKFILLING:
A. Provide trenching and backfilling per Section 02220 - Trenching.
B. Cut bottom of trenches to grade. Make trenches 12" wider than the greatest pipe dimension.
C. Bedding and Backfilling: When under the floor slab, install pipes on a 6" bed of damp sand.
Backfill to the bottom of the slab with damp sand. When beyond the building, install
underground piping on a 6" bed of damp sand. Backfill to within 12" of finish grade with damp
sand. Backfill remainder with native soil.
3.05 PIPING & EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt until
fixtures are installed and final connections have been made. Protect finish surfaces to
prevent damage during construction.
2. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing
windows, doors and other openings.
3. Run horizontal sanitary and storm drainage piping at a uniform grade of 1/4" per foot,
unless otherwise noted. Run horizontal water piping with an adequate pitch upwards in
direction of flow to allow complete drainage.
• 4. Support piping independently at pumps, coils, tanks, and similar locations, so that the
weight of the piping is not supported by the equipment. Do not use wire for hanging
pipes.
5. Provide union and shut -off valves to facilitate removal of equipment and apparatus.
6. Provide all work to permit expansion and contraction of piping systems.
7. Provide all plumbing and piping connections to equipment furnished by PETCO,
including rough -in work, P- traps, waste tubing, stops and flexible tube riser, and final
connections. Make final connections to HVAC Systems equipment. Provide valves or
fixtures stops, ahead of all equipment and on all stub outs.
8. Equipment Access: Install piping, equipment, and accessories to permit access for
maintenance where required. Provide Access Panels as required and verify acceptable
locations with the PETCO Project Manager.
3.06 SLEEVES & OPENINGS:
A. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and ceilings.
1. Uninsulated pipe: Provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through,
or provide a minimum of 1/2" clearance between inside and outside of the pipe.
2. Insulated pipe: Provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the full thickness of
pipe covering, with clearance for packing and caulking.
B. Caulk the space between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering, with sealant as specified in the
Sealants and Caulking Section, or pack with non - combustible packing material to within 1/2"
of both wall faces and caulk.
C. Finish and Escutcheons: Provide chrome or nickel plated escutcheons on all pipes exposed
to view where passing through walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, and similar locations.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -7
3.07 VALVES: Provide valves where shown on the drawings; in branches and /or heaters of water piping
serving a group of fixtures; on both sides of apparatus and equipment; for shutoff of risers and
branch mains; for flushing and sterilizing the system.
3.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS: Provide water hammer arrestors on water lines, installed in
upright position at all quick closing valves, solenoids, isolated plumbing fixtures, and supply
headers at plumbing fixtures. When fixtures are not protected by water hammer arrestors, provide
24" high air chambers on each water supply, properly sized and designed for maintenance and
drainage.
3.09 BACKFLOW PREVENTION: Protect plumbing fixtures, faucets with hose connections, and other
equipment having plumbing connection, against possible back siphonage.
3.10 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION: Caulk wall and floor mounted plumbing fixtures watertight
where the plumbing fixtures are in contact with walls and floors. Caulk deck - mounted trim at the
time of assembly, including fixture and casework mounted. Caulk self- rimming sinks installed in
casework.
3.11 SYSTEMS FLUSHING: The Contractor shall fill all piping systems with water and drain these
systems before they are placed in operation, in order to remove foreign materials that may have
been left on or deposited in the piping systems during installation.
3.12 TESTING:
A. The Contractor shall provide personnel and equipment, arrange for and pay the cost of all
required tests and inspections required by, and in the presence of the local jurisdiction.
Piping shall NOT be concealed until it has been inspected and approved.
1. Domestic Water: 150 psi hydrostatic pressure for four (4) hours.
2. Fuel Gas: 60 psi air for 60 minutes.
3. Soil and Vent System, and Storm Drain System: The drainage systems shall be tested
and proved tight under a water pressure test with nipples, ferrules, connections and
water closet bends being in place.
a. Water tests shall be applied to the drainage systems either in total or in sections. If
the system is tested in sections, all openings shall be tightly plugged except at the
highest point of the section being tested. The water shall be kept in the system or in
the portion under test for at least 15 minutes before inspection. Each section shall be
filled with water, but no section shall be tested at less than a 10 -foot water head. In
testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the previously tested
adjacent section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building shall have
been tested by less than a 10 foot water head.
b. After all plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, their
connections shall be tested and proved gas and watertight.
4. Pipes or joints which leak shall be taken apart and work re -done; no surface - applied
caulking is permitted as corrective work.
3.13 WATER PIPING STERILIZATION:
A. The Contractor shall notify the PETCO Project Manager prior to commencing Water Piping
Sterilization; Water Piping Sterilization must be completed prior to the Date of Turnover of
Tenant Space to PETCO.
B. Water Piping Sterilization Process: After the domestic water piping has been pressure tested,
the entire system shall be thoroughly sterilized per the requirements of the health department
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400 - 121611 15400 -8
having jurisdiction; or if there are no requirements, the entire system shall be sterilized with a
sterilization solution containing not less than 100 parts per million of available chlorine. The
sterilization solution shall be either liquid chlorine; or U.S. Army Spec. 4 -1; or calcium
hypochlorite; or chlorinated lime conforming to Fed. Spec. 0-C -114, and shall be introduced
into the system in accordance with Federal Regulations. The sterilization solution shall be
allowed to remain in the system for 24 hours, during which time all valve and faucets shall be
opened and closed several times. After the sterilization solution has been applied for 24
hours, the Contractor shall test for residual chlorine at the ends of the lines. If less than 5
parts per million is indicated, then the Contractor shall repeat the sterilization process. After
sterilization is complete, the sterilization solution shall be flushed from the system with clean
water, until the residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 parts per million.
C. After completion, the Contractor shall provide a Certificate Of Performance in the Building
Maintenance Manuals (refer to Section 01700 - Contract Closeout) stating the system
capacity; the disinfectant used; the time and rate of disinfectant applied; and residuals, in
parts per million at completion of the Water Piping Sterilization Process.
D. PETCO may test the water at any time prior to the Date of Turnover of Tenant Space to
PETCO, and if found bacteriologically unsafe, the Contractor shall re- chlorinate the system
until the water is proven acceptable.
3.14 PAINTING: All exposed overhead plumbing piping and supports, suspended from the exposed
structure, shall be dry-fall painted to match the adjacent, painted, exposed structure per Section
09900- Painting.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400- 121611 15400 -9
SECTION 15500
HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide HVAC Systems as shown on the drawings and as specified in
this Section including, but not necessarily limited to:
1. Applications and fees for,all HVAC Systems permits, services, and inspections.
2. Rooftop mounted packaged HVAC units (RTUs).
3. RTU roofcurbs with security bars, concentric transitions, sheet metal supply /return air
ducts and duct extensions, concentric flush mount diffusers and condensate piping.
4. RTU control interface module (Carrier RTU -MP).
5. RTU smoke detectors.
6. Exhaust fans, unit heaters, and associated flues and intakes.
7. Electric unit heaters, including wall and door heaters where scheduled.
8. Controls and wiring not otherwise furnished by PETCO's Inventory Agreement Vendor.
9. Seismic Restraints (as may be required by the local jurisdiction).
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 05500- Metal Fabrications.
B. Section 07720- Roof Accessories.
C. Section 15255 - Seismic Restraints.
D. Section 15300 -Fire Suppression System, Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems and Section
16000 - Electrical Systems; related work including gas, and electrical wiring and connections
to HVAC units, heaters, and exhaust fans.
E. Work by Others: The HVAC Control Panel and Control Accessories, including sensors and
wiring will be provided by PETCO's Inventory Agreement Vendor. Refer to Section 16600 -
Energy Management System.
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Prepare submittals and Request for Substitution (if any) per Section 01340 -
Submittals. Submit Rooftop Unit Product Data; Ductwork Shop Drawings; Flue Vent Product Data;
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers Product Data; Rooftop Unit Thermostat Product Data; Exhaust Fan
•
Product Data; and Unit Heaters Product Data, all in sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with
the work of this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. All materials, apparatus, equipment and installation must comply with the most stringent
standards between applicable building and mechanical codes and ordinances, State
Industrial Accident Commission, Underwriters' Laboratory and National Board of Fire
Underwriters.
B. Drawings and Coordination:
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500 - 121611 15500 -1
1. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work in the
building. Because of the scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate
all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required to meet all conditions. The
Contractor shall examine the adjoining work, on which mechanical work is dependent
for proper operation, and must report any work that must be corrected.
2. If the equipment proposed for installation requires structural, mechanical or electrical
space conditions than those shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall allow for the
cost of such modifications in the contract sum. No waiver of responsibility for defective
work shall be accepted due to failure to record and accommodate unfavorable
conditions.
C. Roof Penetrations: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all roof penetrations so
that the roof warranty is NOT altered, modified or voided.
1.06 WARRANTY/ CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall include a copy of the manufacturer's standard
product warranties in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted per Section 01700 -
Contract Closeout.
B. Building Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall include HVAC Systems Information per
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
C. Project Record Drawings: The Contractor shall record all changes as the work progresses on
a set of project record drawings kept at the jobsite, and shall provide Record Drawings to
PETCO after the Date of Substantial Completion per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.07 CLOSEOUT MAINTENANCE BY CONTRACTOR: The Contractor shall provide new, replacement,
standard duty service Filters to replace the temporary filters used during construction, by the Date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HVAC UNITS:
A. The rooftop mounted packaged HVAC Units (RTUs) shall be purchased by the Contractor
through a PETCO Inventory Account agreement:
CARRIER NATIONAL ACCOUNTS
Contact: Debbie Balcom
Deborah.Balcom@carrier.utc.com
(P) 315 - 432 -7273 (F) 315 - 433 -4615
No product/ manufacturer substitution is permitted.
B. Lead Time: 8 to 10 weeks after credit/ account approval and execution of purchase order.
C. The RTUs shall be furnished by the PETCO Inventory Account vendor complete with casing,
refrigeration system, gas -fired heating section, fan, motor and drive, filters (two sets for each
RTU), hail guard, burglar bars, economizers and barometric relief, and automatic controls.
D. The RTUs shall be furnished by the PETCO Inventory Account vendor with Roofcurbs and
Security Bars unless retrofit roofcurbs are provided. If retrofit roofcurbs are provided, then the
Contractor shall provided Security Bars per Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications, and similar to
as detailed on the drawings for other roof openings. Pressure treated wood blocking and
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500- 121611 15500 -2
shim material to level the roofcurbs shall be provided by the Contractor; Fire Retardant Wood
shall be provided by the Contractor if so required by the local jurisdiction.
E. The RTUs shall each be furnished with a relay to provide three (3) minute time delay
between starting the first and second compressor for each unit, and a lockout timer to provide
a minimum off -time of five (5) minutes between compressor cycling, and Temperature
sensing control system.
F. Temperature Control shall be as follows:
1. Each new RTU shall be provided with factory installed Carrier temperature control
system suitable for interfacing with the Energy Management System provided by
PETCO's Vendor. The control system shall provide two stages of cooling and two
stages of heating, adjustable anti -cycle timer, economizer control (where applicable),
etc, as indicated on the drawings.
2. Smoke Detection: Carrier units will be furnished with duct smoke detectors. Upon
smoke detection by the rooftop units' duct mounted smoke detectors, the rooftop units
must shut down with signal sent to the fire alarm control panel.
3. If Carrier units are NOT provided for this project, the HVAC Contractor shall furnish and
install System Sensor ionization detectors with sampling tube and auxiliary contacts.
The Electrical Contractor shall provide field power wiring. No product/manufacturer
substitution is permitted.
G. The Rooftop HVAC Units shall be furnished with disposable filters for testing and until the
construction completion.
H. The HVAC installer must be certified to handle R -410A refrigerant due to new service
• procedures and precautions.
Equipment Operation Check (EOC):
1. An Equipment Operation Check (EOC) is to be provided to PETCO after the HVAC
installation and start up is completed per the manufacturer's instruction. A Carrier
representative will inspect the equipment installation and the system operation.
2. The HVAC Subcontractor shall schedule the EOC at least three (3) weeks prior to
desired inspection date, with:
CARRIER NATIONAL ACCOUNTS
Contact: Debbie Balcom
The Contractor shall notify the PETCO Project Manager of the Equipment Operation
Check's scheduled date and time.
3. Complete start up, testing & run of all units at least 24 hours prior to Equipment
Operation Check. Contractor will be required to complete a Pre -EOC checklist form,
which is to be provided to Carrier Corporation.
4. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide at its cost a qualified service technician to be
present during the Equipment Operation Check.
5. Carrier Corporation shall provide a written copy of the EOC report to PETCO and to the
HVAC Subcontractor.
6. All defects, if any, in the Carrier rooftop HVAC units, the installation and the system
operation shall be corrected by the HVAC Subcontractor within 14 days after the
• distribution of the EOC report. The failure to identify a defect during the EOC does not
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500 - 121611 15500 -3
relieve the Landlord /Owner and the HVAC Subcontractor of the responsibility to correct
subsequently identified defects.
2.02 EXHAUST FANS:
A. Exhaust fans shall be provided with roof curbs, bases, back draft dampers, insect screens,
speed switches, and duct connections.
B. Provide motors with flush -type mounted motor starters unless motors are provided with built -
in protection.
C. Provide Security Bars for Exhaust Fans when the roof opening (inside of roof curb) exceeds
the maximum opening limits indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 GAS UNIT HEATERS (WHERE APPLICABLE): Gas Unit Heaters shall be provided complete with
electric and gas controls, gas piping and safety devices.
2.04 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS, WALL HEATERS AND DOOR HEATERS: Units shall be provided
with all electric line voltage and control connections, safety devices and mounting hardware and
thermostat and control wiring.
2.05 DUCT WORK:
A. Provide galvanized sheet metal ductwork fabricated and installed per the more stringent of
ASHRAE standards, SMACNA standards, or local jurisdiction requirements. Duct sizes
shown on drawings are the inside net clear dimensions from the inside face of insulation
(exposed ductwork) or inside face of duct sheet metal (concealed ductwork). Fabricate
ductwork of prime grade, lock forming quality galvanized steel sheets per SMACNA
standards:
1. 12" and smaller (longest side) 26 gauge.
2. 13" through 28" (longest side) 24 gauge.
3. 29" through 30" (longest side) 24 gauge; 1" x 1" x 1/8" angles at 5 feet O.C.
4. 31" through 42" (longest side) 22.gauge, 1" x 1" x 1/8" angles at 5 feet O.C.
5. 42" through 54" (longest side) 22 gauge; 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/8" angles at 4 feet O.C.
B. Provide manually operated dampers at branch ducts, two gauges heavier than the duct in
which installed, and equipped with locking quadrants. Access panels in ductwork shall be
galvanized sheet steel, two gauges heavier than the duct with rolled edges, felt strips, or
neoprene gasketing and attached to duct with sheet metal screws at a maximum of 6" on
center.
C. Flash all ducts passing through roof or exterior walls, and silicone caulk all joints. Seal all
duct seams with tape or mastic. Support ductwork from overhead with strap iron or angles.
D. Construct fittings, elbows and transitions to provide minimum noise and resistance. Where
space permits, elbows shall have a minimum radius of 1 -1/2 times the width (or depth).
Transitions must be gradual with changes not to exceed 1" x 4 ". When structural conditions
necessitate, fittings and elbows shall be made sharply but with full radius turning vanes.
E. Provide flexible connections with 30 ounce, neoprene coated, fire retardant, waterproof and
airtight glass fabric.
F. Unions, valves, dampers and controls shall not be placed in any location that will be
inaccessible after the system is complete. All damper control handles, electric controls, air
controls, and other. apparatus which must be located in an inaccessible location must be
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500- 121611 15500 -4
provided with suitable access doors or covers (fitted over a framed hole) which will permit
proper operation and servicing of HVAC Systems.
2.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION:
A. General: Provide materials complying with NFPA Bulletin 90 -A, as determined by UL Method
NFPA 225, ASTM E84 and local jurisdiction, flame spread rating under 25 and smoke-
' developed rating under 50. Acceptable Manufacturers: Owens /Corning Fiberglass, Johns -
Manville, Certainteed.
B. Exposed Ductwork: Line interior of exposed supply and return ductwork with 1" thick, 3.0
lb/cu.ft. density, black, neoprene coated fiberglass duct liner, minimum installed R -value of
4.0.
C. Wrap exterior of rectangular concealed supply ductwork with fiberglass batt duct insulation
with vapor barrier. Use bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of insulation, seal all joints,
breaks and punctures with vapor barrier compound.
1. Ceiling space in areas >9000 and up to 19800 HDD65: 2" thick, 1.0 lb/cu.ft. density,
minimum installed R -value of 6.0.
2. Ceiling space all other geographic areas except >19800 HDD65: 2" thick, 0.75 lb/cu.ft.
density, minimum installed R -value of 5.0.
D. Rectangular exposed, exterior ductwork shall be insulated with 1.5" thick insulation board, 6
Ib. /cu.ft, with ASJ or FSK Facing. Facings shall have a maximum vapor transmission rate of
.02 perms. After insulation has been installed, install aluminum corner bead at the four
corners of each duct. The entire assembly shall be coated with a 1/8" thick layer of fire
retardant vinyl acrylic mastic. Into this layer of mastic embed 10 x 10 mesh glass fabric.
Over the fabric, apply another 1/8" thick layer of insulation mastic, troweled to a smooth
finish. Minimum installed R -value of 8.0.
•
E. Ductwork insulation and adhesive must meet fire hazard classification NFPA 90A standards
and be so labeled and have an NCR (No. 6 mounting) of at least .07.
2.07 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS: Provide diffusers and supply, exhaust, and return air
registers factory painted Color White.
2.08 EQUIPMENT BASES AND VIBRATION ISOLATION: In seismic zones requiring seismic curbs, the
Contractor shall provide equipment bases and vibration isolation supports under all HVAC systems
equipment. Where suitable foundations are not detailed or specified, they shall be furnished in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Vibration isolation shall be provided under
all equipment with moving parts such as blowers, air handling units and fans, shall be properly
loaded and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.09 GAS FLUES (WHERE APPLICABLE): Provide Gas Flues per drawings, applicable gas codes,
AGA, and manufacturer's recommendations.
2.10 CONDENSATE PIPING: Provide condensate piping with P -trap to outflow onto roof surface or
piping with indirect connection to storm gutters (as indicated on drawings).
2.11 GAS PIPING (WHERE APPLICABLE): Refer to Section 15400 - Plumbing Systems.
2.12 ELECTRICAL WIRING:
A. Mechanical equipment having electric motors shall be furnished with all necessary control
services for the protection of each motor and for automatic and /or manual control.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500- 121611 15500 -5
B. All field line voltage wiring shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Sensors, thermostat
and control switches shall be located as shown or directed, and all controls, relays, starters
and wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code and all local applicable requirements.
All controls shall be furnished and proper identified with instruction for proper electrical
connections. The responsibility for proper connections and operations of HVAC equipment,
although field wired by the Electrical Contractor or the owner's vendor, is included under this
Section. Verify all electrical connections before ordering any equipment.
2.13 FIRE AND FIRE /SMOKE DAMPERS: Provide fire and combination fire /smoke dampers where
indicated or required by NFPA and all locally adopted codes. Dampers shall be designed for
horizontal or vertical air flow as required by installation. Fire dampers shall be UL labeled to meet
UL #555S and all adopted code requirements. Dampers shall have blades or curtain out of air
stream. Provide all necessary access doors, framing, and sleeves for damper mounting per UL,
NFPA and apopted code requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and. conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION: Provide sleeves, accurately dimensioned and shaped to permit passage of items
of this Section. Deliver all such sleeves, with accurate setting drawings and setting information, to
the trades providing the surfaces through which such items must penetrate and in a timely manner
to ensure inclusion in this work.
3.03 PAINTING: Refer to Section 09900 - Painting for painting of exposed overhead HVAC Systems. All
exposed overhead HVAC Systems, including but not limited to access doors, pipes, conduit,
junction boxes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents and similar HVAC Systems items which are not
otherwise factory pre- finished or pre - painted, including those with mill or galvanized finishes, and
• supports typically located suspended from the exposed structure, shall be dry -fall painted to match
the adjacent painted, exposed structure surfaces.
3:04 TESTING AND ADJUSTING:
A. Test and adjust each piece of equipment and each system as required to ensure proper
operation.
B. Balancing Report: For each system, the Contractor shall include a copy of the certified Air
Balancing Report in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted to PETCO after the Date of
Final Completion per Section 01700 - Project Closeout. The Balancing Report shall include
the following:
1. Air volumes at all supply, return, and exhaust outlets.
2. Total CFM supplied; Total CFM returned; Total Static Pressure at each fan and at each .
system; Actual CFMs; Design CFMs.
3. Motor speed, fan speed, and input ampere rating for each fan.
3.05 SYSTEM TESTING AND START -UP:
•
A. The Contractor shall provide System Startup for the first heating and first cooling season.
B. System Startup of the HVAC Systems shall be for ten (10) consecutive calendar days. During
this period of operation, the Contractor shall test each component for proper operation. The
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500- 121611 15500 -6
•
airflow shall be balanced, temperature controls adjusted, bearings tested and lubricated,
motor loads taken, flow rate balanced and pressures checked.
C. During the ten (10) day System Startup and Test period, the Contractor shall inform
designated PETCO personnel about the operation and maintenance of HVAC Systems
equipment.
D. System Startup Statement: The Mechanical Contractor shall provide a signed System Startup
Statement -- certifying acceptance of the operation and acknowledgement of the receipt of
instructions, by an authorized PETCO representative (as designated by the PETCO Project
manager or the PETCO District Manager) - -to the PETCO Project Manager, stating the
following:
(Contractor Name), the Carrier factory representative, and (HVAC
subcontractor Name), have started each and all systems; and we have
demonstrated their normal operations to PETCO representative (Name);
and we have instructed the PETCO representative in the operation and
maintenance thereof.
Contractor Representative's Name and Signature)
HVAC Subcontractor Representative's Name and
Signature
Carrier Representative's Name and Signature
PETCO Representative's Name and Signature
E. A second and third instruction meeting between the Contractor and the designated PETCO
operating personnel shall be scheduled at three (3) months and eleven (11) months after the
Date of Substantial Completion.
F. Prior to acceptance and final payment, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all HVAC
equipment is functioning properly and efficiently. Sheave changes and air qualities shall be
balanced by a certified Balancing Contractor (PE) for consistent temperatures throughout,
controls shall be adjusted, and the system shall be placed in proper operation.
3.06 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS TO PETCO: Upon completion of the entire mechanical system, and
prior to acceptance by PETCO, the Contractor shall provide a qualified systems engineer and fully
instruct the PETCO maintenance personnel in proper HVAC Systems operation and maintenance.
The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of HVAC Systems instructions and notification of
affected PETCO personnel.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR HVAC SYSTEMS
15500- 121611 15500 -7
SECTION 16000
•
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information.
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. The Contractor shall provide Electrical Systems as shown on the drawings and as specified
in this Section and as needed for a completed installation including, but not necessarily
limited to:
1. Applications and fees required for electrical permits, electrical service, and interim and
• final inspections.
2. Coordination with Electric Utility and Telephone Company for the respective services.
3. Temporary electrical provisions as required for construction purposes.
4. Excavation and backfill, concrete pads and pits for electrical systems work.
5. Electric service entrance and metering equipment.
6. Power Distribution Equipment: Hill- PHOENIX PowerPlus integrated power and control
assembly; Main Distribution Panel and remote panelboards (unless otherwise noted on
the drawings), transformers (if indicated on drawings) and timer override panel for the
Grooming Room; including associated conduits and feeders.
7. Not used.
8. Energy Management System (EMS), some of which is part of the Hill- PHOENIX
PowerPlus integrated power and control assembly.
9. Grounding system.
10. Conduit and branch circuit wiring for lighting, motors, receptacles, plugmold and
junction boxes, and Power Poles.
11. Wiring and final connections for motors, fans, and blowers.
12. Wiring and final connections for store fixtures and equipment which are furnished by
PETCO and installed by the Contractor, or provided by PETCO.
13. Conduit and power supply for exterior building signage.
14. Circuit breakers, relays, contactors and disconnect switches, magnetic starters for
motors (except in package units), wiring and final connections for the HVAC equipment
as shown on drawings, including conduit and wire for all line voltage control equipment.
15. Conduit, junction boxes, and #12 GI pull wire for the Security Alarm System, and for
the Fire Suppression System alarm system.
16. Not used.
17. Conduits, outlets, and cover plates with #12 GI pull wire in all empty conduit for the
Telephone System, Energy Management System (EMS), and Auto - Attendant customer
service call boxes.
18. Point of Sale (POS) System provisions.
19. Exterior and interior light fixtures and lamps.
20. Hangers, anchors, sleeves, chases and supports for all electrical materials and
equipment shown on the drawings or specified in this Section.
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 15500 -HVAC Systems for electrical installation specified in this Section to be
furnished as part of the mechanical work, such as temperature and pressure control devices,
and installed by the electrical subcontractor.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000- 121611 16000 -
B. Section 16600 - Energy Management System.
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Prepare submittals and Request for Product Substitution in accordance with Section
01340 - Submittals. Submit Lighting Fixture Product Data; and Electrical Panel Shop Drawings, in
sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the work of this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. All materials, apparatus, equipment and installation shall comply with the most stringent
standards between applicable building and electrical codes and ordinances, State Industrial
Accident Commission, Underwriter's Laboratory and National Board of Fire Underwriters. All
items, materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratory label of approval and
the AFL -IBEW Union Label, if applicable.
B. Drawings and Coordination:
1. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions governing the electrical work in the building.
Because of the scale of the electrical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings, and accessories that may be required to meet all conditions. The Contractor
shall examine adjoining work, on which electrical work is dependent for proper
operation, and must report any work that must be corrected.
2. If equipment requires structural, mechanical or electrical space conditions than those
shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall allow for the cost of such modifications.
No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be accepted due to a failure to
record and accommodate unfavorable conditions.
C. Location of Electrical Provisions:
1. The Contractor shall install all work, conduits, and material as specified.
2. Critical locations are dimensioned; major deviations are NOT permitted. Exact locations
of electrical provisions may be impacted by specific building conditions; if a location
conflict arises, the Contractor shall notify the PETCO Project Manager and the
Architect/ Engineer immediately for clarification, using the "Contractor's Construction
Phase- Request for Information" form that follows Section 01200 - Construction
Administration.
3. The PETCO Project Manager may direct an adjustment of the final location of any
power outlet, prior to its installation, to any adjacent location within six (6) feet from the
location shown or dimensioned on the drawings, without additional cost to PETCO.
D. Roof Penetrations: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all roof penetrations so
that the roof warranty is NOT altered, modified or voided.
1.06 WARRANTY / CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS:
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The Contractor shall include a copy of the manufacturers' product
warranties in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted per Section 01700 - Contract
Closeout.
B. Not used.
C. Building Maintenance Manuals: In addition to warranties, the Contractor shall include Electrical
Systems instructional and maintenance information per Section 01700- Contract Closeout.
D. Project Record Drawings: The Contractor shall record all changes as the work progresses on
a set of project record drawings kept at the jobsite, and shall provide Record Drawings to
PETCO after the Date of Substantial Completion per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -2
•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION WITH ELECTRIC UTILITY
A. Service utility requirements of the Electric Utility and availability of service are determined by
PETCO and the Architect/Engineer, as accurately as possible. The Contractor MUST verify
the availability of Electrical service and determine details pertaining to exact locations,
requirements and fees payable to the Electric Utility, all within the scope of the work.
B. Prior to the Date of Commencement, and as soon as possible so as to NOT cause any delay
in providing Electrical Service in a timely manner, the Contractor MUST inform the Electrical
Utility of the following AND pay the required fees to initiate service work needed from the
Electric Utility:
1. Total lighting and power loads for the project.
2. Date when electrical service is needed.
3. Date of Final Completion.
4. Estimated Store Opening date.
C. The Contractor shall pay all costs, including cable and other charges as levied by the Electric
Utility as required to provide temporary and permanent electrical service to the PETCO
Tenant Space.
2.02 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION WITH TELEPHONE COMPANY:
A. Service utility requirements of the Telephone Company and availability of service are
determined by PETCO and the Architect/ Engineer, as accurately as possible. The
Contractor MUST verify the availability of Telephone service and determine all details
pertaining to exact locations, requirements and fees payable to the Telephone Company, all
within the scope of the work.
B. The Contractor shall pay all costs, including cable and other charges as levied by the
Telephone Company as required to provide temporary and permanent telephone service to
the PETCO Tenant Space.
C. The Contractor shall contact the telephone company and verify all existing conditions before
work is started, and pay any fees that the Telephone Company may require.
2.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE/ SERVICE. GROUND:
A. Service Entrance: The Contractor shall provide Service Entrance as shown on the drawings
and per Electrical Utility requirements, including transformer pad (if required) conduit, cable,
disconnection means and devices as shown on drawings, to the point of connection with the
Electric Utility.
1. Service Entrance Conductors shall be copper and sized per Electric Utility
requirements. However, Service Entrance Conductors MAY be aluminum alloy
conductors if permitted by the Electric Utility and by the local jurisdiction. If provided,
aluminum alloy conductors shall be compact stranded conductors AA -8000 Series in
sizes with current - carrying capacity equivalent to the copper sizes indicated on the
drawings, equal to products by Alcan Cable Stabiloy. Use mechanical screw type or
compression type dual rated connectors per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Coordinate with the manufacturer of the service entrance equipment for proper lugs.
2. Other than aluminum alloy conductors for service (if permitted), no other aluminum wire
is permitted on this project.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -3
•
B. Service Ground: The Contractor shall provide a code - approved service ground from the
Service Entrance Panel to the nearest accessible cold water pipe, structural steel member,
and four 5/8" diameter x 10 ft. ground rods. Connect conduit to the rods and pipe with ground
clamps equal to T &B, Burndy Company or approved equal.
1. The Contractor shall provide a 30 ft. UFER ground in the footing structure with
grounding components connected to the Service Ground terminal with a continuous
conductor.
2. The Contractor shall secure all metal siding to Service Ground.
2.04 HILL - PHOENIX POWERPLUS INTEGRATED POWER & CONTROL ASSEMBLY:
A. The Contractor shall purchase the Hill- PHOENIX PowerPlus Integrated Power & Control
Assembly from Hill- PHOENIX in a PETCO Inventory Agreement, and shall install the
Electrical Distribution Cabinet. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery of the PowerPlus to
the jobsite with the PETCO Project Manager and the following:
Hill- PHOENIX
8166 Industrial Blvd.
Convington, GA30014
•
Contact: Scott Higginbotham, Application Engineer
( scott .higginbotham @hillphoenix.com)
Tel: 800 - 518 -6630, 770 - 285 -3216 (direct); FAX 770 - 285 -3252
No product substitutions are permitted. The Contractor shall confirm to the PETCO Project
Manager that the Contractor's purchase order for the Integrated Power & Control Assembly
has been executed at least eight (8) weeks prior to the scheduled ship date.
B. The Integrated Power & Control Assembly is provided pre -wired (with the exception of areas
indicated on the drawings) with all interconnections between panel circuit breakers,
contactors and terminal strips, and pre - installed Energy Management System components.
C. Peripheral devices and control wiring shall be furnished by PETCO Vendor SITE
CONTROLS as indicated on the drawings and per Section 16600 - Energy Management
System, and shall be installed by the Contractor.
D. The Integrated Power & Control Assembly shall be secured to the floor and wall as
recommended by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide all field wiring as indicated.
E. Refer to the drawings for the materials and scope of the Main Distribution Panel and remote
panels.
•
2.05 Not used.
2.06 LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS:
A. Light Fixtures and lamps shall be provided as scheduled on the Light Fixture Schedule, and
purchased by the Contractor from a PETCO Inventory Agreement Vendor. For lead time
scheduling, pricing and delivery, contact the following:
VILLA LIGHTING SUPPLY
2929 Chouteau Avenue, St. Louis MO 63103
Contact: Jay Becker, Account Manager (jay.becker @villalighting.com)
Toll Free: 1- 800 - 325 -0963 x 458; Dir: 1- 314 - 633 -0458; Fax: 1- 314 - 633 -0459
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -4
No product/ manufacturer substitutions are permitted.
B. All lamps, including replacements if required, shall be new, with wattage as scheduled,
energy efficient types.
1. Fluorescent Lamps: All lamps shall be cool white, energy saving type, unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
2. High Intensity Discharge Fixture Lamps (HID): All lamps shall be metal halide, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
2.07 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM:
A. The Fire Alarm System and the Security Alarm System shall be provided by a PETCO
Vendor through a PETCO National Account agreement. For clarification of the installation of
the Fire Alarm System and the Security Alarm System, contact the following:
VECTOR SECURITY
Contact: Thomas Cook (tecook @vectorsecurity.com)
Tel. 703 - 369 -1444 ext. 51209; Cell 703 - 881 -6605; E -fax 206 - 350 -2203
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work related to the Fire Alarm System and the Security
Alarm System with the PETCO Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide all conduit,
junction boxes and pull wire where indicated on the drawings.
C. Where not a part of a building -wide Fire Alarm System designed by others, the Fire
Suppression System Flow Detectors will be wired into the building fire alarm system by the
PETCO Vendor! Security Alarm Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall provide interface between the Security Alarm System and the Landlord's
fire alarm panel where required by the local jurisdiction.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate and make provisions for this work, but the cost of the PETCO
Vendor/ Security Alarm Contractor's work is borne by PETCO.
2.08 POWER POLES: The Contractor shall provide Power Poles at PETCO store fixtures as scheduled
on the drawings, and shall verify the final location of Power Poles before commencement of Power
Poles installation work. The final location for Power Poles shall be as indicated on the PETCO-
issued Store Fixture Plan, furnished to the jobsite by a PETCO Representative. Refer to the
drawings for the PETCO Vendor / Contractor Responsibilities.
2.09 DUPLEX RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, AND TELEPHONE OUTLETS:
A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide 3 -pole grounding type with the third pole (U- shaped) grounded
to the conduit system, equal to Hubbell #5252 and /or GF5362 -1 and/or CR53521G, with
acceptable alternative products by Cooper /Crouse- Hinds, Leviton, Pass & Seymour or Slater.
Isolated Ground (IG) receptacles shall be orange (not white with orange triangle). A single
duplex receptacles dedicated to a 20A -1 P circuit shall be Hubbell #5352 or equal.
B. Switches: 20 amp, 120/277 volt AC throughout, quiet type, silver button contact type, equal to
Arrow Hart No. 1991 -1, 1991 -2, 1991 -3, with acceptable alternative products by Hubbell,
Leviton, Pass & Seymour or Slater.
C. Devices (Receptacles, Switches, Telephone Outlets) and Coverplate Colors:
1. Interior Painted Color White Walls: Provide Color White Devices and Coverplates.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -5
2. Interior Painted Color Other Than White Walls: Provide Color Ivory Devices and
Coverplates
3. Selected Receptacles: Some receptacles are indicated to be Grey in color to
distinguish these devices which are on controlled circuits from those which are not.
D. Plugmold: Provide by Wiremold Corporation in color as indicated on plans. No product
substitution is permitted.
2.10 OTHER DEVICES:
A. Rigid conduit: Provide 3/4" minimum size galvanized or sherardized steel, UL approved, with
equipment ground conductor where required by code.
B. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Provide 3/4:" minimum size. NEC standard, UL approved,
with equipment grounding conductor where required by code.
C. Metal Clad (MC) Cable: NEC Standard, UL approved may be used for wiring of lighting
above suspended ceilings and in cavity partitions where specifically defined on the drawings.
Minimum wire size conductor #12 AWG copper, including green insulated equipment ground,
galvanized steel or aluminum interlocking cladding, sized in accordance with the NEC.
D. Flexible Conduit: Provide NEC Standard, UL approved, for short connections to motors only,
with ground conductors.
E. Wire and Cable: Provide NEC Standard, UL approved, 600 volt insulated, color coded and
wire sizing as required by code. Provide insulated bushings or insulated fittings at all raceway
ends.
1. Wire and cable larger than #1: Provide Type THHN.
2. Wire and cable #1 and smaller: Provide Type THHN unless otherwise noted.
3. Branch circuit wiring /installed wiring channels of continuous rows fixtures: Provide
Type THHN 90" C rated.
4. Conductors larger than #8 and Control Wiring: Provide stranded, with label at each end
for Control Wiring.
5. Underfloor Duct: Provide Type THNN.
6. Conductor insulation shall be color coded as follows (unless local codes differ, in which
case the local codes shall prevail):
AC 480 Volt and Above
Phase A — Brown
Phase B — Orange
Phase C — Yellow
Neutral — White
208Y/120V System
Phase A - Black •
Phase B - Red
Phase C - Blue
Neutral — White
F. Safety switches: Provide horsepower rated, Type HD externally operated quick -make and
quick- break, and shall be fusible or non - fusible, as indicated and with ratings as shown on
the drawings.
G. Switches having dual ratings (higher rates when used with dual - elements fuses) shall have
ratings indicated on metal plates riveted or otherwise permanently fastened to the enclosure.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -6
H. Motor Starters: Provide magnetic starter as noted on the drawings, with line voltage
protection in three phases with a holding contact, two N.O. and two N.C. auxiliary contact
(unless otherwise noted), HOA, pilot light and reset button in the face. Coil operating voltage
shall be 120 volt.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper
completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 DEMOLITION & PATCHING: No structural member shall be cut without the written consent of the
Structural Engineer or Record. All finish surfaces requiring demolition and patching for Electrical
Systems work shall be restored to match the adjacent finish.
3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: Depth of exterior trenches shall meet the requirements of local
codes and shall be at least below the frost line. After conduits have been assembled, tested,
inspected and approved, backfill trenches per Section 02220 - Trenching.
3.04 HILL - PHOENIX INTEGRATED POWER & CONTROL ASSEMBLY: Install the Hill- PHOENIX
PowerPlus Integrated Power & Control Assembly in the location shown on the drawings. The Hill -
PHOENIX PowerPlus Integrated Power & Control Assembly EMS system shall be pre - installed in
the Integrated Power & Control Assembly. The Contractor shall provide all field wiring as indicated.
3.05 CONDUIT:
A. All conduit shall be concealed in floors, walls, or above ceilings in new construction, unless
specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. However, approval from the PETCO Project
Manager may be obtained in order to run exposed conduits in receiving areas or in areas
where existing wall construction may restrict concealed conduit installation. The PETCO
Project Manager's approval must be secured by the Contractor prior to the start of
construction.
B. Conduit Installation:
1. Interior: Provide rigid galvanized conduit or electrical metallic tubing with screw or
compression type fittings. Unless existing conditions dictate, all interior wiring and
conduits shall be run tight to the underside of the roof deck, and parallel to or
perpendicular to the building /tenant space column lines. Bends shall be made with
standard conduit elbows or conduit bent to not less than standard conduit elbows, free
from dents or flattening.
2. Concrete Slab Encasement: Provide rigid PVC conduit with ground wire.
3. Underground:
a. Provide rigid metallic, PVC coated conduit where in direct contact equal to
Occidental Occal 40. Conduit ends shall be fitted with insulating type device or
bushing. If electrical work penetrates a waterproofing membrane, then the
electrical work shall be installed using waterproof materials.
b. Acceptable Alternative: Provide PVC conduit with a ground wire if approved by
local jurisdiction. Turn up with steel elbows.
c. Buried conduit shall be a minimum of 36" below finish grade.
4. Roof: Flash roof penetrations per Section 07720 -Roof Accessories and /or as detailed
on the drawings.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -7
•
C. Horizontal runs of conduit shall be supported from the building structure by clevis -type
hangers, constructed of bent steel bars with round steel hanger rods. Perforated -type
hangers and use of wood are NOT permitted.
1. Multiple horizontal runs of parallel conduit may be supported by Unistrut or similar
products.
2. Hanger rods shall be supported using malleable iron inserts, or bolted to construction.
3. All materials and equipment installed shall be firmly supported and secured to the
construction. Anchors where necessary, shall be non - hygroscopic and shall be inserted
in holes drilled in the construction per the manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 BRANCH CIRCUITS:
A. Joints, splices, taps, and connections for 600 volt conductors shall be solderless. Provide
Scotchlock, Buchanan, or Marr connectors for wire #10 AWG and smaller; provide S &B "Lock
Tite" connectors for wire #8 and larger.
B. Tape all connections with rubber type tape 1 -1/2 times the thickness of the conductor
insulation, then covered with friction tape or plastic equal to Scotch Wrap No. 33.
3.07 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING FOR LIGHTING AND MISCELLANEOUS SINGLE PHASE LOADS:
A. Branch Circuit Wiring: Provide No. 12 Type THHN, protected by 20 ampere circuit breakers.
Provide larger wires, as indicated on the drawings or as required to reduce voltage drop.
B. All branch circuit wiring shall be done with identification (white) neutrals and color -coded
phase wire. Splices and connections shall be made with pressure type connectors.
C. Where multiple conductors are installed in a single conduit, provide de- rating of conductors
and increased conductor sizes in accordance with NEC or applicable codes. Where switch
leg conduit is indicated without conduit size or number of wires, provide 2 #12 conductors in
a 3/4" conduit.
3.08 LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS:
A. Light Fixtures shall be wired with 90 degree C rated insulated conductors same size as
circuit.
B. Light Fixtures in Areas of Exposed Construction: Chain hung light fixtures shall be anchored
to bottom joist chords with "C" clamps, round unperforated conduit, or by using Unistrut as
detailed on the drawings. Do NOT suspend directly from the roof deck, ductwork or pipes.
Direct mounted light fixtures shall be secured per the manufacturer's specifications.
C. Light Fixtures in Areas of Finished Ceilings: Light fixtures shall be suspended from the
building structure with #8 wires, independent of the suspended ceiling.
3.09 TELEPHONE SERVICE:
A. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide a minimum 4" PVC
conduit (at 36" minimum below grade if underground) for the telephone service from the
property line or other service point to the main telephone board, and provide a 25 pair cable
in that conduit.
B. The Contractor shall provide a fire retardant plywood service board where shown on the
drawings, painted gray (2 coats of latex enamel). Provide a No. 6 ground wire and 120 volt
dedicated circuits as indicated on drawings.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -8
•
C. Provide minimum 3/4" conduit with 50 pound test monofilament pull string from the
Telephone Outlets shown on the drawings. Coordinate mounting heights of Telephone
Outlets and floor outlet locations with PETCO.
•
D. All communications wire and telephone shall be furnished and installed by PETCO.
3.10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: The .Contractor shall provide all conduit, pull string, and outlets as
indicated on the drawings. A PETCO Vendor will furnish and install the Fire Alarm System.
3.11 SECURITY SYSTEM: The Contractor shall provide all conduit, pull string, and outlets as indicated
on the drawings. A PETCO Vendor will furnish and install the Security System.
3.12 POINT OF SALES (POS) SYSTEM: The Contractor shall provide all conduit, pull string, and outlets
as indicated on the drawings. A PETCO Vendor will furnish and install the POS System.
3.13 HVAC SYSTEMS:
A. Unless otherwise determined by the Contractor and designated among subcontractors, or
unless indicated otherwise on drawings, the following HVAC Systems work shall be provided
by the mechanical contractor:
1. Furnish and install controls and low voltage equipment, including HVAC systems
transformers, less final electrical connections.
2. Furnish and install motors, less final electrical connections.
3. Furnish and install equipment such as solenoid valves, which are to be installed in
piping lines, and control equipment which forms an integral part of the HVAC systems,
less final electrical connections.
B. Unless otherwise determined by the Contractor and designated among subcontractors, or
unless indicated otherwise on drawings, the following HVAC systems work shall be provided
by the electrical subcontractor.
1. Provide conduit, outlets, wiring, disconnect switches, and other control line voltage
equipment, including conduit and control wiring, as required for full equipment
operation.
2. Provide final electrical connections for all control equipment, such as solenoid valves
that are to be installed in piping lines, or control equipment that forms an integral part
of the HVAC Systems.
3. Provide final electrical connections for all motors, magnetic starters, line voltage
controls and line voltage side of all equipment furnished by others.
4. Provide a weatherproof GFI convenience outlet at each HVAC rooftop units. Run
conduit and wire inside roof curb where allowed by applicable code.
5. Provide conduit and outlet boxes for control devices that are provided by others.
6. Provide final electrical connections for smoke and ionization detectors furnished and
installed by HVAC Contractor. •
7. Provide final electrical connections for HVAC system ionization detectors that will be
furnished and installed by others.
3.14 EXTERIOR BUILDING AND PYLON SIGNAGE: Provide sub - feeder, branch circuit conduit and
wire, disconnect switch, and final electrical connections. Refer to Section 10400 - Exterior Building &
Pylon Signage.
3.15 LABEL IDENTIFICATION:
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -9
A. The Contractor shall provide Label Identification using a Micarta Nameplate, 1/16" thick,
Color Black with engraved 1/4" white letters. Hand operated, embossed tape (for example,
"Dymo Labelmaker ") is NOT acceptable.
B. Locations requiring Label Identification:
1. Panelboards, cabinets, starters, safety switches, and other apparatus used for
operation and control of circuits, appliances and equipment: Provide bolted Micarta
Nameplates on the interior and exterior of branch panels, main panel circuits, and on
the exterior of disconnect switches, motor controls, major J -boxes (power and
auxiliary), push buttons, thermal switches, time switches, and similar equipment.
2. All Power Receptacles Other Than 120V: Indicate voltage and phase.
3. Wiring by Contractor that is to be terminated by others: Provide Micarta Nameplate
indicating circuit number, source or destination.
3.16 PAINTING:
A. All exposed overhead Electrical System conduit and supports in the roof structure shall be
cleaned prior to painting, and dry -fall painted to match the adjacent, painted, exposed
structure per Section 09900 - Painting.
B. The Contractor shall paint exposed conduit, junction boxes and similar items which are not
factory pre- finished/ pre - painted, so as to match the paint color of the adjacent wall or ceiling,
unless otherwise shown on the drawings or as otherwise directed by the PETCO Project
Manager.
3.17 TESTING: The Contractor shall test all wiring and connections for continuity, short circuits and
improper ground. Each lighting panel shall be tested with mains open, branches connected, wall
switches closed, fixtures permanently connected. Each individual power circuit shall be tested as
the panel or switchboard with the power equipment connected for proper operation. Provide testing
equipment and pay testing costs, including the costs of replacement or repairs due to improper
initial installation or damage resulting from testing.
3.18 AMPACITY TEST REPORT:
A. Three (3) days prior to the Date of Substantial Completion, the electrical subcontractor shall
take load readings on all panels, and shall provide all information to the Contractor
immediately - -so that the Contractor can FAX a copy of the Ampacity Test Report to the
PETCO Tenant Improvement Engineer of Record; and to the PETCO Project Manager:
Acertus Consulting Group, LLC
Contact: Brian Timmons, PME Designer
FAX: 913- 322 -5155
PETCO ANIMAL SUPPLIES, INC.
Contact: (Confirm PETCO Project Manager with project architect at SBLM)
FAX: 858 - 526 -2830
B. The Contractor shall include the Ampacity Test Report in the Building Maintenance Manuals,
submitted to PETCO per Section 01700 - Contract Closeout requirements.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16000 - 121611 16000 -10
SECTION 16600
ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES TERMINOLOGY: Where referenced in this Section,
"Contractor" refers to the SAME entity as "Landlord Contractor ". Refer to Section 01010 - Summary
of Work for additional "Division of Responsibilities Terminology" information. (Exhibit B)
1.02 SUMMARY:
A. PETCO will furnish the Energy Management System (EMS) under a National Account
agreement. with COMFORT SYSTEMS USA. The Contractor shall install all accessories for
the Energy Management System as shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and
as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not limited to:
1. Hill- PHOENIX PowerPlus Integrated Power & Control Assembly.
2. Sensing devices, including temperature, light and override switches.
3. Power and control conductors and connections to the controlled equipment.
1.03 RELATED WORK: Section 15500 -HVAC Systems; Section 16000 - Electrical Systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: All materials, apparatus, equipment and installation shall comply with the
most stringent standards between applicable building and electrical codes and ordinances. State
Industrial Accident Commission, Underwriters' Laboratory and National Board of Fire Underwriters.
All items, material and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratory Label of approval and the
AFL -IBEW Union Label, if applicable.
1.05 FIELD INSTALLATION/ CHECKOUT OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: COMFORT
SYSTEMS USA will provide one field installation/ checkout, so as to verify the Energy Management
System installation and operation. The scheduling of this field trip must be coordinated by the
Contractor with the PETCO Project Manager, so as to provide adequate completion of electrical
work at the time of the COMFORT SYSTEMS USA field installation/ checkout inspection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES:
A. The Energy Management System, including DDC Controller, Relay/ Contactor Panels and
HVAC Controls will be furnished by COMFORT SYSTEMS USA, in a National Account
agreement (i.e. direct purchase by PETCO):
COMFORT SYSTEMS USA NATIONAL ACCOUNTS
2655 Fortune Circle West, Suites E & F
Indianapolis, Indiana 46241
First Point of Contact: Paul Sawyer, Controls Engineer
(paul .sawyer @comfortsystemsusa.com)
Tel. 317 - 638 -5363; Tel. Direct 317 - 246 -5170
FAX 317 - 246 -4265
Second Point of Contact: Jean Oskins
Tel. 317 - 638 -5363; Tel. Direct 317 - 246 -4277
No product substitution is permitted.
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
16600 - 121611 16600 -1
•
B. The Energy Management System is manufactured by COMFORT SYSTEMS USA. Some of
the system components are factory installed in the Hill- PHOENIX PowerPlus Integrated
Power & Control Assembly, and in most Carrier HVAC units, while others are installed by the
Electrical Contractor:
1. The DDC Controller and HVAC Controls will be furnished by COMFORT SYSTEMS
USA and installed by the electrical contractor.
2. The COMFORT SYSTEMS USA override panel and CPU will be furnished loose for
installation and final connection by COMFORT SYSTEMS USA checkout personnel.
3. All temperature sensors, low voltage control wiring, sensor wiring and sensing devices
shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor in a conduit/ junction box system provided
by the Contractor. The low voltage cable may be run exposed above the ceiling and at
the roof joist if the electrical code permits.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY: The Energy Management System will be furnished to the jobsite approximately two
weeks prior to the Date of Substantial Completion Date of Tenant Space Turnover to PETCO.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES:
A. The electrical subcontractor shall install all provisions for the Energy Management System as
indicated on the drawings..
B. The electrical subcontractor shall coordinate with COMFORT SYSTEMS USA checkout
personnel when COMFORT SYSTEMS USA provides checkout of the Energy Management
System and verifies the system's field operation.
3.03 FIELD INSTALLATION /CHECKOUT OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
A. The Contractor and electrical subcontractor shall schedule the installation/ checkout with
COMFORT SYSTEMS USA for a date and time.
B. COMFORT SYSTEMS USA System Startup Deficiency Report: Upon completion of the field
checkout, the COMFORT SYSTEMS USA inspecting representative will prepare and issue a
"COMFORT SYSTEMS USA System Startup Deficiency Report" to the Contractor, and will
forward a copy of the report to the PETCO Project Manager for inclusion in the PETCO
Inspection Punchlist.
•
C. The costs associated with any subsequent field trip inspection that may be determined as
being required by COMFORT SYSTEMS USA as a result of inadequate preparation for the
Energy Management System, installation by the electrical subcontractor prior to the date of
the field installation/ checkout inspection by COMFORT SYSTEMS USA, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor/ electrical subcontractor.
END OF SECTION
PETCO South Tigard, OR Exhibit B Specs South Tigard, OR ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
16600 - 121611 16600 -2